TASKalfa 420i

TASKalfa 520i

SERVICE
MANUAL
Published in June 2011
2KSSM064
Rev. 4
 CAUTION

RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF

USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.

It may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste stream. Check with your local
solid waste officials for details in your area for proper disposal.

ATTENTION

IL Y A UN RISQUE D’EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE DE

TYPE INCORRECT. METTRE AU REBUT LES BATTERIES UTILISEES SELON LES INSTRUC-
TIONS DONNEES.

Il peut être illégal de jeter les batteries dans des eaux d’égout municipales. Vérifiez avec les fonc-
tionnaires municipaux de votre région pour les détails concernant des déchets solides et une mise
au rebut appropriée.
Revision history

Revision Date Replaced pages Remarks

1 December 14, 2009 1-3-4, 1-3-5, 1-3-10, 1-3-12 to 1-3-16, 1-3-22, 1-3-23, -
1-3-38, 1-3-41 to 1-3-43, 1-3-58, 1-3-59, 1-3-60, 1-3-74,
1-3-81, 1-3-84, 1-3-94 to 1-3-97, 1-3-100, 1-3-101, 1-4-3,
1-4-4, 1-4-8, 1-5-24, 1-5-25, 1-5-28, 1-6-1, 2-3-6, 2-3-7,
2-3-15 to 2-3-17, 2-4-1, 2-4-3 to 2-4-6
2 February 4, 2010 1-2-4, 1-2-11, 1-3-2, 1-3-3, 1-3-5, 1-3-25, 1-3-26, 1-3-50 to -
1-3-53, 1-3-74, 1-3-95, 1-4-8, 1-4-11, 2-1-11
3 May 7, 2010 1-1-1 -
4 June 27,2011 1-3-94, 1-3-95 -
This page is intentionally left blank.
 Safety precautions

This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of
their customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel
are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions
described here before engaging in maintenance activities.
Safety warnings and precautions

Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and
to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:

DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with warning messages using this symbol.

WARNING: Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance
with warning messages using this symbol.

CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with warning messages using this symbol.

Symbols
The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific point
of attention is shown inside the symbol.

General warning.

Warning of risk of electric shock.

Warning of high temperature.

indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.

General prohibited action.

Disassembly prohibited.

indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.

General action required.

Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.

Always ground the copier.

1.Installation Precautions

WARNING

• Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to
one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check
that it is adequate for the rated current. .............................................................................................

• Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire or
electric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause
explosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes,
lightning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the
proper authorities. ............................................................................................................................

CAUTION:

• Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. .......

• Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. ................
• Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material.

This may cause fire. .........................................................................................................................

• Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool
as possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ...........

• Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. ...............................................

• Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this may cause
the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury. ...........................................................

• Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer is acciden-
tally ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immedi-
ately. If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical
attention. ......................................................................................................................................

• Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier’s
instruction handbook. .....................................................................................................................
2.Precautions for Maintenance

WARNING

• Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ...............

• Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related
brochures. .......................................................................................................................................

• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms
and protective circuits. .....................................................................................................................

• Always use parts having the correct specifications. ..........................................................................

• Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related bro-
chure when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other serious
accident. ..........................................................................................................................................

• When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a
part, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ................................................................

• Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. .............
• Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. If it
is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. ..............................................................

• Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light may
damage eyesight. ...........................................................................................................................

• Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric
shock if handled improperly. ............................................................................................................

CAUTION
• Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they are
safely secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections. ..........................................................

• Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. ........

• Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. ..................................
• Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can cause
abnormally high temperatures. ........................................................................................................
• Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement. ....................

• Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing
them; always hold the plug itself. .....................................................................................................

• Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with a
cable cover or other appropriate item. .............................................................................................

• Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks. ........

• Remove toner completely from electronic components. ...................................................................

• Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. ....................................
• After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that were
removed, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector,
trapped wire and missing screws. ...................................................................................................

• Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction
handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. ......................................

• Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: .....................................
· Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely.
· Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.
· Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the power
switch on.
· Always wash hands afterwards.

• Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to
fire in a furnace, etc. .......................................................................................................................

• Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outlet imme-
diately. ............................................................................................................................................

3.Miscellaneous

WARNING

• Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other than the
specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. .....................................................................................
This page is intentionally left blank.
 2KR/2KS

CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 Specifications..........................................................................................................................................1-1-1
1-1-2 Parts names............................................................................................................................................1-1-4
(1) Machine.............................................................................................................................................1-1-4
(2) Operation panel.................................................................................................................................1-1-7
1-1-3 Machine cross section ............................................................................................................................1-1-8

1-2 Installation
1-2-1 Installation environment .........................................................................................................................1-2-1
1-2-2 Unpacking and installation ......................................................................................................................1-2-2
(1) Installation procedure ........................................................................................................................1-2-2
(2) Setting initial copy modes................................................................................................................1-2-10
1-2-3 Installing the key counter (option) .........................................................................................................1-2-11
1-2-4 Replacing the expanded memory .........................................................................................................1-2-16

1-3 Maintenance Mode

1-3-1 Maintenance mode .................................................................................................................................1-3-1
(1) Executing a maintenance item ..........................................................................................................1-3-1
(2) Maintenance modes item list.............................................................................................................1-3-2
(3) Contents of the maintenance mode items.........................................................................................1-3-6
1-3-2 Management mode .............................................................................................................................1-3-107
(1) Using the management mode .......................................................................................................1-3-107
(2) Common Settings..........................................................................................................................1-3-108
(3) Copy Settings ................................................................................................................................1-3-111
(4) Sending Settings ...........................................................................................................................1-3-111
(5) Document Box Settings.................................................................................................................1-3-111
(6) Printer Settings..............................................................................................................................1-3-112
(7) Printing Reports/Sending Notice ...................................................................................................1-3-112
(8) Adjustment/Maintenance...............................................................................................................1-3-113
(9) Date/Timer.....................................................................................................................................1-3-113
(10) Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One Touch Keys).......................................................1-3-114
(11) Internet Browser Setup..................................................................................................................1-3-115
(12) Applications ...................................................................................................................................1-3-116
(13) System Settings ............................................................................................................................1-3-116
(14) User Login Administration .............................................................................................................1-3-118
(15) Job accounting ..............................................................................................................................1-3-119

1-4 Troubleshooting
1-4-1 Paper misfeed detection .........................................................................................................................1-4-1
(1) Paper misfeed indication ...................................................................................................................1-4-1
(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions ..................................................................................................1-4-2
(3) Paper misfeeds ...............................................................................................................................1-4-12
1-4-2 Self-diagnosis .......................................................................................................................................1-4-24
(1) Self-diagnostic function ...................................................................................................................1-4-24
(2) Self diagnostic codes ......................................................................................................................1-4-26
1-4-3 Image formation problems ....................................................................................................................1-4-48
(1) No image appears (entirely white)...................................................................................................1-4-49
(2) No image appears (entirely black)...................................................................................................1-4-49
(3) Image is too light. ............................................................................................................................1-4-50
(4) Background is visible.......................................................................................................................1-4-50
(5) A white line appears longitudinally. .................................................................................................1-4-50
(6) A black line appears longitudinally. .................................................................................................1-4-51
(7) A black line appears laterally...........................................................................................................1-4-51
(8) One side of the copy image is darker than the other.......................................................................1-4-51
(9) Black dots appear on the image......................................................................................................1-4-51
(10) Image is blurred...............................................................................................................................1-4-52
(11) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original. ...................................1-4-52
(12) The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original. ...................................1-4-52
(13) Paper creases. ................................................................................................................................1-4-52
(14) Offset occurs. ..................................................................................................................................1-4-53
2KR/2KS

(15) Image is partly missing....................................................................................................................1-4-53

(16) Fusing is poor..................................................................................................................................1-4-53
(17) Image is out of focus. ......................................................................................................................1-4-53
(18) Image center does not align with the original center. ......................................................................1-4-54
(19) Image is not square.........................................................................................................................1-4-54
1-4-4 Electric problems ..................................................................................................................................1-4-55
1-4-5 Mechanical problems ............................................................................................................................1-4-60
1-4-6 Send error code ....................................................................................................................................1-4-62
(1) Scan to SMB error codes ................................................................................................................1-4-62
(2) Scan to FTP error codes .................................................................................................................1-4-63
(3) Scan to E-mail error codes..............................................................................................................1-4-64
(4) Network Twain error codes .............................................................................................................1-4-65
(5) Software trouble error codes ...........................................................................................................1-4-65

1-5 Assembly and Disassembly

1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly............................................................................................1-5-1
(1) Precautions .......................................................................................................................................1-5-1
(2) Drum..................................................................................................................................................1-5-1
(3) Toner .................................................................................................................................................1-5-1
(4) How to tell a genuine Kyocera Mita toner container..........................................................................1-5-2
1-5-2 Paper feed section ..................................................................................................................................1-5-3
(1) Detaching and refitting the forwarding, paper feed and separation pulleys ......................................1-5-3
(2) Detaching and refitting the MP separation, MP paper feed and MP forwarding pulleys ...................1-5-5
(3) Detaching and refitting the left and right registration cleaner ..........................................................1-5-10
1-5-3 Optical section ......................................................................................................................................1-5-12
(1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp......................................................................................1-5-12
(2) Detaching and refitting the scanner wires .......................................................................................1-5-16
(3) Detaching and refitting the ISU (reference).....................................................................................1-5-20
(4) Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit .................................................................................1-5-22
(5) Adjusting the skew of the laser scanner unit (reference) ................................................................1-5-24
1-5-4 Drum section.........................................................................................................................................1-5-25
(1) Detaching and refitting the drum unit ..............................................................................................1-5-25
(2) Detaching and refitting the main charger unit..................................................................................1-5-26
(3) Detaching and refitting the drum separation claws .........................................................................1-5-27
1-5-5 Developing section................................................................................................................................1-5-28
(1) Detaching and refitting the developing unit .....................................................................................1-5-28
1-5-6 Transfer section ....................................................................................................................................1-5-29
(1) Detaching and refitting the transfer roller unit .................................................................................1-5-29
1-5-7 Fuser section ........................................................................................................................................1-5-30
(1) Detaching and refitting the fuser unit...............................................................................................1-5-30
(2) Detaching and refitting the heat roller separation claws..................................................................1-5-31
(3) Detaching and refitting the press roller............................................................................................1-5-32
(4) Detaching and refitting the fuser heater ..........................................................................................1-5-33
(5) Detaching and refitting the heat roller .............................................................................................1-5-34
(6) Detaching and refitting the fuser thermistor 1 and 2 ......................................................................1-5-35
(7) Adjusting front position of the fuser unit (adjusting lateral squareness) ..........................................1-5-36
1-5-8 Others ...................................................................................................................................................1-5-37
(1) Detaching and refitting the ozone filter 1 and 2...............................................................................1-5-37
(2) Detaching and refitting the dust filter 1 and 2..................................................................................1-5-38
(3) Detaching and refitting the ISU filter................................................................................................1-5-39
(4) Detaching and refitting the hard disk...............................................................................................1-5-40
(5) Direction of installing the principal fan motors.................................................................................1-5-43

1-6 Requirements on PWB Replacement

1-6-1 Upgrading the firmware...........................................................................................................................1-6-1
1-6-2 Adjustment-free variable resistors (VR) ..................................................................................................1-6-1
1-6-3 Remarks on main PWB replacement......................................................................................................1-6-2
1-6-4 Remarks on engine PWB replacement...................................................................................................1-6-3

2-1 Mechanical construction

2-1-1 Paper feed section ..................................................................................................................................2-1-1
(1) Cassette paper feed section..............................................................................................................2-1-1
(2) MP tray paper feed section ...............................................................................................................2-1-3
 2KR/2KS

2-1-2 Optical section ........................................................................................................................................2-1-5

(1) Image scanner section ......................................................................................................................2-1-5
(2) Laser scanner section .......................................................................................................................2-1-7
2-1-3 Drum section...........................................................................................................................................2-1-9
2-1-4 Developing section................................................................................................................................2-1-11
(1) Single component developing system.............................................................................................2-1-13
2-1-5 Transfer and separation sections..........................................................................................................2-1-14
2-1-6 Fuser section ........................................................................................................................................2-1-15
2-1-7 Eject and switchback sections ..............................................................................................................2-1-17
2-1-8 Duplex section ......................................................................................................................................2-1-19

2-2 Electrical Parts Layout

2-2-1 Electrical parts layout..............................................................................................................................2-2-1
(1) PWBs ................................................................................................................................................2-2-1
(2) Switches and sensors .......................................................................................................................2-2-3
(3) Motors ...............................................................................................................................................2-2-5
(4) Others................................................................................................................................................2-2-6

2-3 Operation of the PWBs

2-3-1 Power source PWB.................................................................................................................................2-3-1
2-3-2 Engine PWB............................................................................................................................................2-3-5
2-3-3 Main PWB .............................................................................................................................................2-3-14
2-3-4 ISM PWB ..............................................................................................................................................2-3-23
2-3-5 Main operation PWB .............................................................................................................................2-3-26

2-4 Appendixes
Maintenance parts list .............................................................................................................................2-4-1
Maintenance kits .....................................................................................................................................2-4-2
Periodic maintenance procedures ..........................................................................................................2-4-3
Chart of image adjustment procedures...................................................................................................2-4-7
Wiring diagram No.1 ...............................................................................................................................2-4-9
Wiring diagram No.2 .............................................................................................................................2-4-10
Wiring diagram No.3 .............................................................................................................................2-4-11
Wiring diagram No.4 .............................................................................................................................2-4-12
Wiring diagram No.5 .............................................................................................................................2-4-13

INSTALLATION GUIDE
DOCUMENT PROCESSOR
PAPER FEEDER
3000 SHEETS PAPER FEEDER
DOCUMENT FINISHER
3000 SHEETS DOCUMENT FINISHER
CENTER-FOLDING UNIT
MAILBOX
HOLE PUNCH UNIT
BUILT-IN FINISHER
JOB SEPARATOR
FAX System
2KR/2KS

This page is intentionally left blank.

 2KR/2KS-3

1-1 Specifications

1-1-1 Specifications

Machine

Type ................................................ Desktop

Printing method............................... Electrophotography by semiconductor laser, tandem drum system
Supported original types ................. Sheets, books and three-dimensional objects
Maximum original size: A3/Ledger
Original feed system ....................... Fixed
Paper weight................................... Cassette : 60 to 105 g/m2
MP tray : 45 to 200 g/m2
Paper type ...................................... Cassette: Plain, Rough, Vellum, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color (Colour),
Prepunched, Letterhead, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
(Duplex: Same as Simplex)
MP tray: Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,
Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock (Hagaki), Color (Colour), Prepunched,
Letterhead, Thick, Envelope, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Paper size....................................... Cassette: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, Ledger, Legal, Letter, LetterR, Statement,
Oficio II, 8.5 x 13.5", Folio, 8K, 16K, 16KR
MP tray: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, B6R, A6R, Ledger, Legal, Letter, LetterR,
ExecutiveR, Statement, Oficio II, 8.5 x 13.5", Folio, 8K, 16K, 16KR,
Postcards (100 x 148 mm), Return postcard (148 x 200 mm),
Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10),
Envelope #9 (Commercial #9), Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4), Monarch,
ISO B5, Youkei 2, Youkei 4
Zoom level ...................................... Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments
Auto mode: Preset zoom
Printing speed................................. 42 ppm model
A4/Letter: 42 sheets/min.
A4R/LetterR: 27 sheets/min.
A3/Ledger: 23 sheets/min.
B4/Legal: 23 sheets/min.
B5: 42 sheets/min.
B5R: 22 sheets/min.
A5R: 16 sheets/min.
52 ppm model
A4/Letter: 52 sheets/min.
A4R/LetterR: 31 sheets/min.
A3/Ledger: 26 sheets/min.
B4/Legal: 26 sheets/min.
B5: 52 sheets/min.
B5R: 24 sheets/min.
A5R: 18 sheets/min.
First copy time ................................ 3.9 s or less
Warm-up time ................................. Room temperature 22°C/71.6°F, 60% RH
Power on: 30 s or less
Sleep mode: 15 s or less
Paper capacity ................................ Cassette : 500 sheets (80 g/m2)
MP tray : 200 sheets (80 g/m2)
Output tray capacity........................ Top tray : 250 sheets (80 g/m2)
When built-in finisher installed: 150 sheets (80 g/m2)
When job separator installed: 250 sheets (80 g/m2)
Continuous copying ........................ 1 to 999 sheets
Light source .................................... Inert gas lamp
Scanning system ............................ Flat bed scanning by CCD image sensor
Photoconductor............................... a-Si (drum diameter 40 mm)
Image write system......................... Semiconductor laser and electrophotography
Charging system............................. Single positive corona charging
Developing system ......................... Dry, reverse developing (single component system)
Developer: 1-component, magnetism toner
Toner replenishing: automatic from a toner container

1-1-1
2KR/2KS

Transfer system .............................. Transfer roller

Separation system .......................... Curvature separation and separation electrode
Cleaning system ............................. Cleaning blade and roller
Charge erasing system................... Exposure by cleaning lamp
Fusing system................................. Heat roller
Heat source: halogen heaters
Abnormally high temperature protection devices: thermostats
Main memory .................................. Standard : 2048 MB
Maximum: 2048 MB
Hard disk......................................... 160 GB
Interface.......................................... USB interface connector: 1 (USB Hi-speed)
USB memory slot: 2 (Full-speed USB)
Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX)
Optional interface: 2 (KUIO/W)
Resolution....................................... 600 x 600 dpi
Operating environment ................... Temperature: 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F
Humidity: 15 to 80% RH
Altitude: 2500 m/8,202 ft maximum
Brightness: 1500 lux maximum
Dimensions ..................................... 599 (W) x 646 (D) x 745 (H) mm (main unit only)
23 9/16" (W) x 25 7/16" (D) x 29 5/16" (H) (main unit only)
Weight............................................. 85 kg/187 lbs
Space required................................ 753 (W) x 646 (D) mm (using MP tray)
29 5/8" (W) x 25 7/16" (D) (using MP tray)
Power source.................................. 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 12 A
220 to 240 V AC, 50 Hz, 6.3 A
Options ........................................... Document processor, paper feeder, 3000-sheet paper feeder, document finisher,
3000-sheet document finisher, centerfold unit, mailbox, punch unit, built-in finisher,
job separator, key counter, fax kit, expansion memory, data security kit and printed
document guard kit

Printer functions

Printing speed................................. Same as copying speed

First print time ................................. 4.8 s or less
Resolution....................................... 600 dpi
Operating system............................ Windows 2000 (Service Pack 2 or later), Windows XP, Windows Server 2003,
Windows Vista, Apple Macintosh OS 10.x
Interface.......................................... USB interface connector: 1 (USB Hi-speed)
Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX)
PDL................................................. PRESCRIBE

1-1-2
 2KR/2KS

Scanner functions

Operating system............................ Windows 2000 (Service Pack 2 or later), Windows XP, Windows Vista
System requirements ...................... CPU 600 MHz or higher
RAM 128 MB or more
Resolution....................................... 600 dpi, 400 dpi, 300 dpi, 200 dpi, 200 x 100 dpi, 200 x 400 dpi
File format....................................... TIFF (MMR/JPEG compression), JPEG, XPS, PDF (MMR/JPEG compression),
PDF (high compression)
Scanning speed .............................. A4, 600 dpi, Image quality: Text/Photo original, B/W
Single scanning: 52 images/min
Interface.......................................... Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX)
Network protocol............................. TCP/IP
Transmission system ...................... PC transmission SMB Scan to SMB
FTP Scan to FTP, FTP over SSL
E-mail transmission SMTP Scan to E-mail
Twain scan
WIA scan

NOTE: These specifications are subject to change without notice.

1-1-3
2KR/2KS

1-1-2 Parts names

(1) Machine

3
1

11

4 12

5
6
7

8 13
9
14
10

Figure 1-1-1

1. Original cover (option)

2. Original size indicator plates
3. Clip holder
4. Slit glass
5. Attention indicator
6. Receive indicator
7. Left cover 1
8. Left cover 1 lever
9. Left cover 2
10. Left cover 2 handle
11. Contact glass
12. Operation panel
13. Cassette 1
14. Cassette 2

1-1-4
 2KR/2KS

16 15

19

20

17 18

Figure 1-1-2

15. Toner container stopper

16. Toner container
17. Waste toner box
18. Paper feed unit (A2)
19. Paper feed unit cover (A3)
20. Knob

1-1-5
2KR/2KS

21

OPT2

22
25
29
DP

26
27 A2

30
B1

28 32
31
33

OPT1

23 24

Figure 1-1-3

21. USB memory slot (A1)

22. Front cover
23. Paper width adjusting tab
24. Paper length guide
25. Top tray
26. Main power switch
27. Paper width guide
28. MP tray (multi purpose tray)
29. Optional interface slot (OPT2)
30. USB memory slot (A2)
31. USB interface connector (B1)
32. Network interface connector
33. Optional interface slot (OPT1)

1-1-6
 2KR/2KS

(2) Operation panel

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

Figure 1-1-4

1. System menu key/indicator 14. Program key/indicator

2. Counter key/indicator 15. Application key/indicator
3. Help key/indicator 16. Document box key/indicator
4. Print indicator 17. Accessibility key/indicator
5. Send indicator 18. Send key/indicator
6. Receive indicator 19. Copy key/indicator
7. Memory indicator 20. Numeric keys
8. Attention indicator 21. Clear key
9. Interrupt key/indicator 22. Quick No. search key
10. Logout key/indicator 23. Enter key
11. Power key/indicator 24. Start key/indicator
12. Main power indicator 25. Stop key
13. Status/Job cancel key/indicator 26. Reset key

1-1-7
2KR/2KS

1-1-3 Machine cross section

10

9 5

8 4
2
11

Light path

Paper path

Figure 1-1-5 Machine cross section

1. Cassette paper feed section 7. Toner container section

2. MP tray paper feed section 8. Transfer and separation sections
3. Image scanner section 9. Fuser section
4. Laser scanner section 10. Eject and switchback sections
5. Drum section 11. Duplex section
6. Developing section

1-1-8
 2KR/2KS

1-2 Installation

1-2-1 Installation environment

1. Temperature: 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F
2. Humidity: 15 to 80%RH
3. Power supply: 120 V AC, 12 A
220 to 240 V AC, 6.3 A
4. Power source frequency: 50 Hz ± 0.3%/60 Hz ± 0.3%
5. Installation location
Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting. Ensure that the photoconductor will not be exposed to direct sunlight or
other strong light when removing paper jams.
Avoid locations subject to high temperature and high humidity or low temperature and low humidity; an abrupt
change in the environmental temperature; and cool or hot, direct air.
Avoid places subject to dust and vibrations.
Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine.
Place the machine on a level surface (maximum allowance inclination: 1°).
Avoid air-borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photoconductor, such as mer-
cury, acidic of alkaline vapors, inorganic gasses, NOx, SOx gases and chlorine-based organic solvents.
Select a well-ventilated location.
6. Allow sufficient access for proper operation and maintenance of the machine.
Machine front: 1000 mm/39 3/8" Machine rear: 100 mm/3 15/16"
Machine right: 300 mm/11 13/16" Machine left: 300 mm/11 13/16"

100 mm/3 15/16"

300 mm/11 13/16" 300 mm/11 13/16"

1000 mm/39 3/8"

Figure 1-2-1 Installation dimensions

1-2-1
2KR/2KS

1-2-2 Unpacking and installation

(1) Installation procedure

Start

Unpack.

Connect the power cord.

Remove the tapes and pad.

Installing toner.
Install the optional paper feeder.

Setting the delivery date

Release the lever holding mirror 1 and 2 frames. (maintenance item U278).

Output an own-status report

Release of cassette lift plate.
(maintenance item U000).

Load paper. Exit maintenance mode.

Install the toner container. Print out the user setting list.

Install the waste toner box. Make test copies.

Install the optional original cover or the DP. Attaching the language label
(230 V specifications only).

Install other optional devices.

Completion of the machine installation.

1-2-2
 2KR/2KS

Moving the machine

When moving the machine, pull out the four handles on the right and left sides and hold them.

DP

A2

B1

1
OPT

Handle
Handle Handle

Handle

Figure 1-2-2

1-2-3
2KR/2KS-2

Unpacking.

7
8
17

18
15 9
16 18
19
18
13 19

10
14

18
1 2
18
18

12

11 9
3
6

Figure 1-2-3 Unpacking

1. Machine 11. Document tray

2. Outer case 12. Power cord
3. Inner frame 13. Plastic bag
4. Skid 14. Operation guide
5. Bottom left pad 15. Paper size plates
6. Bottom right pad 16. Plastic bag
7. Upper left pad 17. Cursor pins
8. Upper right pad 18. Hinge joints
9. Sheets 19. Bar code labels
10. Machine cover

Caution: Place the machine on a level surface.

1-2-4
 2KR/2KS

Remove the tapes and pad.

1. Remove two tapes.

2. Remove the pad.

DP

A2

B1

Pad
T1
OP

Tape
Tape

Figure 1-2-4

Install the optional paper feeder.

1. Install the optional paper feeder as necessary.

2. Verify levelness at the four corners of the platen using a level gauge, and
adjust the level bolts at the bottom of the machine to optimize levelness.

Release the lever holding mirror 1 and 2 frames.

1. Turn the lever of the machine rear side with

the tool to release the lever holding the mir-
ror 1 and 2 frames.

Lever

Figure 1-2-5

1-2-5
2KR/2KS

Release of cassette lift plate.

Cassette
1. Pull cassette 1 and 2 out. Lift plate stopper
Remove the lift plate stopper from each cas-
sette and attach it to the storage location.
When moving the machine, attach the lift
plate in original position.

Lift plate
stopper

Figure 1-2-6

Load paper.

1. Pull the cassette out.

2. Holding the paper width adjusting tab both Paper width guide
ends, move the paper width guides to fit the Paper width
paper size. adjusting tab

Paper width guide

Figure 1-2-7

3. Adjust the length adjustment plate to fit the

paper size.

Length adjustment plate

Figure 1-2-8

1-2-6
 2KR/2KS

4. Align the paper flush against the left side of

the cassette.

Figure 1-2-9

Install the toner container.

1. Open the front cover.

Toner container
2. Tap the top of the toner container five to six
times.

Figure 1-2-10

3. Shake the toner container approximately 10 Toner container

times in the horizontal direction to stir toner.

Figure 1-2-11

1-2-7
2KR/2KS

4. Gently push the toner container into the

machine along the rails. Toner container
Push the container all the way into the
machine until it locks in place.

Figure 1-2-12

Install the waste toner box.

1. Install the waste toner box in the machine.

2. Close the front cover.

Waste toner box

Figure 1-2-13

Install the optional original cover or the DP.

1. Install the optional original cover or DP.

Install other optional devices.

1. Install the optional devices (job separator,

built-in finisher, document finisher and/or fax
kit etc.) as necessary.

Connect the power cord.

1. Connect the power cord to the connector on the machine.

2. Insert the power plug into the wall outlet.

1-2-8
 2KR/2KS

Installing toner.

1. Turn the main power switch on. Toner installation is started.

2. The drive chain is disengaged when toner installation is completed.
Run maintenance mode U130 if [Add Toner] remains displayed even after the drive chain is disengaged.

Setting the delivery date (maintenance item U278).

1. Enter the maintenance mode by entering 10871087 using the numeric keys.
2. Enter 278 using the numeric keys and press the start key.
3. Select [TODAY] and press the start key. The delivery date is set.
4. Press the stop key.

Output an own-status report (maintenance item U000).

1. Enter 000 using the numeric keys and press the start key.
2. Select [MAINTENANCE] and press the start key to output a list of the current settings of the maintenance items.
3. Press the stop key.

Exit maintenance mode.

1. Enter 001 using the numeric keys and press the start key. The machine exits the maintenance mode.

Print out the user setting list.

1. Select [Report Print] to output the user various setting reports.

Make test copies.

1. Place an original and make test copies.

Attaching the language label (230 V specifications only).

1. According to need, attach the correspond language label.

Completion of the machine installation.

1-2-9
2KR/2KS

(2) Setting initial copy modes

Factory settings are as follows:

Maintenance
Contents Factory setting
item No.
U253 Switching between double and single counts DOUBLE COUNT(A3/LEDGER)
U260 Selecting the timing for copy counting After ejection
U285 Setting service status page ON
U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication ON/8
U328 Side ejection setting OFF
U342 Setting the ejection restriction ON
U343 Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode OFF

1-2-10
 2KR/2KS-2

1-2-3 Installing the key counter (option)

Installing the key counter requires the following component:
Key counter (P/N 3025418011)
Key counter set (P/N 302A369708)

Supplied parts of key counter set:

Key counter socket assembly (P/N 3029236241)
Key counter cover (P/N 3066060011)
Key counter mount (P/N 3066060041)
Key counter retainer (P/N 302GR03020)
Key counter cover retainer (P/N 302GR03010)
Two (2) Edgings (P/N 7YZM210006++H01)
One (1) Band (P/N M21AH010)
One (1) M3 × 8 tap-tight P screw (P/N 5MBTPB3008PW++R)
Two (2) M4 × 10 tap-tight P screws (P/N 5MBTPB4010PW++R)
Two (2) M4 × 10 tap-tight S screws (P/N 5MBTPB4010TW++R)
Two (2) M3 × 6 bronze flat-head screws (P/N 7BB003306H)
One (1) M4 × 20 tap-tight S screw (P/N 7BB100420H)
One (1) M3 bronze nut (P/N 7BC1003055++H01)
One (1) M3 × 8 bronze binding screw (P/N B1B03080)
One (1) M4 × 30 tap-tight S screw (P/N B1B54300)
Five (5) M4 × 6 chrome TP screws (P/N B4A04060)
Two (2) M4 × 10 chrome TP screws (P/N B4A04100)

Procedure
1. Press the power key on the operation panel Key counter retainer
M4 x 6 screw
to off. Make sure that the main power indica- (B4A04060) (302GR03020)
tor and the memory indicator are off before M4 x 6 screw
turning off the main power switch. And then (B4A04060)
unplug the power cable from the wall outlet. M3 nut
2. Fit the key counter socket assembly to the (7BC1003055++H01) Key counter
mount
key counter retainer using two screws and (3066060041)
nut. M4 x 6 screw
3. Fit the key counter mount to the key counter (B4A04060)
cover using two screws.
4. Fit the key counter retainer to the key
counter mount using two screws.

M4 x 6 screw
(B4A04060)
Key counter
socket assembly
M3 x 6 flat-head (3029236241)
screws Key counter cover
(7BB003306H) (3066060011)

Figure 1-2-14

1-2-11
2KR/2KS

5. Remove the ISU filter cover.

6. Remove ten screws and then remove the
rear cover. ISU filter cover

Screws

DP

A2

B1
Screws
Screw
OP
T1

Rear cover

Screws

Figure 1-2-15

7. Remove two screws and then remove the

scanner right cover.
Screw

Scanner right cover

Screw

DP

Figure 1-2-16

1-2-12
 2KR/2KS

8. Remove three screws and then remove the

right upper cover.
9. Cut out the aperture plate on the right upper
cover using nippers.

Screw
Right upper cover
Aperture
DP

A2

Screw B1

OPT
1

Screw

Figure 1-2-17

10. Release the wire saddle and then stretch

the key counter wire.
11. Close the wire saddle.

Key counter wire

Wire saddle

Key counter wire

Figure 1-2-18

1-2-13
2KR/2KS

12. Refit the rear cover and ISU filter cover.

13. Pass the key counter wire through the aper-
ture and then refit the upper right cover.

Aperture

Upper right cover

Key counter wire

DP

A2

B1

OP
T

Figure 1-2-19

14. Pass the connector of the key counter wire

Right upper cover
through the aperture in the key counter
cover retainer.
15. Insert the hook of the key counter cover
retainer in the slit of the right upper cover.
16. Fit the key counter cover retainer to the
machine using the M4 x 20 screw. Slit
Key counter wire
17. Refit the scanner right cover.
Hook

Connector

Aperture

Key counter DP

cover retainer
M4 x 20 screw (302GR03010) A2

(7BB100420H)

Figure 1-2-20

1-2-14
 2KR/2KS

18. Connect the connector of the key counter Key counter

signal cable to the connector of the key cover retainer
counter wire.
19. Fit the key counter cover with the key
counter socket assembly inserted to the key
counter cover retainer using the M4 x 6
screw.
20. Insert the key counter into the key counter
socket assembly.

Key counter wire

M4 x 6 screw DP

(B4A04060) Connectors
A2

Key conuter cover

B1

Key counter
signal cable
OP
T1

Figure 1-2-21

21. Turn the main power switch on and enter the

maintenance mode.
22. Run maintenance item U204 and select
[KEY COUNTER].
23. Exit the maintenance mode.
24. Check that the message requesting the key
counter to be inserted is displayed on the
touch panel when the key counter is pulled
out.
25. Check that the counter counts up as prints
are made.

1-2-15
2KR/2KS

1-2-4 Replacing the expanded memory

Procedure
1. Press the power key on the operation panel Clamp
Protrusion
to off. Make sure that the main power indica-
tor and the memory indicator are off before
turning off the main power switch. And then Memory socket
unplug the power cable from the wall outlet.
2. Remove the screw and remove the main
PWB lid.
3. Open clamps on both ends of the memory
socket on the main PWB. Clamp
4. Remove the expanded memory.
Notch
5. Insert the expanded memory into the mem-
ory socket so that the notch on the memory
align with the corresponding protrusion in Expanded memory
the slot.
The memory module is secured to the mem-
ory socket with the clamps.
6. Refit the main PWB lid.
7. Print a status page to check the expanded
memory (See page 1-3-6).

Main PWB lid

Screw

Figure 1-2-22

1-2-16
 2KR/2KS

1-3 Maintenance Mode

1-3-1 Maintenance mode

The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine.

(1) Executing a maintenance item

Start

Enter 10871087 using

Maintenance mode is entered.
the numeric keys.

Enter the maintenance item

number using the cursor up/down keys
The maintenance item is
or numeric keys.
selected.

Press the start key.

The selected maintenance item is run.

Press the stop key.

Yes Repeat the same

maintenance item?

No

Yes
Run another maintenance
item?

No

Enter 001 using the cursor

up/down keys or numeric keys Maintenance mode is exited.
and press the start key.

End

1-3-1
2KR/2KS-2

(2) Maintenance modes item list

Item Initial
Section Content of maintenance item
No. setting*
General U000 Outputting an own-status report -
U001 Exiting the maintenance mode -
U002 Setting the factory default data -
U003 Setting the service telephone number ***************
U004 Displaying the machine number -
U019 Displaying the ROM version -
Initialization U021 Initializing counters and mode settings -
U024 HDD formatting -
Drive, paper U030 Checking motor operation -
feed, paper U031 Checking switches for paper conveying -
conveying
and cooling U032 Checking clutch operation -
system U033 Checking solenoid operation -
U034 Adjusting the print start timing
Adjusting the leading edge registration 0/0/0/0/0/0
Adjusting the center line 0/0/0/0/0/0
U035 Setting the printing area for folio paper
Length/Width 330/210
U037 Checking the operation of the fan motors -
U051 Adjusting the deflection in the paper 0/0/0/0
U053 Setting the adjustment of the motor speed
Drive motor 0
Eject motor 0
Polygon motor 0
Paper feed motor 0

U059 Setting fan mode MODE1

Optical U061 Turning the exposure lamp on -
U063 Adjusting the shading position 0
U065 Adjusting the scanner magnification
Main scanning direction/Auxiliary scanning direction 0/0
U066 Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration 0/0
U067 Adjusting the scanner center line 0/0
U068 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP 0/0
U070 Adjusting the DP magnification 0/0/0/0
U071 Adjusting the DP scanning timing 0/0/0/0/0/0
U072 Adjusting the DP center line 0/0/0
U073 Checking scanner operation -
U074 Adjusting the DP input light luminosity 0
U080 Setting the economy mode 60
U081 Adjusting the correct exposure 0/0/0
U087 Setting DP reading position modification operation 145/145/145
U089 Outputting a MIP-PG pattern -
U091 Setting the white line correction 75/0
U093 Setting the exposure density gradient 0/0/0/0/0

*: Factory initial setting, *1: The item initialized for executing U021

1-3-2
 2KR/2KS-2

Item Initial
Section Content of maintenance item
No. setting*
Optical U099 Adjusting original size detection 40/30/20/40/30/20/40/30/20/
19/19/19/150
(DP not installed)
50/50/50/50/50/50/50/50/50/
49/49/49/150 (DP installed)
High voltage U100 Setting the main high voltage -
U101 Setting the other high voltages
Developing bias AC component frequency at image formation 28
Developing shift bias potential at image formation 1
Developing bias AC component duty at image formation 50
Transfer control voltage 130
Separation control voltage 20
U102 Setting the cleaning interval for the main charger 5*1
U109 Displaying the drum type -
U110 Checking the drum count -
U111 Checking the drum drive time -
U112 Setting toner refresh operation
Time of toner refreshment 120
Developing bias on time 540
U114 Setting separation charger mode MODE3
U117 Checking the drum number -
U118 Displaying the drum history -
U127 Checking the transfer count -
Developing U130 Initial setting for the developing unit -
U136 Setting toner near end mode OFF
U139 Displaying the temperature and humidity -
U144 Setting toner disposal operation MODE2
U155 Checking sensors for toner -
U157 Checking the developing drive time -
U158 Checking the developing count -
Fuser and U161 Setting the fuser control temperature
cleaning Driving start temperature when warm-up starts 185*1
Control temperature for displaying [Ready for copying.] 200*1
Control temperature during printing 200*1
Printing speed control at over-hearing on the fuser ends MODE1
U163 Resetting the fuser problem data -
U167 Checking/clearing the fuser counts -
U196 Turning the fuser heater on -
U198 Setting the fuser phase control ON
U199 Checking the fuser temperature -
Operation U200 Turning all LEDs on -
panel and U201 Initializing the touch panel -
support
equipment U202 Setting the KMAS host monitoring system -
U203 Checking DP operation -
U204 Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter OFF/KEY-DEVICE*1
U206 Setting the presence or absence of the coin vender -
U207 Checking the operation panel keys -

*: Factory initial setting, *1: The item initialized for executing U021

1-3-3
2KR/2KS-1

Item Initial
Section Content of maintenance item
No. setting*
Operation U208 Setting the paper size for the paper feeder Inch specifications: Letter*1
panel and Metric specifications: A4*1
support
U221 Setting the USB host lock function OFF*1
equipment
U222 Setting the IC card type -
U223 Operation panel lock Unlock*1
U224 Panel sheet extension -
U234 Setting punch destination AUTO
U236 Setting the limit for the ejection section of the built-in finisher OFF*1
U237 Setting finisher stack quantity 0/0*1
U240 Checking the operation of the finisher -
U241 Checking the operation of the switches of the finisher -
U243 Checking the operation of the DP motors -
U244 Checking the DP switches -
U245 Checking messages -
U246 Setting the finisher
3000-sheet document finisher 0/0/0/0/0/0*1
Centerfold unit 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0*1
Built-in finisher 0/0/0*1
U247 Setting the paper feed device -
Mode setting U250 Setting the maintenance cycle -
U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance count -
U252 Setting the destination -
U253 Switching between double and single counts DOUBLE COUNT
(A3/LEDGER)*1
U260 Selecting the timing for copy counting After ejection*1
U265 Setting OEM purchaser code -
U278 Setting the delivery date -
U285 Setting service status page ON
U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication ON/8*1
U328 Side ejection setting OFF*1
U332 Setting the size conversion factor 1.0*1
U341 Specific paper feed location setting for printing function -
U342 Setting the ejection restriction ON*1
U343 Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode OFF*1
U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication 0*1
Image U402 Adjusting margins of image printing 4.0/3.0/3.0/3.9/4.0/4.0
processing U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the platen 2.0/2.0/2.0/2.0
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP 3.0/2.5/3.0/4.0/
3.0/2.5/3.0/4.0
U407 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image 0
printing
U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically -
U411 Adjusting the scanner automatically -

*: Factory initial setting, *1: The item initialized for executing U021

1-3-4
 2KR/2KS-2

Item Initial
Section Content of maintenance item
No. setting*
Image U425 Setting the target -
processing
U470 Setting the JPEG compression ratio
System 90/90*1
Copy 90/90/90/90*1
Send 30/40/51/70/90*1
30/40/51/70/90*1
30/40/51/70/90*1
30/40/51/70/90*1
15/25/60*1
15/25/60*1
U473 Adjusting laser power output 0
U485 Setting the image processing mode 1/0*1
Network U510 Setting the enterprise mode -
scanner
Others U901 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper feed locations -
U902 Checking/clearing the punch-hole scrap counter 35000/0
U903 Checking/clearing the paper jam counts -
U904 Checking/clearing the service call counts -
U905 Checking/clearing counts by optional devices -
U906 Resetting partial operation control -
U908 Checking the total counter value -
U910 Clearing the black ratio data -
U911 Checking copy counts by paper sizes -
U917 Setting backup data reading/writing -
U920 Checking the copy counts -
U927 Clearing the all copy counts and machine life counts (one -
time only)
U928 Checking machine life counts -
U931 Setting the automatic toner install OFF
U935 Relay board maintenance MODE0*1
U942 Setting of deflection for feeding from DP 0/0/0
U964 Checking of log -
U969 Checking of toner area code -
U977 Data capture mode -
U984 Checking the developing unit number -
U985 Displaying the developing unit history -
U989 HDD scandisk -
U990 Checking/clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light -
U991 Checking the scanner count -

*: Factory initial setting, *1: The item initialized for executing U021

1-3-5
2KR/2KS

(3) Contents of the maintenance mode items

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U000 Outputting an own-status report
Description
Outputs lists of the current settings of the maintenance items, and paper jam and service call occurrences.
Outputs the event log or service status page. Also sends output data to the USB memory.
Printing a report is disabled either when a job is remaining in the buffer or when [Pause All Print Jobs] is
pressed to halt printing.
Purpose
To check the current setting of the maintenance items, or paper jam or service call occurrences. Before initial-
izing or replacing the backup RAM, output a list of the current settings of the maintenance items to reenter the
settings after initialization or replacement.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be output.
Display Output list
MAINTENANCE List of the current settings of the maintenance modes
USER STATUS Outputs the user status page
SERVICE STATUS Outputs the service status page
EVENT Outputs the event log
NETWORK STATUS Outputs the network status page
ALL Outputs the all reports
3. Press the start key. The interrupt print mode is entered and a list is output.
When A4/Letter paper is available, a report of this size is output. If not, specify the paper feed location.
When output is complete, the screen for selecting an item is displayed.
The output status is displayed.
Display Description
READY Standing by for output (including while outputting other reports)
ACTIVE Performing output processing
COMPLETE Output processing completed normally
ERROR Output processing terminated with an error

Method: Send to the USB memory

1. Press the power key on the operation panel, and after verifying the main power indicator has gone off,
switch off the main power switch.
2. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot.
3. Turn the main power switch on.
4. Enter the maintenance item.
5. Press the start key.
6. Select the item to be send.
7. Select [TEXT] or [HTML].
Display Output list
Print Outputs the report
To USB (TEXT) Sends output data to the USB memory (text type)
To USB (HTML) Sends output data to the USB memory (HTML type)
8. Press the start key.
Output will be sent to the USB memory.

1-3-6
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U000
Event log

Event Log
MFP
Firmware version 2KS_2000.001.001 2009.06.17
(1) (2)
(3) Paper Jam Log (4) Service Call Log
# Count. Event # Count. Service Code
Descriprions 8 1881214 F0.0030
16 1876543 10.01.08.01.01 7 178944 01.1010
15 166554 10.01.08.01.02 6 5296 F0.4000
14 4988 10.01.08.01.01 5 5295 F0.3100
13 4988 10.01.08.01.02 4 2099 01.2000
12 4988 10.01.08.01.01 3 1054 01.2000
11
10
4988
1103
10. 01. 08. 01. 01
10.01.08.01.02
10.01.08.01.01
2
1
809
30
01.2500
01.2500
9 1103 (a)10.01.08.01.01
(b) (c) (d) (e)
8 1103 12.03.08.01.01 (5) Maintenance Log
7 1103 12.03.08.01.01 # Count. Item
6 1027 12.03.08.01.01 8 1045571 01.00
5 1027 12.03.0A.01.01 7 104511 01.00
4 1027 12.03.08.01.01 6 7045 01.00
3 1027 12.03.08.01.02 5 3454 01.00
2 406 12.03.0A.01.01 4 3454 02.00
1 36 12.03.08.01.01 3 3454 02.00
2 417 02.00
1 34 02.20

(6) Unknown toner Log

# Count. Item
5 3454 01.00
4 3454 01.00
3 3454 01.00
2 406 01.00
1 32 01.00
(7) Counter Log
(f) J04:000 J20:000 J70:000 J93:002 (g) C0100:001 C4000:001 C8020:001 (h) M00:01
J05:000 J21:000 J71:000 J94:000 C1010:001 C4010:001 C8030:001 M00:01
J09:000 J22:000 J72:000 J95:000 C1020:001 C4100:001 C8040:001
J10:000 J23:000 J73:000 J96:000 C1030:001 C6000:001 C8050:001
J11:002 J30:002 J74:002 C1040:001 C6020:001 C8060:001
J12:000 J40:002 J75:002 C2000:001 C6030:001 C8070:001
J13:000 J41:000 J76:000 C2250:001 C6040:001 C8140:001
J14:000 J42:000 J78:000 C2500:001 C6050:001 C8170:001
J15:000 J43:000 J80:000 C2600:001 C6400:001 C8180:001
J44:000 J81:000 C3100:001
J45:000 J82:000
J83:000

Figure 1-3-1

1-3-7
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U000 Detail of event log

No. Items Description

(1) System version
(2) System date
(3) Paper Jam Log # Count. Event
Remembers 1 to 16 of The total page count at Log code (2 digit, hexa-
occurrence. If the the time of the paper decimal, 5 categories)
occurrence of the previ- jam.
ous paper jam is less (a) Cause of a paper
than 16, all of the paper jam
jams are logged. When (b) Paper source
the occurrence (c) Paper size
excesseds 16, the old- (d) Paper type
est occurrence is (e) Paper eject
removed.
(a) Cause of paper jam (Hexadecimal)
04: Cover open
05: Secondary paper feed does not start
09: 3000-sheet paper feeder sequence error jam
10: No paper feed from cassette 1
11: No paper feed from cassette 2
12: No paper feed from optional cassette 3
13: No paper feed from optional cassette 4
14: No paper feed from MP tray
15: Jam in paper feeder horizontal paper conveying section 1
16: Jam in paper feeder horizontal paper conveying section 2
17: Jam in paper feeder horizontal paper conveying section 3
18: Misfeed in vertical paper conveying section
19: Misfeed in paper feeder vertical paper conveying section
20: Misfeed in MP tray vertical paper conveying section
21: Multiple sheets in paper feed section
22: Multiple sheets in vertical conveying section
23: Multiple sheets in MP tray conveying section
30: Misfeed in registration/transfer section
40: Misfeed in fuser section (MP tray)
41: Misfeed in fuser section (cassette 1)
42: Misfeed in fuser section (cassette 2)
43: Misfeed in fuser section (optional cassette 3)
44: Misfeed in fuser section (optional cassette 4)
46: Misfeed in fuser section (optional 3000-sheet paper feeder)
47: Misfeed in fuser section (duplex section)
50: Misfeed in eject section
51: Misfeed in job separator eject section
52: Misfeed in feedshift section
60: Duplex paper conveying section 1
61: Duplex paper conveying section 2
70: No original feed
71: An original jam in the original feed/conveying section 1
72: An original jam in the original feed/conveying section 2
73: An original jam in the original conveying section
74: An original jam in the original registration section
75: An original jam in the original registration section
76: An original jam in the original feed/conveying section
78: Document processor top cover open
80: Jam between the finisher and machine (3000-sheet document finisher)
81: Paper entry sensor nonarrival jam

1-3-8
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U000
No. Items Description
(3) Paper Jam Log 82: Jam in stapler
cont. 83: Exit sensor stay jam
84: Jam in eject section of right sub tray (3000-sheet document finisher)
85: Jam in eject section of left sub tray (3000-sheet document finisher)
86: Jam in eject section of internal tray 1 (3000-sheet document finisher)
87: Jam in eject section of internal tray 2 (3000-sheet document finisher)
88: Jam in eject section of main tray (3000-sheet document finisher)
89: Jam in centerfold unit (3000-sheet document finisher)
90: Jam in mailbox (3000-sheet document finisher)
91: Finisher cover open
92: Exit sensor non-arrival jam (document finisher)
93: Reverse sensor jam (document finisher)
94: Paper entry sensor stay/remaining jam (document finisher)
95: Paper conveying sensor jam (document finisher)
96: Jam between the built-in finisher and machine (built-in finisher)
(b) Detail of paper source (Hexadecimal)
00: MP tray
01: Cassette 1
02: Cassette 2
03: Cassette 3 (paper feeder)
04: Cassette 4 (paper feeder)
08: 3000-sheet paper feeder
05/06/07/09: Reserved
(c) Detail of paper size (Hexadecimal)
01: Monarch 0C: Ledger 24: A3 wide
02: Business 0D: A5 25: Ledger wide
03: International DL 0E: A6 26: Full bleed paper
04: International C5 0F: B6 (12 x 8)
05: Executive 10: Commercial #9 27: 8K
06: Letter-R 11: Commercial #6 28: 16K-R
86: Letter-E 12: ISO B5 A8: 16K-E
07: Legal 13: Custom size 32: Statement-R
08: A4R 1E: C4 B2: Statement-E
88: A4E 1F: Postcard 33: Folio
09: B5R 20: Reply-paid postcard 34: Western type 2
89: B5E 21: Oficio II 35: Western type 4
0A: A3 22: Special 1
0B: B4 23: Special 2
(d) Detail of paper type (Hexadecimal)
01: Plain 0A: Color 15: Custom 1
02: Transparency 0B: Prepunched 16: Custom 2
03: Preprinted 0C: Envelope 17: Custom 3
04: Labels 0D: Cardstock 18: Custom 4
05: Bond 0E: Coated 19: Custom 5
06: Recycled 0F: 2nd side 1A: Custom 6
07: Vellum 10: Media 16 1B: Custom 7
08: Rough 11: High quality 1C: Custom 8
09: Letterhead

1-3-9
2KR/2KS-1

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U000
No. Items Description
(3) Paper Jam Log (e) Detail of paper exit location (Hexadecimal)
cont. 01: Face down (FD)
02: Face up (FU)/
Document finisher face up (FU)/
3000-sheet document finisher left sub tray (FU)
03: Document finisher face down (FD)
04: Reserved
05: Reserved
06: 3000-sheet document finisher right sub tray (FU)
07: 3000-sheet document finisher left sub tray (FD)
09: 3000-sheet document finisher right sub tray (FD)
0A: Center-folding unit tray
0B: Mailbox tray 1 (FD)
0C: Mailbox tray 1 (FU)
0D: Reserved
0E: Reserved
15: Mailbox tray 2 (FD)
16: Mailbox tray 2 (FU)
1F: Mailbox tray 3 (FD)
20: Mailbox tray 3 (FU)
29: Mailbox tray 4 (FD)
2A: Mailbox tray 4 (FU)
33: Mailbox tray 5 (FD)
34: Mailbox tray 5 (FU)
3D: Mailbox tray 6 (FD)
3E: Mailbox tray 6 (FU)
47: Mailbox tray 7 (FD)
48: Mailbox tray 7 (FU)
(4) Service Call Log # Count. Service Code
Remembers 1 to 8 of The total page count at Self diagnostic error
occurrence of self diag- the time of the self code
nostics error. If the diagnostics error. (See page 1-4-26)
occurrence of the previ-
ous diagnostics error is Example:
less than 8, all of the 01.6000
diagnostics errors are
logged. 01: Self diagnostic
error
6000: Self diagnostic
error code number
(5) Maintenance Log # Count. Item
Remembers 1 to 8 of The total page count at Code of maintenance
occurrence of replace- the time of the replace- replacing item (1 byte,
ment. If the occurrence ment of the toner con- 2 categories)
of the previous replace- tainer.
ment of toner container First byte (Replacing
is less than 8, all of the item)
occurrences of replace- 01: Toner container
ment are logged. 02: Maintenance kit

Second byte (Type of

replacing item)
00: Fixed

1-3-10
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U000
No. Items Description
(6) Unknown Toner Log # Count. Item
Remembers 1 to 5 of The total page count at Unknown toner log
occurrence of unknown the time of the [Toner code (1 byte, 2 catego-
toner detection. If the Empty] error with using ries)
occurrence of the previ- an unknown toner con-
ous unknown toner tainer. First byte
detection is less than 5, 01: Fixed (Toner con-
all of the unknown tainer)
toner detection are
logged. Second byte
00: Fixed (Black)
(7) Counter Log (f) Paper jam (g) Self diagnostic error (h) Maintenance item
replacing
Comprised of three Indicates the log Indicates the log Indicates the log
log counters includ- counter of paper jams counter of self diagnos- counter depending on
ing paper jams, self depending on location. tics errors depending the maintenance item
diagnostics errors, on cause. (See page 1- for maintenance.
and replacement of Refer to Paper Jam 4-26)
the toner container. Log. T: Toner container
Example: 00: Black
All instances including C6000: 4 M: Maintenance kit
those are not occurred 00: MK-726
are displayed. Self diagnostics error
6000 has happened Example:
four times. T00: 1
The toner container has
been replaced once.

1-3-11
2KR/2KS-1

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U000
Service status page (1)

Service Status Page

MFP (2) 17/06/2009 08:40
(3) (4) (5)
(1) Firmware version 2KS_2000.000.000 2009.06.17 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]

Controller Information
Memory status
(28) FRPO Status
(6) Total Size 1.0 GB
Default Pattern Switch B8 0
Default Font Number C5*10000+C2*100+C3 00000
Time .
(7) Local Time Zone +01:00 Tokio .
(8) Date and Time 17/06/2009 08:40 .
(9) Time Server 10.183.53.13 .
.
.
Installed Options .
(10) Document Processor Installed .
(11) Paper feeder Cassette .
(12) Finisher 3000-Finisher .
(13) Mail Box Not Installed .
(14) Job Sparator Installed .
(15) Security Kit .
Data Security Kit (E) Software Type II .
.
.
Digital Dot Coverage .
(16) Average(%) / Usage Page(A4/Letter Conversion) .
(17) Total .
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11 .
(18) Copy .
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11 .
(19) Printer .
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11 .
(20) FAX .
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11 .
(21) Period (03/11/2009 - 27/10/2009 08:40) .
(22) Last Page (%) 1.00 .
.
.
(23) FAX Information Slot1/Slot2 .
(24) Rings (Normal) 3 e-MPS error control Y6 0
(25) Rings (FAX/TEL) 3
(26) Rings (TAD) 3
(27) Option DIMM Size 16 MB

1 (29) [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]

Figure 1-3-2

1-3-12
 2KR/2KS-1

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U000
Service status page (2)

Service Status Page

MFP
17/06/2009 08:40

Firmware version 2KS_2000.000.000 2009.06.17 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]

Engine Information
(30) NVRAM Version _Bb04B29_Bb04B29 Send Information
(31) Scanner Version 2KS_1200.001.089 (34) Date and Time 09/06/17
(32) FAX Slot1 (35) Address
FAX BOOT Version 5JP_5000.001.001
FAX APL Version 5JP_5100.001.001
FAX IPL Version 5JP_5200.001.001
(33) MAC Address 00:C0:EE:D0:01:0D

(36) 1/2
(37) 100/100
(38) 0/0/0/0/0/0/0/0/
(39) 0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/0000000/
0000000/0000000/0000000/
F00/U00/0/0/0/30/30/70/70/abcde/1/
(40)(41)(42)(43)(44)(45)(46)(47)(48)(49)(50)
(51) 0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/
0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/0000/
(52) 12345678/11223344/00001234abcd567800001234abcd5678/01234567890123456789012345678901/0008/00/07
(53) XXXXXXXX
(54) 0000000000/F80C001A37/302A183C00/000100013D/8791BEC305/0000003100/000F5D0000/01FD000000/
0000000FB7/0000000000/0000260000/0000000000/0000000000/0000008400/0000000000/011E000F51/
0000000FB7/0000000000/0000260000/0000000000/0000
(55) ABCDEFGHIJ/

2 [XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX]

Figure 1-3-3

1-3-13
2KR/2KS-1

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U000 Detail of service status page

No. Description Supplement

(1) System version
(2) System date
(3) Engine soft version
(4) Engine boot version
(5) Operation panel mask version
(6) Total RAM size
(7) Local time zone
(8) Report output date Day/Month/Year hour:minute
(9) NTP server name
(10) Presence or absence of the optional Installed/Not Installed
DP
(11) Presence or absence of the optional Cassette/LCF/Not Installed
paper feeder
(12) Presence or absence of the optional Inner Finisher Tray/3000-Finisher/1000-Finisher/
document finisher Not Installed
(13) Presence or absence of the optional Installed/Not Installed
mailbox
(14) Presence or absence of the optional Installed/Not Installed
job separator
(15) Presence or absence of the optional Installed/Not Installed
data security kit
(16) Page of relation to the A4/Letter
(17) Average coverage for total
(18) Average coverage for copy
(19) Average coverage for printer
(20) Average coverage for fax
(21) Cleared date and output date
(22) Coverage on the final output page
(23) Fax kit information This item is printed only when the fax kit is installed.
(24) Number of rings 0 to 15
(25) Number of rings before automatic 0 to 15
switching
(26) Number of rings before connecting to 0 to 15
answering machine
(27) Optional DIMM size
(28) FRPO setting
(29) Machine serial number

1-3-14
 2KR/2KS-1

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U000
No. Description Supplement
(30) NV RAM version _ Bb 04B29 _ Bb 04B29
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)

(a) Consistency of the present software version and the

database
_ (underscore): OK
* (Asterisk): NG
(b) Database version
(c) The oldest time stamp of database version
(d) Consistency of the present software version and the
ME firmware version
_ (underscore): OK
* (Asterisk): NG
(e) ME firmware version
(f) The oldest time stamp of the ME database version

Normal if (a) and (d) are underscored, and (b) and (e)
are identical with (c) and (f).
(31) Scanner firmware version
(32) Fax firmware version This item is printed only when the fax kit is installed.
(33) Mac address
(34) Send date
(35) Send address
(36) Destination information/Area informa-
tion
(37) Margin settings Top margin/Left margin
(38) Margin/Page length/Page width Top margin integer part/Top margin decimal part/
settings Left margin integer part/Left margin decimal part/
Page length integer part/Page length decimal part/
Page width integer part/Page width decimal part
(39) Life counter (The first line) Machine life counter/MP tray counter/
Cassette 1 counter/Cassette 2 counter/
Cassette 3 counter/Cassette 4 counter/Duplex counter
Life counter (The second line) Drum unit counter/Developing unit counter/
Maintenance kit counter/
(40) Panel lock information 0: OFF/1: Partial lock/2: Full lock
(41) USB information 0: Not installed/1: Full speed/2: Hi speed
(42) Paper handling information 0: Paper source unit select/1: Paper source unit
(43) Black and white printing double count 0: All single counts
mode 3: Folio, Single count, Less the 330 mm (length)
(44) Billing counting timing
(45) Temperature (machine inside)
(46) Temperature (machine outside)
(47) Relative temperature (machine out-
side)
(48) Absolute temperature (machine out-
side)

1-3-15
2KR/2KS-1

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U000
No. Description Supplement
(49) Fixed assets number
(50) Job complete judgment timeout time
setting for local interface
(51) Media type attributes Weight settings
1 to 28 (Not used: 18, 19, 20) 0: Light/1: Normal 1 / 2: Normal 2 / 3: Normal 3/
4: Heavy 1 / 5: Heavy 2 / 6: Heavy 3 / 7: Extra Heavy
Fuser settings
0: High / 1: Middle / 2: Low / 3: Vellum
Duplex settings
0: Disable / 1: Enable
(52) RFID information
(53) RFID reader/writer version information
(54) Maintenance information
(55) Drum serial number Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U001 Exiting the maintenance mode
Description
Exits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal copy mode.
Purpose
To exit the maintenance mode.

Method
Press the start key. The normal copy mode is entered.
U002 Setting the factory default data
Description
Restores the machine conditions to the factory default settings.
Purpose
To move the mirror frame of the scanner to the position for transport (position in which the frame can be fixed).

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Press [MODE1(ALL)] on the touch panel.
3. Press the start key.
The mirror frame of the scanner returns to the position for transport.
4. Turn the main power switch off and on.

An error code is displayed in case of an initialization error. Refer to the table of the error codes on P.1-3-19.
When ERROR 09 occurred, turn main power switch off then on, format the hard disk using maintenance
item U024, and execute initialization using maintenance item U002. For other errors occurred, turn main
power switch off then on, and execute initialization using maintenance item U002.

1-3-16
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U003 Setting the service telephone number
Description
Sets the telephone number to be displayed when a service call code is detected.
Purpose
To set the telephone number to call service when installing the machine.
Method
Press the start key. The currently set telephone number is displayed.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
The keys to enter the number are displayed on the touch panel.
2. Enter a telephone number (up to 15 digits).
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U004 Displaying the machine number
Description
Sets or displays the machine number.
Purpose
To check or set the machine number.

Method
1. Press the start key.
If the machine serial number of engine PWB matches with that of main PWB
Display Operation
MACHINE No. Displays the machine serial number

If the machine serial number of engine PWB does not match with that of main PWB
Display Operation
MACHINE No. (MAIN) Displays the machine serial number of main
MACHINE No. (ENGINE) Displays the machine serial number of engine

Setting
Carry out if the machine serial number does not match.
1. Press [EXECUTE].
2. Press the start key. Writing of serial No. starts.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-17
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U019 Displaying the ROM version
Description
Displays the part number of the ROM fitted to each PWB.
Purpose
To check the part number or to decide, if the newest version of ROM is installed.

Method
1. Press the start key. The ROM version are displayed.
2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys.

Display Description
MAIN Main ROM
MMI Operation ROM
ENGINE Engine ROM
ENGINE BOOT Engine booting
SCANNER Scanner ROM
BROWSER Browser ROM
OPTION LANGUAGE Optional language ROM
DICTIONARY -
DBA Database connection
Solution Framework Solution framework
DP Optional DP ROM
500x2PF Optional paper feeder ROM
3000PF Optional 3000-sheet paper feeder ROM
1000DF Optional document finisher ROM
3000DF MAIN Optional 3000-sheet document finisher main ROM
3000DF MIDDLE Optional 3000-sheet document finisher Inner tray ROM
MAIL BOX Optional mailbox ROM
BOOKLET Optional center-folding unit ROM
INNER DF Optional built-in finisher ROM
FAX BOOT1 Optional fax control PWB booting (port 1)
FAX APL1 Optional fax control PWB APL (port 1)
FAX IPL1 Optional fax control PWB IPL (port 1)
FAX BOOT2 Fax control PWB booting (port 2: optional dual FAX)
FAX APL2 Fax control PWB APL (port 2: optional dual FAX)
FAX IPL2 Fax control PWB IPL (port 2: optional dual FAX)

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-18
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U021 Initializing counters and mode settings
Description
Initializes all settings, except those pertinent to the type of machine, namely each counter, service call history
and mode setting. Also initializes backup RAM according to region specification selected in maintenance item
U252 Setting the destination.
Refer to *1 of the maintenance mode item list about the item initialized.
Purpose
To return the machine settings to their factory default.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Press [EXECUTE] on the touch panel.
3. Press the start key. All data other than that for adjustments due to variations between machines is initial-
ized based on the destination setting.
4. Turn the main power switch off and on.

An error code is displayed in case of an initialization error.

When ERROR 09 occurred, turn main power switch off then on, format the hard disk using maintenance
item U024, and execute initialization using maintenance item U021. For other errors occurred, turn main
power switch off then on, and execute initialization using maintenance item U021.

Error codes
Codes Description
ERROR 01 Configuration initialization error
ERROR 02 Counter initialization error
ERROR 03 One-touch initialization error
ERROR 04 Panel program initialization error
ERROR 05 Event log initialization error
ERROR 06 Account initialization error
ERROR 07 Address book initialization error
ERROR 08 Department initialization error
ERROR 09 Document box initialization error
ERROR 0a Permissibility initialization error
ERROR 0b Job log initialization error
ERROR 20 Engine initialization error
ERROR 40 Scanner initialization error

U024 HDD formatting

Description
Initializes the HDD.
In addition, the following settings are also initialized by initializing the HDD.
System menu (user login administration, job accounting, address book, one-touch keys and document box
etc.), shortcuts and panel programs
Initializing the HDD will cause installed applications to be deleted. Reinstall applications as necessary after
initializing the HDD.
Purpose
To initialize the HDD when replacing the HDD after shipping.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Press [EXECUTE] on the touch panel.
3. Press the start key to initialize the hard disk.
4. Turn the main power switch off and on.

1-3-19
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U030 Checking motor operation
Description
Drives each motor.
Purpose
To check the operation of each motor.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the motor to be operated.
3. Press the start key. The operation starts.

Display Operation
MAIN Drive motor (DM) is turned ON
FEED Paper feed motor (PFM) is turned ON
EJECT(FW) Eject motor (EM) is turned on clockwise
EJECT(REV) Eject motor (EM) is turned on counterclockwise
4. To stop operation, press the stop key.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U031 Checking switches for paper conveying
Description
Displays the on-off status of each paper detection switch on the paper path.
Purpose
To check if the switches for paper conveying operate correctly.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Turn each switch on and off manually to check the status.
When a switch is detected to be in the ON position, the display for that switch will be highlighted.
Display Switches
FEED1 Feed switch 1 (FSW1)
FEED2 Feed switch 2 (FSW2)
FEED3 Feed switch 3 (FSW3)
MP TRAY MP feed switch (MPFSW)
REGIST Registration switch (RSW)
EJECT Eject switch (ESW)
BRANCH Feedshift switch (FSSW)
DUPLEX Duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW)
JOB SEPARATOR Job separator eject switch (JESW)*
*: Optional.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-20
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U032 Checking clutch operation
Description
Turns each clutch on.
Purpose
To check the operation of each clutch.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the clutch to be operated.
3. Press the start key. The clutch turns on for 1 s.

Display Clutches
PF1 Paper feed clutch 1 (PFCL1)
PF2 Paper feed clutch 2 (PFCL2)
PF MP TRAY MP paper feed clutch (MPPFCL)
FEED1 Feed clutch 1 (FCL1)
FEED2 Feed clutch 2 (FCL2)
FEED3 Feed clutch 3 (FCL3)
FEED MP TRAY MP feed clutch (MPFCL)
REGIST Registration clutch (RCL)
DUPLEX Duplex feed clutch (DUPFCL)
MOTOR ON The drive motor (DM) and the paper feed motor (PFM) are
turned ON.

4. To stop motor driving, press [MOTOR ON] again.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U033 Checking solenoid operation
Description
Applies current to each solenoid in order to check its ON status.
Purpose
To check the operation of each solenoid.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the solenoid to be operated.
3. Press the start key. The solenoid turns on for 1 s.

Display Solenoids
TONER Toner feed solenoid (TNFSOL)
BRANCH1 Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL)
BRANCH2 Job feedshift solenoid (JFSSOL)*
MOTOR ON The drive motor (DM) and the paper feed motor (PFM) are
turned on.
*Optional.
4. To stop motor driving, press [MOTOR ON] again.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-21
2KR/2KS-1

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U034 Adjusting the print start timing
Description
Adjusts the leading edge registration or center line.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.
Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be adjusted. The setting screen for the selected item is displayed.
Display Description
LSU OUT TOP Leading edge registration adjustment
LSU OUT LEFT Center line adjustment

Adjustment: Leading edge registration adjustment

1. Select the item to be adjusted.
Display Description Setting Initial Change in
range setting value per step
LSUOUT TOP Paper feed from MP tray -10.0 to 0 0.1 mm
MPT (L) (when large size paper is used) 10.0
LSUOUT TOP Paper feed from cassette -10.0 to 0 0.1 mm
CAS (L) (when large size paper is used) 10.0
LSUOUT TOP Duplex mode (second) -10.0 to 0 0.1 mm
DUP (L) (when large size paper is used) 10.0
LSUOUT TOP Paper feed from MP tray -10.0 to 0 0.1 mm
MPT (S) (when small size paper is used) 10.0
LSUOUT TOP Paper feed from cassette -10.0 to 0 0.1 mm
CAS (S) (when small size paper is used) 10.0
LSUOUT TOP Duplex mode (second) -10.0 to 0 0.1 mm
DUP (S) (when small size paper is used) 10.0
Large size: 218 mm or more in width of paper.
2. Press the system menu key.
3. Press the start key to output a test pattern.
4. Press the system menu key.
5. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys.
For output example 1, increase the value. For output example 2, decrease the value.

Leading edge
registration
(20 ± 1.0 mm)

Correct image Output Output

example 1 example 2

Figure 1-3-4

6. Press the start key. The value is set.

Remark
When changing the setting value of [Large] each item is modified, equal to amount of the value which is
changed adds also the value of [Small] each item and is pulled.

1-3-22
 2KR/2KS-1

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U034 Caution
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following adjustments in
maintenance mode.

U034 U066 U071

(P.1-3-29) (P.1-3-34)

Adjustment: Center line adjustment

1. Select the item to be adjusted.
Display Description Setting Initial Change in
range setting value per step
LSUOUT LEFT Paper feed from MP tray -10.0 to 0 0.1 mm
(MPT) 10.0
LSUOUT LEFT Paper feed from cassette 1 -10.0 to 0 0.1 mm
(CAS 1) 10.0
LSUOUT LEFT Paper feed from cassette 2 -10.0 to 0 0.1 mm
(CAS 2) 10.0
LSUOUT LEFT Paper feed from optional cassette 3 -10.0 to 0 0.1 mm
(CAS 3) 10.0
LSUOUT LEFT Paper feed from optional cassette 4 -10.0 to 0 0.1 mm
(CAS 4) 10.0
LSUOUT LEFT Duplex mode (second) -10.0 to 0 0.1 mm
(DUP) 10.0

2. Press the system menu key.

3. Press the start key to output a test pattern.
4. Press the system menu key.
5. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys.
For output example 1, increase the value. For output example 2, decrease the value.

Center line of printing

(within ± 0.5 mm)

Correct image Output Output

example 1 example 2

Figure 1-3-5

6. Press the start key. The value is set.

Remark
If the setting value for feeding from the MP tray is changed, the difference from the former value is added to or
subtracted from the values of other items.

1-3-23
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U034 Caution
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following adjustments in
maintenance mode.

U034 U067 U072

(P.1-3-30) (P.1-3-36)

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U035 Setting the printing area for folio paper
Description
Changes the printing area for copying on folio paper.
Purpose
To prevent cropped images on the trailing edge or left/right side of copy paper by setting the actual printing
area for folio paper.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
3. Change the setting using the +/- keys.
Display Setting Setting range Initial setting
LENGTH DATA Length 330 to 356 mm 330
WIDTH DATA Width 200 to 220 mm 210
4. Press the start key. The value is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U037 Checking the operation of the fan motors
Description
Drives the fan motors.
Description
To check the operation of the fan motors.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the fan motor to be operated.
3. Press the start key. The operation starts.
Display Operation
Fixing Fan Fuser fan motor (FUFM) is turned on
Developing Fan Developing fan motor (DEVFM) is turned on
Controller Box Fan Controller fan motor (CONFM) is turned on
Internal Fan LSU fan motor (LSUFM) is turned on
Conveying Fan Paper conveying fan motor 1, 2, 3 (PCFM1, 2, 3) are turned on
Power Source Fan Power source fan motor 1, 2 (PSFM1, 2) are turned on
Triple Fan Duplex fan motor 1, 2, 3 (DUPFM1, 2, 3) are turned on
ISU Fan Scanner fan motor (SFM) is turned on
ALL All fan motor are turned on
4. To stop operation, press the stop key.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-24
 2KR/2KS-2

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U051 Adjusting the deflection in the paper
Description
Adjusts the deflection in the paper.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is missing or varies randomly, or if the copy paper
is Z-folded.

Adjustment
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be adjusted.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
MPT Paper feed from MP tray -30 to 20 0
CASSETTE Paper feed from cassette -30 to 20 0
DUPLEX Duplex mode (second) -30 to 20 0
MPT (THICK) Paper feed from MP tray (thick paper) -30 to 20 0
3. Press the system menu key.
4. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy.
5. Press the system menu key.
6. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys.
For output example 1, increase the value. For output example 2, decrease the value.
The greater the value, the larger the deflection; the smaller the value, the smaller the deflection.

Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2

Figure 1-3-6
7. Press the start key. The value is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
U053 Setting the adjustment of the motor speed
Description
Performs fine adjustment of the speeds of the motors.
Purpose
To adjust the speed of the respective motors when the magnification is not correct.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be adjusted.
Display Description Setting Initial
range setting
MAIN MOTOR Drive motor (DM) speed adjustment -40 to 40 0
EJECT MOTOR Eject motor (EM) speed adjustment -7 to 15 0
POLYGON MOTOR Polygon motor (PM) speed adjustment -20 to 20 0
FEED MOTOR Paper feed motor (PFM) speed adjustment -40 to 40 0

1-3-25
2KR/2KS-2

Maintenance
Description
item No.

U053 Adjustment
1. Press the system menu key.
2. Press the start key to output an A3/Ledger VTC pattern.

Correct values for an A3/Ledger output are:

A = 350 ± 1.4 mm
B = 250 ± 1.0 mm

Figure 1-3-7

3. Press the system menu key.

4. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys.
A: Drive motor speed adjustment
Increasing the setting makes the image longer in the auxiliary scanning direction, and decreasing it
makes the image shorter in the auxiliary scanning direction.
B: Polygon motor speed adjustment
Increasing the setting makes the image shorter in the main scanning direction, and decreasing it makes
the image longer in the main scanning direction.
5. Press the start key. The value is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.

U059 Setting fan mode

Description
Specifies mode for paper conveying fan motors during conveying paper.
Purpose
To prevent contamination caused by paper conveying fan motors scattering toner, select MODE2.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the mode.
Display Description
MODE1 Paper conveying motors are not deactivated in printing on paper with
a width of less than 220 mm or less
MODE2 Paper conveying motors are deactivated in printing on paper with a
width of less than 220 mm or less

Initial setting: MODE1

3. Press the start key. The setting is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-26
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U061 Turning the exposure lamp on
Description
Turns the exposure lamp on.
Purpose
To check the exposure lamp.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
CCD The exposure lamp lights
CIS The CIS lights (when dual scan DP is installed)
3. Press the start key. The lamp lights.
4. To turn the lamp off, press the stop key.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U063 Adjusting the shading position
Description
Changes the shading position of the scanner.
Purpose
Used when white lines continue to appear longitudinally on the image after the shading plate is cleaned. This
is due to flaws or stains inside the shading plate. To prevent this problem, the shading position should be
changed so that shading is possible without being affected by the flaws or stains.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys.
Display Description Setting Initial Change in
range setting value per step
SHADING POSITION Shading position 0 to 24 0 0.11 mm
Increasing the setting moves the shading position toward the machine left, and decreasing it moves the
position toward the machine right.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.

Supplement
While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode
(which is activated by pressing the system menu key).

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-27
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U065 Adjusting the scanner magnification
Description
Adjusts the magnification of the original scanning.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if the magnification in the main scanning direction is incorrect.
Make the adjustment if the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction is incorrect.

Caution
Adjust the magnification of the scanner in the following order.

U053 U065 U065 U067 U070

(P.1-3-25)
(main scanning (auxiliary scanning (P.1-3-30) (P.1-3-32)
direction) direction)

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be adjusted.
Display Description Setting Initial Change in
range setting value per step
Y SCAN ZOOM Scanner magnification in the main -15 to 15 0 0.1 %
scanning direction
X SCAN ZOOM Scanner magnification in the auxil- -25 to 25 0 0.05 %
iary scanning direction

Adjustment: Main scanning direction

1. Press the system menu key.
2. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy.
3. Press the system menu key.
4. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.

Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2

Figure 1-3-8
5. Press the start key. The value is set.

Adjustment: Auxiliary scanning direction

1. Press the system menu key.
2. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy.
3. Press the system menu key.
4. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.

Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2

Figure 1-3-9
5. Press the start key. The value is set.

1-3-28
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U065 Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U066 Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration

Description
Adjusts the scanner leading edge registration of the original scanning.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.

Adjustment
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be adjusted.
Display Description Setting Initial Change in
range setting value per step
FRONT Scanner leading edge registration -45 to 45 0 0.11 mm
TAIL Scanner leading edge registration -45 to 45 0 0.11 mm
(rotate copying)

3. Press the system menu key.

4. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy.
5. Press the system menu key.
6. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.

Scanner leading edge registration

Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2

Figure 1-3-10

7. Press the start key. The value is set.

Caution
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following adjustments in
maintenance mode.

U066 U403 U071 U404

(P.1-3-82) (P.1-3-34) (P.1-3-83)

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-29
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U067 Adjusting the scanner center line
Description
Adjusts the scanner center line of the original scanning.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original.

Adjustment
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be adjusted.
Display Description Setting Initial Change in
range setting value per step
FRONT Scanner center line -40 to 40 0 0.08 mm
ROTATE Scanner center line (rotate copying) -40 to 40 0 0.08 mm
3. Press the system menu key.
4. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy.
5. Press the system menu key.
6. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.

Scanner center line

Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2

Figure 1-3-11

7. Press the start key. The value is set.

Caution
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following adjustments in
maintenance mode.

U067 U403 U072 U404

(P.1-3-82) (P.1-3-36) (P.1-3-83)

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-30
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U068 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP
Description
Adjusts the position for scanning originals from the DP. Performs the test copy at the four scanning positions
after adjusting.
Purpose
Used when the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the DP is used. Run
U071 to adjust the timing of DP leading edge when the scanning position is changed.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
Display Description Setting Initial Change in
range setting value per step
DP READ Starting position adjustment for -55 to 55 0 0.11 mm
scanning originals
BLACK LINE Scanning position for the test copy 0 to 3 0 -
originals
2. Select [DP READ] of the screen for selecting an item.
3. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys.
When the setting value is increased, the scanning position moves to the right and it moves to the left
when the setting value is decreased.
4. Press the start key. The value is set.
5. Select [BLACK LINE] of the screen for selecting an item.
6. Select the scanning position using the +/- or numeric keys.
7. Press the start key. The value is set.
8. Set the original (the one which density is known) in the DP and press the system menu key. The screen
for the test copy mode is displayed.
9. Press the start key. Test copy is executed.
10. Perform the test copy at each scanning position with the setting value from 0 to 3 and check that no
black line appears and the image is normally scanned.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-31
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U070 Adjusting the DP magnification
Description
Adjusts the DP original scanning speed.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if the magnification is incorrect in the main scanning direction or auxiliary scanning
direction when the DP is used.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be adjusted.
Display Description Setting Initial Change in
range setting value per step
MOTOR ADJ Magnification in the auxiliary scanning -25 to 25 0 0.05 %
(FRONT) direction of CCD (first side)
MOTOR ADJ Magnification in the auxiliary scanning -25 to 25 0 0.05 %
(BACK) direction of CCD (second side)
Y SCAN ZOOM Magnification in the main scanning -15 to 15 0 0.01 %
(CIS)* direction of CIS
X SCAN ZOOM Magnification in the auxiliary scanning -50 to 50 0 0.05 %
(CIS)* direction of CIS
*: Dual scan DP only.

Adjustment: Main scanning direction of CIS

1. Press the system menu key.
2. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy.
3. Press the system menu key.
4. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.

Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2

Figure 1-3-12

5. Press the start key. The value is set.

Caution
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following adjustments in
maintenance mode.

U070 U071 U404

(P.1-3-34) (P.1-3-83)

1-3-32
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U070 Adjustment: Auxiliary scanning direction of CCD/CIS
1. Press the system menu key.
2. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy.
3. Press the system menu key.
4. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.

Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2

Figure 1-3-13

5. Press the start key. The value is set.

Caution
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following adjustments in
maintenance mode.

U070 U071 U404

(P.1-3-34) (P.1-3-83)

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-33
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U071 Adjusting the DP scanning timing
Description
Adjusts the DP original scanning timing.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the
copy image when the DP is used.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be adjusted.
Display Description Setting Initial Change in
range setting value per step
FRONT HEAD Leading edge registration of CCD -66 to 66 0 0.08 mm
(first side)
FRONT TAIL Trailing edge registration of CCD -66 to 66 0 0.08 mm
(first side)
BACK HEAD Leading edge registration of CCD -66 to 66 0 0.08 mm
(second side)
BACK TAIL Trailing edge registration of CCD -66 to 66 0 0.08 mm
(second side)
HEAD (CIS)* Leading edge registration of CIS -66 to 66 0 0.08 mm
TAIL (CIS)* Trailing edge registration of CIS -66 to 66 0 0.08 mm
*: Dual scan DP only.

Adjustment: Leading edge registration

1. Press the system menu key.
2. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy.
3. Press the system menu key.
4. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.

Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2

Figure 1-3-14

5. Press the start key. The value is set.

Caution
If the CCD first side is adjusted, check the CCD second side and if adjustment is required, carry out the
adjustment.
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following adjustments in
maintenance mode.

U071 U404
(P.1-3-83)

1-3-34
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U071 Adjustment: Trailing edge registration
1. Press the system menu key.
2. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy.
3. Press the system menu key.
4. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.

Original
Copy Copy
example 1 example 2

Figure 1-3-15

5. Press the start key. The value is set.

Caution
If the CCD first side is adjusted, check the CCD second side and if adjustment is required, carry out the
adjustment.
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following adjustments in
maintenance mode.

U071 U404
(P.1-3-83)

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-35
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U072 Adjusting the DP center line
Description
Adjusts the scanning start position for the DP original.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the centers of the original and the copy image when
the DP is used.

Adjustment
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be adjusted.
Setting Initial Change in
Display Description
range setting value per step
FRONT DP center line of CCD (first side) -40 to 40 0 0.08 mm
BACK DP center line of CCD (second side) -40 to 40 0 0.08 mm
CIS* DP center line of CIS -40 to 40 0 0.08 mm
*: Dual scan DP only.
3. Press the system menu key.
4. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy.
5. Press the system menu key.
6. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys.
For copy example 1, increase the value. For copy example 2, decrease the value.

Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2

Figure 1-3-16

7. Press the start key. The value is set.

Caution
If the CCD first side is adjusted, check the CCD second side and if adjustment is required, carry out the
adjustment.
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following adjustments in
maintenance mode.

U072 U404
(P.1-3-83)

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-36
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U073 Checking scanner operation
Description
Simulates the scanner operation under arbitrary conditions.
Purpose
To check scanner operation.

Start
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be operated.
Display Description
SCANNER MOTOR Scanner operation
HOME POSITION Home position operation
DUST CHECK Dust adhesion check operation with lamp on
DP READING DP scanning position operation

Setting: [SCANNER MOTOR]

1. Select [SCANNER MOTOR].
2. Select the item.
3. Change the setting using the +/- keys.
Display Operating conditions Setting range
ZOOM Magnification 25 to 400 %
SIZE Original size See below.
LAMP On and off of the exposure lamp 0 (off) or 1 (on)

Original sizes for each setting in SIZE

Setting Paper size Setting Paper size
5000 A4 5000 A5R
4300 B5 7800 Folio
5100 11" x 8 1/2" 10200 11" x 17"
10000 A3 9000 11" x 15"
8600 B4 8400 8 1/2" x 14"
7100 A4R 6600 8 1/2" x 11"
6100 B5R 5100 5 1/2" x 8 1/2"
4. Press the start key. Scanning starts under the selected conditions.
5. To stop operation, press the stop key.

Method: [HOME POSITION]

1. Select [HOME POSITION].
2. Press the start key.
The mirror frame of the scanner moves to the home position.

Method: [DUST CHECK]

1. Select [DUST CHECK].
2. Press the start key. The exposure lamp lights.
3. To turn the exposure lamp off, press the stop key.

Method: [DP READING]

1. Select [DP READING].
2. Press the start key.
The mirror frame of the scanner moves to the reading position.

Completion
Press the stop key when scanning stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-37
2KR/2KS-1

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U074 Adjusting the DP input light luminosity
Description
Sets the luminosity correction for scanning originals from the DP.
Purpose
Modify the setting only if a spotted background appears when a bluish original is scanned from the DP.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
INPUT DATA DP input light luminosity correction 0 to 3 0
Settings 0: No correction / 1: Slight correction / 2: Medium correction / 3: Strong correction
3. Press the start key. The value is set.

Supplement
While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode
(which is activated by pressing the system menu key).

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U080 Setting the economy mode
Description
Sets the level in the economy mode.
Purpose
To increase or decrease the image density in the eco-print mode.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
ECO MODE Exposure is toner economy mode 0 to 100 60
Increasing the setting makes the image darker; decreasing it makes the image lighter.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.

Supplement
While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode
(which is activated by pressing the system menu key).

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-38
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U081 Adjusting the correct exposure
Description
Adjusts the correct exposure in text and photo mode, text mode or photo mode.
Purpose
To be executed as required.
Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
3. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys.
Display Description Setting Initial
range setting
MIX ADJ Adjusts the correct exposure in text and photo mode -3 to 3 0
TEXT ADJ Adjusts the correct exposure in text mode -3 to 3 0
PHOTO ADJ Adjusts the correct exposure in photo mode -3 to 3 0
Increasing the setting makes the image darker; decreasing it makes the image lighter.
4. Press the start key. The value is set.

Supplement
While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode
(which is activated by pressing the system menu key).

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U087 Setting DP reading position modification operation
Description
The presence or absence of dust is determined by comparing the scan data of the original trailing edge and
that taken after the original is conveyed past the DP original scanning position. If dust is identified, the DP
original scanning position is adjusted for the following originals.
Purpose
When using DP, to solve the problem when black lines occurs due to the dust with respect to original reading
position.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set. The setting screen for the selected item is displayed.
Display Description
CCD Setting of standard data when dust is detected
BLACK LINE Initialization of original reading position

Setting: Standard data when dust is detected

1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
CCD R Lowest density of the R regard as the dust 0 to 255 145
CCD G Lowest density of the G regard as the dust 0 to 255 145
CCD B Lowest density of the B regard as the dust 0 to 255 145
3. Press the start key. The value is set.

Setting: Initialization of original reading position

1. Select [CLEAR].
2. Press the start key. The setting is cleared.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-39
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U089 Outputting a MIP-PG pattern
Description
Selects and outputs the MIP-PG pattern created in the machine.
Purpose
To check copier status other than scanner when adjusting image printing, using MIP-PG pattern output (with-
out scanning).

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the MIP-PG pattern to be output and press the start key.
Display PG pattern to be output Purpose
GRAYSCALE To check the laser scanner unit
engine output characteristics

MONO1 To check the drum quality

(Output density: 0)

MONO4 To check the drum quality

(Output density: 70)

256-LEVEL To check resolution

reproducibility in printing

3. Press the system menu key.

4. Press the start key. A MIP-PG pattern is output.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-40
 2KR/2KS-1

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U091 Setting the white line correction
Description
Sets the error detection threshold value for white line correction and displays the count result of abnormal pixels.
Purpose
To perform when replacing the CIS, DP driver PWB or CIS roller.

Method: white line correction

1. Press the start key.
2. Press [EXECUTE].
3. Press the start key. Holding of white reference data is started.
4. The count result of abnormal pixels is displayed.
Display Description
Calculation(R) Abnormal pixel count result for color R
Calculation(G) Abnormal pixel count result for color G
Calculation(B) Abnormal pixel count result for color B
5. Press the system menu key.
6. Place a gray original on the DP with the gray side down. Load paper in the cassette.
The paper should be the same size as the original.
7. Press the start key.
Two test pattern sheets will be printed. (1st sheet: blank sheet, 2nd sheet: Approx. 60 mm black band)
8. If no vertical lines appear on either sheet, the setting has been completed normally.
If vertical black lines appear on the blank sheet and vertical white lines appear in the black band in the
same position, clean the CIS roller and the CIS glass and then repeat white line correction.
If vertical black lines or vertical white lines appear on both sheets, white line correction has been com-
pleted normally. However, the cause of the vertical lines lies in the engine, and thus the engine must be
checked.
How to view test copies
blank sheet black band Causes Corrective measures
No lines No lines - Complete
Black lines White lines Dirty CIS roller or CIS Clean CIS roller or CIS glass and then
glass perform U091 again
Black lines No lines Engine side U091 ends, check engine
No lines White lines Engine side U091 ends, check engine

Setting: Threshold value setting

1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the value using the +/- or numeric keys.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
Threshold(R) Displaying of abnormal pixel detection - -
threshold value for color R
Threshold(G) Displaying of abnormal pixel detection - -
threshold value for color G
Threshold(Com)* Setting of abnormal pixel detection thresh- 0 to 1023 112
old value for color
Abnorm Pixel Abnormal pixel threshold value setting 0 to 8191 75
Threshold
MODE Switching between white line correction 0: OFF/1: ON/ 0
mode ON/OFF 2: Test mode
*: Normally the Threshold (Com) value should not be changed from 112, the initial setting.
If white lines appear even though the CIS roller and glass are not dirty, raise the set value.
If fine lines in some originals disappear, lower the set value.
Set within the range 50 to 200. (If set outside this range, the image may be affected.)

1-3-41
2KR/2KS-1

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U091 3. Press the start key. The value is set.
4. After changing the Threshold(Com) value, turn the main power switch off and on.
Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U093 Setting the exposure density gradient

Description
Changes the exposure density gradient in the manual density mode, depending on respective image quality
modes.
Purpose
To set how the image density is altered by a change of one step in the manual density adjustment for respec-
tive image quality modes. Also used to make copy images darker or lighter.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the image quality mode. The setting screen for the selected item is displayed.
Display Description
TEXT Density in the text mode
MIXED Density in the text and photo mode
OTHER Density in modes other than the text mode or the text and photo mode
FAX TEXT Density in the text in fax mode
FAX PHOTO Density in the photo in fax mode

Setting: [TEXT]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Adjust the setting using the +/- or numeric keys.
Display Description Setting Initial
range setting
TEXT DARKER Change in density when manual density is set dark 0 to 3 0
TEXT LIGHTER Change in density when manual density is set light 0 to 3 0
Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger, and decreasing it makes the change smaller.

Image density Setting: 0

Setting: 3
Dark
Set to LIGHTER

Set to DARKER

Light
Density adjustment
Light Center Dark

Figure 1-3-17

3. Press the start key. The value is set.

1-3-42
 2KR/2KS-1

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U093 Setting: [MIXED]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Adjust the setting using the +/- or numeric keys.
Display Description Setting Initial
range setting
MIXED DARKER Change in density when manual density is set dark 0 to 3 0
MIXED LIGHTER Change in density when manual density is set light 0 to 3 0
Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger, and decreasing it makes the change smaller.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.

Setting: [OTHER]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Adjust the setting using the +/- or numeric keys.
Display Description Setting Initial
range setting
OTHER DARKER Change in density when manual density is set dark 0 to 3 0
OTHER LIGTER Change in density when manual density is set light 0 to 3 0
Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger, and decreasing it makes the change smaller.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.

Setting: [FAX TEXT]

1. Select the item to be set.
2. Adjust the setting using the +/- or numeric keys.
Display Description Setting Initial
range setting
FAX TEXT DARKER Change in density when manual density is set 0 to 3 0
dark
FAX TEXT LIGHTER Change in density when manual density is set 0 to 3 0
light
Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger, and decreasing it makes the change smaller.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.

Setting: [FAX PHOTO]

1. Select the item to be set.
2. Adjust the setting using the +/- or numeric keys.
Display Description Setting Initial
range setting
FAX PHOTO DARKER Change in density when manual density is set 0 to 3 0
dark
FAX PHOTO LIGHTER Change in density when manual density is set 0 to 3 0
light
Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger, and decreasing it makes the change smaller.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.

Supplement
While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode
(which is activated by pressing the system menu key).

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-43
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U099 Adjusting original size detection
Description
Checks the operation of the original size sensor and sets the sensing threshold value.
Purpose
To adjust the sensitiveness of the sensor and size judgement time if the original size sensor malfunctions fre-
quently due to incident light or the like.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item. The screen for executing each item is displayed.
Display Description
DATA1 Displaying original size sensor transmission data
B/W LEVEL1 B/W LEVEL setting original size sensor threshold value
Setting original size judgment time
DATA2 Displaying original size sensor transmission data (when DP is
installed)

Method: Display the data for the sensor

1. Place the original and close the original cover or DP. The detection sensor transmission data is dis-
played.
Display Description
ORIGINAL AREA R Detected original width size (R)
ORIGINAL AREA G Detected original width size (G)
ORIGINAL AREA B Detected original width size (B)
ORIGINAL AREA Detected original width size
SIZE SW L Displays the original size sensor (OSS) ON/OFF
2. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop key.

Setting: Detection sensor threshold value

1. Select an item to be set.
2. Adjust the setting using the +/- or numeric keys.
Initial setting
Setting
Display Description DP not DP
range
installed installed
ORIGINAL R1 - 3 Original threshold value for color R 0 to 255 40/30/20 50/50/50
ORIGINAL G1 - 3 Original threshold value for color G 0 to 255 40/30/20 50/50/50
ORIGINAL B1 - 3 Original threshold value for color B 0 to 255 40/30/20 50/50/50
LIGHT SOURCE R Light source threshold value for color R 0 to 255 19 49
LIGHT SOURCE G Light source threshold value for color G 0 to 255 19 49
LIGHT SOURCE B Light source threshold value for color B 0 to 255 19 49
WAIT TIME Time from activation of the original 0 to 255 150 150
detection switch (ODSW) to original size
judgment
3. Press the start key. The value is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-44
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U100 Setting the main high voltage
Description
Performs main charging.
Purpose
To check main charging.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be operated.
3. Press the start key. The selected operation starts.
Display Description
MC Turning the main charger on
LASER Turning the main charger on and the laser scanner unit on and off
4. To stop operation, press the stop key.

Completion
Press the stop key when main charger output stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is dis-
played.
U101 Setting the other high voltages
Description
Sets the developing bias control voltage, the transfer control voltage, and the separation control voltage or
checks the output of these voltages.
Purpose
To check the developing bias, the transfer voltage and the separation voltage or to take measures against
drop of image density or background fog.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
3. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys.

Display Description Setting range Initial setting

DEV BIAS Developing bias AC component frequency 20 to 32 28
at image formation
DEV SBIAS Developing shift bias potential at image 0 to 3 1
formation
DEV DUTY Developing bias AC component duty at 0 to 100 50
image formation
TC DATA Transfer control voltage 0 to 300 130
SC DATA Separation control voltage 0 to 60 20
Increasing the DEV BIAS setting makes the image darker; decreasing it makes the image lighter.
Increasing the DEV SBIAS setting makes the image darker.
Increasing the DEV DUTY setting makes the image lighter; decreasing it makes the image darker.
Increasing the TC DATA setting makes the transfer voltage higher, and decreasing it makes the voltage
lower.
Increasing the SC DATA setting makes the separation voltage higher, and decreasing it makes the volt-
age lower.
4. Press the start key. The value is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-45
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U102 Setting the cleaning interval for the main charger
Description
Changes the intervals at which the main charger is cleaned.
Purpose
To change the setting when the background is visible.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
IINTERVAL Main charger cleaning operation 0 to 20 5
intervals (unit: 1000 sheets)
When set to 0, the cleaning for the main charger is not operated.
3. Press the start key. The value is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U109 Displaying the drum type
Description
Displays the drum surface potential set as EEPROM of the drum unit.
Purpose
To check the drum surface potential.

Method
1. Press the start key. Drum surface potential (V) is displayed.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U110 Checking the drum count
Description
Displays the drum counts for checking.
Purpose
To check the drum status.

Method
1. Press the start key. The drum counter count is displayed.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U111 Checking the drum drive time
Description
Displays the drum drive time for checking a figure, which is used as a reference when correcting the high volt-
age based on time.
Purpose
To check the drum status.

Method
1. Press the start key. The drum drive time is displayed.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-46
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U112 Setting toner refresh operation
Description
Sets the toner refresh operation time and the developing bias on time at power on and after copying.
Purpose
To change the toner refresh operation time and the developing bias on time at power on and after copying if
image flow level is low.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
3. Change the setting using the +/- keys.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
ON TIME(SEC) Toner refresh operation time 50 to 150 (sec) 120
BIAS TIME(MSEC) Developing bias on time 500 to 1000 (msec) 540
4. Press the start key. The value is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U114 Setting separation charger mode
Description
Sets the separation charger mode.
Purpose
To change the setting if the fuser offset or carrier leaking occurs.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
MODE Separation charger mode 0 to 8 (0 to 3)* 3
*: Entering a value other than 0 to 3 will engage the MODE3 (value 3) separation mode.

Details on the modes

Display Description
MODE0 (Value 0) Full page separation for both first and second pages
MODE1 (Value 1) First page: Separation on leading and trailing edges
Second page: Full page separation
MODE2 (Value 2) Full page separation is activated for both first and second pages provided the
ambient temperature is less than 19°C/66.2°F.
First page: Separation is activated for both leading and trailing edges, sec-
ond page: Full page separation, provided the ambient temperature is more
than 20°C/68°F.
MODE3 (Value 3) Separation is activated on both leading and trailing edges for both first and
second pages
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-47
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U117 Checking the drum number
Description
Displays the drum number.
Purpose
To check the drum number.

Method
1. Press the start key. The drum number is displayed.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U118 Displaying the drum history
Description
Displays the past record of machine number and the drum counter.
Purpose
To check the count value of machine number and the drum counter.

Method
1. Press the start key. Past record of 5 cases is displayed.
Display Description
MACHINE No.1 to 5 Past record of machine number
COUNT 1 to 5 Past record of drum counter

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U127 Checking the transfer count
Description
Displays and clears the counts of the transfer counter.
Purpose
To check the fuser count after replacement of the transfer roller. Also to clear the counts after replacing roller.

Method
1. Press the start key. The current counts of the transfer counter is displayed.

Clearing
1. Select [CLEAR].
2. Press the start key. The count is cleared.

Setting
1. Change the count using the +/- or numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The count is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-48
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U130 Initial setting for the developing unit
Description
Replenishes toner to the developing unit to a certain level from the toner container that has been installed.
Purpose
To operate when installing the machine or replacing the developing unit.

Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
2. Press the start key.
Toner installation is started and the output value of the sensor and execution time are displayed.
Display Description
TONER SENSOR Output value of the sensor
TIME(SEC) Execution time

Completion
Press the stop key after initial setting is complete. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is dis-
played.
U136 Setting toner near end mode
Description
Sets whether to restrict printing operation when the toner is empty.
Purpose
To set to ON to remove restrictions on printing operation when toner empty is detected.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select [ON] or [OFF].
Display Description
ON Do not display an error or restrict printing operation when the toner is empty
OFF Display an error and restrict printing operation when the toner is empty

Initial setting: OFF

3. Press the start key. The setting is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U139 Displaying the temperature and humidity
Description
Displays the detected external temperature and humidity.
Purpose
To check the external temperature and humidity.

Method
1. Press the start key.
The detected external temperature (°C/°F) and humidity (%) are displayed.
Display Description
Temperature External temperature (°C/°F)
Humidity External humidity (%)
Absolute Humidity External absolute humidity (%)

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-49
2KR/2KS-2

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U144 Setting toner disposal operation
Description
Sets toner disposal operation after completion of copying.
Purpose
To set whether or not toner is disposal on the drum after low density copying. Normally no change is neces-
sary from the initial setting.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
MODE0 Toner not disposal
MODE1 Toner disposal after simplex or duplex copying
MODE2 Toner disposal after simplex copying
MODE3 Executes toner disposal every after 52 pages of printing
(simplex and duplex copying)
MODE4 Executes toner disposal every after 52 pages of printing
(simplex only)
Initial setting: MODE2
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U155 Checking sensors for toner
Description
Displays the on-off status of each sensor or switch related to toner.
Purpose
To check if the sensors and switches operate correctly.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Turn each switch on and off manually to check the status.
When the on-status of a switch is detected, that switch is displayed in reverse.
Display Switches and sensors
DEVELOPER SENSOR Toner sensor (TNS)
CONTAINER SET Toner container detection switch (TCDSW)
CONTAINER SENSOR Toner container sensor (TCS)
DISPOSAL TANK SET Waste toner detection switch (WTDSW)
DISPOSAL TANK SENSOR Overflow sensor (OFS)
MOTOR The toner feed solenoid (TNFSOL) and the paper feed motor
(PFM) are turned on
3. To stop motor driving, press [MOTOR ON] again.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-50
 2KR/2KS-2

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U157 Checking the developing drive time
Description
Displays the developing drive time for checking, which is used as a reference when correcting the toner con-
trol.
Purpose
To check the developing drive time after replacing the developing unit.

Method
1. Press the start key. The developing drive time is displayed in minutes.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U158 Checking the developing count
Description
Displays the developing count for checking.
Purpose
To check the developing count after replacing the developing unit.

Method
1. Press the start key. The developing counter count is displayed.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U161 Setting the fuser control temperature
Description
Changes the fuser control temperature.
Purpose
Normally no change is necessary. However, can be used to prevent curling or creasing of paper, or solve a
fuser problem on thick paper. MODE changes printing speed control at over-heating on the fuser ends.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
3. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
DRIVE START TEMP Driving start temperature when warm- 0 to 255 (°C) 185
up starts
READY CONTROL T Control temperature for displaying 0 to 255 (°C) 200
[Ready for printing.]
PRINT CONTROL T Control temperature during printing 0 to 255 (°C) 200
MODE Printing speed control at over-hearing 1/2 1
on the fuser ends
4. Press the start key. The value is set.

Setting: [MODE]
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the mode.
Display Description
MODE1 Printing halts for approximately 24 s provided the temperature on the fuser
ends reaches 235°C/455°F before printing is resumed
MODE2 Printing speed is decelerated by 75% with a fuser-end temperature greater
than 228°C/442°F
Initial setting: MODE1
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.

1-3-51
2KR/2KS-2

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U161 Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U163 Resetting the fuser problem data

Description
Resets the detection of a service call code indicating a problem in the fuser section.
Purpose
To prevent accidents due to an abnormally high fuser temperature.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Press [EXECUTE] on the touch panel.
3. Press the start key. The fuser problem data is initialized.
4. Turn the main power switch off and on.

U167 Checking/clearing the fuser counts

Description
Displays and clears the fuser counts for checking.
Purpose
To check the fuser count after replacement of the fuser unit. Also to clear the counts after replacing unit.

Method
1. Press the start key. The fuser counts is displayed.

Clearing
1. Select [CLEAR].
2. Press the start key. The count is cleared.

Setting
1. Change the count using the +/- or numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The count is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U196 Turning the fuser heater on
Description
Turns the fuser heater 1 or 2 on.
Purpose
To check fuser heaters turning on.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the heater to be turned on.
3. Press the start key. The selected heater turns on for 2 s and then turns off.
Display Description
MAIN Fuser heater 1 (FH1)
SUB Fuser heater 2 (FH2)

Completion
Press the stop key when fuser heaters 1 and 2 are off. The screen for selecting the maintenance item No. is
displayed.

1-3-52
 2KR/2KS-2

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U198 Setting the fuser phase control
Description
Enables or disables fuser-phase control.
Purpose
Turn to OFF to reduce the audible sound that may be generated by the power source PWB. Depending on the
environment of installation, this may cause a voltage drop, potentially resulting in flickering fluorescent tubes,
etc.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select ON or OFF.
Display Description
ON Fuser phase control present
OFF Fuser phase control absent
Initial setting: ON
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U199 Checking the fuser temperature
Description
Displays the fuser temperature, the external temperature and the absolute humidity.
Purpose
To check the fuser temperature, the external temperature and the absolute humidity.

Method
1. Press the start key. The fuser temperature (°C/°F), external temperature (°C/°F) and the absolute
humidity (%) are displayed.
Display Description
FIX CENTER TEMP Fuser center temperature (°C/°F)
FIX EDGE TEMP Fuser edge temperature (°C/°F)
SURROUND TEMP External temperature (°C/°F)
HUMIDITY Absolute humidity (%)

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U200 Turning all LEDs on
Description
Turns all the LEDs on the operation panel on.
Purpose
To check if all the LEDs on the operation panel light.

Method
1. Press the start key. All the LEDs on the operation panel light.
2. Press the stop key. The LEDs turns off.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-53
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U201 Initializing the touch panel
Description
Automatically correct the positions of the X- and Y-axes of the touch panel.
Purpose
To automatically correct the display positions on the touch panel after it is replaced.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the [INITIALIZE] or [CHECK].
Display Description
INITIALIZE Adjusts the display on the panel automatically.
CHECK Checks the display on the touch panel.

Method: [INITIALIZE]
1. Press the start key.
2. Press the center of the + keys. Be sure to press three + keys displayed in order.
The touch panel is adjusted automatically.
3. Press the indicated three + keys, and then check the display.
4. Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

Method: [CHECK]
1. Press the start key.
2. Press the indicated three + keys, and then check the display.
When adjusting the display, press [INITIALIZE] to execute the adjustment automatically.
3. Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U202 Setting the KMAS host monitoring system
Description
Initializes or operates the KMAS host monitoring system.
This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines, so no setting
is necessary.

1-3-54
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U203 Checking DP operation
Description
Simulates the original conveying operation separately in the DP.
Purpose
To check the DP operation.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper.
3. Select the item to be operated.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
CCD ADP Without paper, single-sided original of CCD - -
(NON P) (continuous operation)
CCD ADP With paper, single-sided original of CCD - -
CCD RADP Without paper, double-sided original of CCD - -
(NON P) (continuous operation)
CCD RADP With paper, double-sided original of CCD - -
CIS RADP Without paper, double-sided original of CIS - -
(NON P)* (continuous operation)
CIS RADP* With paper, double-sided original of CIS - -
SPEED Switching between normal reading (600 dpi) 0 (Normal)/ 0
and high-speed reading 1 (High-speed)

*: Dual scan DP only.

4. Press the start key. The operation starts.
5. To stop continuous operation, press the stop key.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-55
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U204 Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter
Description
Sets the presence or absence of the optional key card or key counter.
Purpose
To run this maintenance item if a key card or key counter is installed.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set. The setting screen for the selected item is displayed.
Display Description
KEY-DEVICE Sets the presence or absence of the key card or key counter
MESSAGE Sets the message when optional equipment is not installed

Setting: [KEY-DEVICE]
1. Select the optional counter to be installed.
Display Description
KEY-CARD The key card is installed
KEY-COUNTER The key counter is installed
OFF Not installed
Initial setting: OFF
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
3. Turn the main power switch off and on.

Setting: [MESSAGE]
1. Select the [KEY-DEVICE] or [COIN VENDOR].
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
3. Turn the main power switch off and on.

U206 Setting the presence or absence of the coin vender

Description
Sets the presence or absence of the optional coin vender. Also sets the details for coin vender operation, such
as mode and unit price.
This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines, so no setting
is necessary.

1-3-56
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U207 Checking the operation panel keys
Description
Checks operation of the operation panel keys.
Purpose
To check operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel.

Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
2. COUNT0 is displayed and the leftmost LED on the operation panel lights.
3. As the keys lined up in the same line as the lit indicator are pressed in the order from the top to the bot-
tom, the figure shown on the touch panel increases in increments of 1. When all the keys in that line are
pressed and if there are any LEDs corresponding to the keys in the line on the immediate right, the top
LED in that line will light.
4. When all the keys on the operation panel have been pressed, all the LEDs light for up to 10 seconds.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U208 Setting the paper size for the paper feeder
Description
Sets the size of paper used in 3000-sheet paper feeder.
Purpose
To change the setting when the size of paper used in the paper feeder is changed.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the paper size (A4, B5 or Letter).
Initial setting: Letter (Inch specifications)/A4 (Metric specifications)
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
4. Turn the main power switch off and on.

1-3-57
2KR/2KS-1

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U221 Setting the USB host lock function
Description
Specifies ON/OFF the USB host lock function. Setting this to ON causes the machine to be unable to recog-
nize the device connected to the USB host.
Purpose
Set according to the preference of the user.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
USB HOST LOCK USB host lock function ON/OFF setting

Setting
1. Select [ON] or [OFF].
Display Description
ON USB host lock function ON
OFF USB host lock function OFF
Initial setting: OFF
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
3. Turn the main power switch off and on.
U222 Setting the IC card type
Description
Sets the IC card type.
This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines, so no setting
is necessary.

1-3-58
 2KR/2KS-1

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U223 Operation panel lock
Description
Sets the operation panel lock function to ON or OFF.
Purpose
To restrict operation in the system menu on the operation panel.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Unlock Release the lock of the operation from the system menu.
Partial Lock Partially lock the operation from the system menu.
Lock Entirely lock the operation from the system menu.
Initial setting: Unlock
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U224 Panel sheet extension
Description
Changes the image data and the message of the opening screen at the machine startup and the image data
and the message of the service call screen to user specified data.
Purpose
Set according to the preference of the user.

Setting
1. Write the image data or the message data to the USB memory.
2. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot of the machine.
3. Turn the main power switch on.
4. Enter the maintenance item.
5. Press the start key.
6. Select the [Install] or [UnInstall].
Display Description
Install Installs the image data or the message data
UnInstall Restores the original image data or message data

7. Select the item.

Display Description
Opening Img Startup screen
Call Img Service call image
Call Msg Top Service call screen 1
Call Msg Detail Service call screen 2

8. Press the start key. Installation or uninstallation is started.

9. When normally completed, [COMPLETE] is displayed.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-59
2KR/2KS-1

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U234 Setting punch destination
Description
Sets the destination of punch unit of 3000-sheet document finisher.
Purpose
To be set when installing a different punch unit from the destination of the machine.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the destination.
Display Description
AUTO With no punch unit
JAPAN METRIC Metric (Japan) specifications
INCH Inch (North America) specifications
EUROPE METRIC Metric (Europe) specifications
Initial setting: AUTO
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
4. Turn the main power switch off and on.

U236 Setting the limit for the ejection section of the built-in finisher
Description
If the machine is equipped with an built-in finisher, this mode sets whether A5R/B5R/statement size paper is
output to the machine top tray or not.
Purpose
If the machine is equipped with an built-in finisher and if paper jams occur due to curling of paper in the built-
in ejection section when two-sided copying onto A5R/B5R/statement size paper is performed, this mode is
used to change the setting to ON to disable ejection to the machine top tray.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select ON or OFF.
Display Description
ON Does not eject to the machine top tray.
OFF Eject to the machine top tray.
Initial setting: OFF
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-60
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U237 Setting finisher stack quantity
Description
Sets the number of sheets of each stack on the main tray and on the Inner tray in 3000-sheet document fin-
isher.
Purpose
To change the setting when a stack malfunction has occurred.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
MAIN TRAY Number of sheets of stack on the main tray
MIDDLE TRAY Number of sheets of stack on the internal tray for staple copying

Setting: [MAIN TRAY]

1. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys.
Display Description
0 Number of sheets of stack on the main tray: 3000 sheets
1 Number of sheets of stack on the main tray: 1500 sheets
Initial setting: 0
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
3. Turn the main power switch off and on.

Setting: [MIDDLE TRAY]

1. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys.
Display Description
0 Number of sheets of stack on the internal tray for staple copying: 50 sheets
1 Number of sheets of stack on the internal tray for staple copying: 30 sheets
Initial setting: 0
Number of sheets of stack on the internal tray for non-staple copying: 10 sheets
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.
3. Turn the main power switch off and on.

1-3-61
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U240 Checking the operation of the finisher
Description
Turns each motor and solenoid of the 3000-sheet document finisher ON.
Purpose
To check the operation of each motor and solenoid of the 3000-sheet document finisher.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be checked. The screen for executing each item is displayed.
Display Description
FINISHER MOTOR Checking the motor of the 3000-sheet document finisher
FINISHER SOL Checking the solenoid of the 3000-sheet document finisher
MAIL BOX Checking the motor and solenoid of the mailbox
BOOKLET Checking the motor of the centerfold unit

Method: [FINISHER MOTOR]

1. Select the item to be operated.
2. Press the start key. The operation starts.
Display Motor
FEED IN MOTOR M Paper entry motor (PEM) is turned on at middle speed
FEED IN MOTOR L Paper entry motor (PEM) is turned on at low speed
CONV MOTOR H Paper conveying motor (PCM) is turned on at high speed
CONV MOTOR M Paper conveying motor (PCM) is turned on at middle speed
CONV MOTOR L Paper conveying motor (PCM) is turned on at low speed
EJECT MOTOR H Eject motor (EJM) is turned on at high speed
EJECT MOTOR M Eject motor (EJM) is turned on at middle speed
EJECT MOTOR L Eject motor (EJM) is turned on at low speed
SUB PATH MOTOR H Relief path motor (RPM) is turned on counterclockwise
SUB PATH MOTOR M Relief path motor (RPM) is turned on clockwise
BUNDLE UP MOTOR Paper conveying belt motor 1 (PCBM1) is turned on
BUNDLE DOWN MOTOR Paper conveying belt motor 2 (PCBM2) is turned on
WIDTH TEST(A3) Side registration motor 1/2 (SRM1/2) are turned on
WIDTH TEST(LD) Side registration motor 1/2 (SRM1/2) are turned on
STAPLE FR MOTOR Staple moving motor 1 (STMM1) is turned on
STAPLE S MOTOR Staple moving motor 2 (STMM2) is turned on
STAPLE MOTOR Staple motor (STM) is turned on
TRAY MOTOR Main tray motor (MTM) is turned on
PUNCH MOTOR Punch motor (PUNM) is turned on
3. To stop operation, press the stop key.

1-3-62
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U240 Method: [FINISHER SOL]
1. Select the item to be operated.
2. Press the start key. The operation starts.
Display Solenoid
FEED IN SOL Paper entry solenoid (PESOL)
REAR DOWN SOL 1 Trailing edge holder solenoid 1 (TEHSOL1)
REAR DOWN SOL 2 Trailing edge holder solenoid 2 (TEHSOL2)
SUB PATH SOL Relief path solenoid (RPSOL)
SUB TRAY R SOL Feedshift solenoid 1 (FSSOL1)
SUB TRAY L SOL Feedshift solenoid 2 (FSSOL2)
BOOKLET SOL Centerfold feedshift solenoid (CFSSOL)
PADDLE SOL Paddle solenoid (PDSOL)
HOLD DOWN SOL Paper holder solenoid (PHSOL)
EJECT SOL Pressure switching solenoid (PSWSOL)
PUNCH SOL Punch pattern solenoid (PPSOL)

Method: [MAIL BOX]

1. Select the item to be operated.
2. Press the start key. The operation starts.
Display Motor
CARRY ROLL Mailbox drive motor (MBDM) is turned on at paper conveying
BRANCH ROLL Mailbox drive motor (MBDM) is turned on at feedshift operation

Method: [BOOKLET]
1. Select the item to be operated.
2. Press the start key. The operation starts.
Display Motor
CONV MOTOR Centerfold main motor (CMM)
BLADE MOTOR Blade motor (BLM)
BUNDLE UP MOTOR Centerfold paper conveying belt motor 1 (CPCBM1)
BUNDLE DOWN MOTOR Centerfold paper conveying belt motor 2 (CPCBM2)
WIDTH TEST(A3) Centerfold side registration motor 1/2 (CSRM1/2)
WIDTH TEST(LD) Centerfold side registration motor 1/2 (CSRM1/2)
STAPLE MOTOR Centerfold staple motor (CSTM)

Completion
Press the stop key with the operation stopped. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-63
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U241 Checking the operation of the switches of the finisher
Description
Displays the status of each switch of 3000-sheet document finisher.
Purpose
To check the operation of each switch of 3000-sheet document finisher.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be checked.
Display Description
FINISHER Checking the switch of the document finisher
MAIL BOX Checking the switch of the mailbox
BOOKLET Checking the switch of the center-folding unit

Method: [FINISHER]
1. Turn each switch or sensor on and off manually to check the status.
When the on-status of a switch or sensor is detected, that switch or sensor is displayed in reverse.
Display Switches and sensors
FRONT COVER SW Front cover switch (FCSW)
TOP COVER SW Top cover switch (TCSW)
RIGHT COVER SW Sub tray right switch (STRSW)
SET SW Joint switch (JSW)
BOOKLET SW Centerfold set switch (CSSW)
PUNCH TANK SW Punch waste box sensor (PWBS)
TRAY L-LIMIT SW Main tray lower limit detection sensor (MTLLDS)
TRAY U-LIMIT SW Main tray upper limit detection sensor (MTULDS)
TRAY MIDDLE SW Main tray middle position detection sensor (MTMPDS)
PAPER HOLD DOWN SW Paper holder home position sensor (PHHPS)
LOAD DET SW Main tray paper upper surface detection sensor 1,2 (MTPUSDS1,2)
HP SW Paper entry sensor (PES)
EJECT SW 1 Eject switch 1 (ESW1)
EJECT SW 2 Eject switch 2 (ESW2)
EJECT SW 3 Eject switch 3 (ESW3)
STAPLE HP SW 1 Staple home position switch 1 (STHPSW1)
STAPLE HP SW 2 Staple home position switch 2 (STHPSW2)
MIDDLE FEED SW1 Inner tray paper entry sensor 1 (ITPES1)
MIDDLE FEED SW2 Inner tray paper entry sensor 2 (ITPES2)
BUNDLE DET SW 1 Paper detection sensor 1 (PDS1)
BUNDLE DET SW 2 Paper detection sensor 2 (PDS2)
BUNDLE UP HP SW Paper conveying belt home position sensor 1 (PCBHPS1)
BUNDLE DOWN HP SW Paper conveying belt home position sensor 2 (PCBHPS2)
WIDTH HP SW 1 Side registration home position sensor 1 (SRHPS1)
WIDTH HP SW 2 Side registration home position sensor 2 (SRHPS2)

1-3-64
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U241 Method: [MAIL BOX]
1. Turn each switch or sensor on and off manually to check the status.
When the on-status of a switch or sensor is detected, that switch or sensor is displayed in reverse.
Display Switches and sensors
HP SW Mail paper entry switch (MPESW)
EJECT SW Tray eject sensor (TEJS)
COVER SW Mailbox cover open/close switch (MBCOSW)
OVER FLOW SW 1 Tray overflow switch 1 (TOFSW1)
OVER FLOW SW 2 Tray overflow switch 2 (TOFSW2)
OVER FLOW SW 3 Tray overflow switch 3 (TOFSW3)
OVER FLOW SW 4 Tray overflow switch 4 (TOFSW4)
OVER FLOW SW 5 Tray overflow switch 5 (TOFSW5)
OVER FLOW SW 6 Tray overflow switch 6 (TOFSW6)
OVER FLOW SW 7 Tray overflow switch 7 (TOFSW7)

Method: [BOOKLET]
1. Turn each switch or sensor on and off manually to check the status.
When the on-status of a switch or sensor is detected, that switch or sensor is displayed in reverse.
Display Switches and sensors
BUNDLE UP HP SW Centerfold paper conveying belt sensor 1 (CPCBS1)
BUNDLE DOWN HP SW Centerfold paper conveying belt sensor 2 (CPCBS2)
BLADE HP SW Blade home position sensor (BLHPS)
WIDTH HP SW U Centerfold side registration sensor 2 (CSRS2)
WIDTH HP SW L Centerfold side registration sensor 1 (CSRS1)
FEED IN SW Centerfold paper entry sensor (CPES)
PAPER DET SW Centerfold paper detection sensor (CPDS)
TRAY PAPER DET SW Tray paper detection sensor (TPDS)
EJECT SW Centerfold eject switch (CESW)
TRAY DET SW Centerfold top cover switch (CTCSW)

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-65
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U243 Checking the operation of the DP motors
Description
Turns the motors or solenoids in the DP on.
Purpose
To check the operation of the DP motors and solenoids.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be operated.
3. Press the start key. The operation starts.
Display Motor and solenoid Operation
DP FEED MOT Original feed motor (OFM) In operation
DP CON MOT Original conveying motor (OCM) In operation
DP REV MOT Original switchback motor (OSBM) In operation
DP LIFT MOT DP lift motor (DPLM) In operation
DP REV PRS SOL Switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL) On for 0.5 s
DP REV BRCH SOL Switchback feedshift solenoid (SBFSSOL) On for 0.5 s
CIS FAN* DP fan motor (DPFM) In operation
*: Dual scan DP only.
4. To turn each motor off, press the stop key.

Completion
Press the stop key when operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U244 Checking the DP switches
Description
Displays the status of the respective switches in the DP.
Purpose
To check if respective switches in the DP operate correctly.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Turn the respective switches on and off manually to check the status.
If the on-status of a switch is detected, the corresponding switch is displayed in reverse.
Display Description
FD SW Original feed switch (OFSW)
REG SW Original registration switch (ORSW)
TMG SW DP timing switch 1 (DPTSW1)
EJT SW Original eject switch (OESW)
TRY SW Switchback tray switch (SBTSW)
SET SW Original set switch (OSSW)
SZ SW A Original size length switch (OSLSW)
L F U SW Tray upper limit switch (TULSW)
L F L SW Tray lower limit switch (TLLSW)
COV OP SW DP interlock switch (DPILSW)
P OP SW DP open/close switch (DPOCSW)
CIS SW* DP timing switch 2 (DPTSW2)
*: Dual scan DP only.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-66
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U245 Checking messages
Description
Displays a list of messages on the touch panel of the operation panel.
Purpose
To check the messages to be displayed.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be displayed.
3. Displays the message one by one using cursor up/down keys. Switches the language on the touch
panel using the cursor +/- keys.
When a message number is entered with the numeric keys and then the start key is pressed, the mes-
sage corresponding the specified number is displayed.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U246 Setting the finisher
Description
Provides various settings for the 3000-sheet document finisher, if furnished.
Purpose
Adjustment of registration stop timing in punch mode
Adjust if skewed paper conveying occurs or if the copy paper is Z-folded in punch mode.
Adjustment of paper stop timing in the punch mode
To adjust this item when the position of a punch hole is different from the specified one.
Adjustment of front/rear side registration home position of Inner tray
Provides optimization when paper jam occurs due to an inferior fitting of the Inner tray adjuster guides to
paper.
Adjusting of front and back/slanted stapling home position
Adjusts the stapling position in the staple mode if the position is not proper.
Provides adjustment of slanted stapling.
Adjustment of upper/lower side registration home position of center-folding unit
Provides optimization when paper jam occurs due to an inferior fitting of the centerfold adjuster guides to paper.
Adjustment of booklet stapling position
Adjusts the booklet stapling position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.
Adjustment of center folding position
Adjusts the center folding position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set. The screen for setting each item is displayed.
Display Description
FINISHER 3000 Adjustment of the 3000-sheet document finisher
BOOKLET FOLDER Adjustment of the centerfold unit
FINISHER B’-IN Adjustment of the built-in finisher

Setting: [FINISHER 3000]

1. Select the item to set. The screen for setting each item is displayed.
Display Description
PUNCH REG ADJ Adjustment of registration stop timing in punch mode
PUNCH POSITION ADJ Adjustment of the paper stop timing in punch mode
WIDTH F HP ADJ Adjustment of front side registration home position
WIDTH R HP ADJ Adjustment of rear side registration home position
STAPLE HP ADJ Adjustment of front and back stapling home position
TURNED STAPLE HP ADJ Adjustment of slanted stapling home position

1-3-67
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U246 Setting: Adjustment of registration stop timing
1. Select [PUNCH REG ADJ].
2. Change the setting value using the cursor up/down keys.
Setting Initial Change in
Description
range setting value per step
Adjustment of registration stop timing -20 to 20 0 1 ms
If skewed paper conveying occurs (sample 1), increase the preset value. If the copy paper is Z-folded
(sample 2), decrease the preset value.

Sample 1 Sample 2

Figure 1-3-18
3. Press the start key. The value is set.

Setting: Adjustment of the paper stop timing

1. Select [PUNCH POSITION ADJ].
2. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys.
Setting Initial Change in
Description
range setting value per step
Adjustment of the paper stop timing -10 to 10 0 0.49 mm
If the distance of the position of a punch hole is smaller than the specified value A, increase the preset
value. If the distance is larger than the value A, decrease the preset value.

Preset value A: 5.5 +

- 2 mm (inch)
9.5 +
- 2 mm (metric)

Figure 1-3-19
3. Press the start key. The value is set.

Setting: Adjustment of front/rear side registration home position

1. Select [WIDTH F HP ADJ] or [WIDTH R HP ADJ].
2. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys.
Setting Initial Change in
Description
range setting value per step
Adjustment of front side registration home position -10 to 10 0 0.31 mm
Adjustment of rear side registration home position -10 to 10 0 0.31 mm
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
4. Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
5. Enter maintenance mode U240 and select [FINISHER MOTOR], then [WIDTH TEST (A3)].
The width guides of the Inner tray will move to A3-size position.
6. Pull the Inner tray, insert paper between the guides and check that paper is abut the guides.
7. Repeat the above adjustment until paper is properly in position.

1-3-68
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U246 Setting: Adjustment of front and back stapling home position
1. Select [STAPLE HP ADJ].
2. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys.
Setting Initial Change in
Description
range setting value per step
Adjustment of front and back stapling home position -10 to 10 0 0.32 mm
When staple positions are off toward the front side of the machine (sample 1), increase the preset value.
When staple positions are off toward the rear side of the machine (sample 2), decrease the preset value.

Sample 1 Sample 2

Figure 1-3-20
3. Press the start key. The value is set.

Setting: Adjustment of slanted stapling home position

1. Select [TURNED STAPLE HP ADJ].
2. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys.
Setting Initial Change in
Description
range setting value per step
Adjustment of slanted stapling home position -10 to 10 0 0.99°
To increase the angle for slanted stapling (sample 1), decrease the preset value. To decrease the angle
for slanted stapling (sample 2), increase the preset value.

Sample 1 Sample 2

Figure 1-3-21
3. Press the start key. The value is set.

1-3-69
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U246 Setting: [BOOKLET FOLDER]
1. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
WIDTH U HP ADJ Adjustment of upper side registration home position
WIDTH L HP ADJ Adjustment of lower side registration home position
STAPLE POS ADJ (A4R/LTR) Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A4/Letter size
STAPLE POS ADJ (B4R/LGR) Adjustment of booklet stapling position for B4/Legal size
STAPLE POS ADJ (A3/LD) Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A3/Ledger size
SADDLE POS ADJ (A4R/LTR) Adjustment of center folding position for A4/Letter size
SADDLE POS ADJ (B4R/LGR) Adjustment of center folding position for B4/Legal size
SADDLE POS ADJ (A3/LD) Adjustment of center folding position for A3/Ledger size

Setting: Adjustment of upper/lower side registration home position

1. Select [WIDTH U HP ADJ] or [WIDTH L HP ADJ].
2. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys.
Setting Initial Change in
Description
range setting value per step
Adjustment of upper side registration home position -20 to 20 0 0.104 mm
Adjustment of lower side registration home position -46 to 46 0 0.104 mm
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
4. Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
5. Enter maintenance mode U240 and select [BOOKLET], then [WIDTH TEST(A3)].
The width guides of the centerfold unit will move to A3-size position.
6. Pull the centerfold unit, insert paper between the guides and check that paper is abut the guides.
7. Repeat the above adjustment until paper is properly in position.

Setting: Adjustment of booklet stapling position

1. Select [STAPLE POS ADJ (A4R/LTR)], [STAPLE POS ADJ (B4R/LGR)] or [STAPLE POS ADJ (A3/LD)].
2. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys.
Setting Initial Change in
Description
range setting value per step
Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A4/Letter size -10 to 10 0 0.55 mm
Adjustment of booklet stapling position for B4/Legal size -10 to 10 0 0.55 mm
Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A3/Ledger size -10 to 10 0 0.55 mm
When staples are placed too far right (sample 1), decrease the preset value. When staples are placed
too far left (sample 2), increase the preset value.
Reference value: within ± 2 mm

2 mm 2 mm

Sample 1 Sample 2

Figure 1-3-22
3. Press the start key. The value is set.

1-3-70
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U246 Setting: Adjustment of center folding position
1. Select [SADDLE POS ADJ (A4R/LTR)], [SADDLE POS ADJ (B4R/LGR)] or [SADDLE POS ADJ (A3/LD)].
2. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys.
Setting Initial Change in
Description
range setting value per step
Adjustment of center folding position for A4/Letter size -10 to 10 0 0.55 mm
Adjustment of center folding position for B4/Legal size -10 to 10 0 0.55 mm
Adjustment of center folding position for A3/Ledger size -10 to 10 0 0.55 mm

When the centerfold position too far right (sample 1), increase the preset value. When the centerfold
position too far left (sample 2), decrease the setting value.
Reference value: within ± 3 mm

3 mm 3 mm

Center line Sample 1 Sample 2

Figure 1-3-23
3. Press the start key. The value is set.

Setting: [FINISHER B'-IN]

1. Select the desired cursor position.
2. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys.
Display Description Setting Initial
range setting
FRONT Front side registration cursor stop position -4 to +4 0
REAR Rear side registration cursor stop position -4 to +4 0
END Trailing edge registration cursor stop position -4 to +4 0
3. Press the start key. The value is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-71
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U247 Setting the paper feed device
Description
Turns on motors and clutches of 3000-sheet paper feeder or paper feeder.
Purpose
To check the operation of motors and clutches of paper feed device.

Method
1. Press the start key. The value varies depending to the option furnished.
2. Select the item to be operated.
3. Press the start key. The operation starts.

3000-sheet paper feeder.

Display Motor and clutches Operation
LCF FEED PF conveying motor (PFCM) In operation
CLUTCH B PF conveying clutch (PFCCL) On for 1 s
CLUTCH P1 PF paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) On for 1 s
CLUTCH P2 PF paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2) On for 1 s

Paper feeder
Display Motor and clutches Operation
DESK FEED PF drive motor (PFDM) In operation
CLUTCH FEED PF feed clutch (PFFCL) On for 1 s
CLUTCH U PF paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) On for 1 s
CLUTCH L PF paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2) On for 1 s
4. To turn each motor off, press the stop key.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-72
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U250 Setting the maintenance cycle
Description
Changes preset values for maintenance cycle and automatic grayscale adjustment.
Purpose
Provides changing the time when the message to acknowledge to conduct maintenance and automatic gray-
scale adjustment is periodically displayed.

Setting
1. Press the start key. The current pre-set value is displayed.
Display Description Setting range
Maintenance Count A Preset values for maintenance cycle 0 to 9999999
COUNT GRAY Preset values for automatic grayscale 0 to 99900*
ADJUST*100 adjustment
*: The setting can be changed by 100 per step.

Clearing
1. Select the item to be cleared. To clear all items, select [ALL CLEAR].
2. Press the clear key.
3. Press the start key. The setting value is cleared.

Setting
1. Select the item to be changed.
2. Enter the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys.
3. Press the start key. The setting value is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance count
Description
Displays and clears or changes the maintenance count and automatic grayscale adjustment count.
Purpose
To verify the maintenance counter count and automatic grayscale count. Also to clear the count during main-
tenance service.

Method
Press the start key. The maintenance count is displayed.
Display Description Setting range
Maintenance Count A Count value for maintenance cycle 0 to 9999999
COUNT GRAY ADJUST Automatic grayscale adjustment count 0 to 9999999

Clearing
1. Select the item to be cleared. To clear all items, select [ALL CLEAR].
2. Press the clear key.
3. Press the start key. The count is cleared.

Setting
1. Select the item to be changed.
2. Enter the count using the numeric keys.
3. Press the start key. The count is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-73
2KR/2KS-2

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U252 Setting the destination
Description
Switches the operations and screens of the machine according to the destination.
Purpose
To be executed after initializing the backup RAM, in order to return the setting to the value before replacement
or initialization.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the destination.
Display Description
EUROPE METRIC Metric (Europe) specifications
INCH Inch (North America) specifications
ASIA PACIFIC Metric (Asia Pacific) specifications
AUSTRALIA Australia specifications
CHINA China specifications
KOREA Korea specifications
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
4. Turn the main power switch off and on.

Supplement
The specified initial settings are provided according to the destinations in the maintenance items below. To
change the initial settings in those items, be sure to run maintenance item U021 after changing the destina-
tion.

Initial setting according to the destinations

Mainte- Europe/Asia
Title Inch spec.
nance No. Pacific spec.
208 Setting the paper size for the paper feeder Letter A4

1-3-74
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U253 Switching between double and single counts
Description
Switches the count system for the total counter and other counters.
Purpose
Used to select, according to the preference of the user (copy service provider), if A3/Ledger paper is to be
counted as one sheet (single count) or two sheets (double count).

Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the count system.
Display Description
ALL SINGLE Single count for all size paper
DOUBLE COUNT(A3/LEDGER) Double count for A3/Ledger size or larger
DOUBLE COUNT(B4) Double count for B4 size or larger
DOUBLE COUNT(FOLIO/LEGAL) Double count for FOLIO/Legal size or larger

Initial setting: DOUBLE COUNT(A3/LEDGER)

3. Press the start key. The setting is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U260 Selecting the timing for copy counting
Description
Changes the copy count timing for the total counter and other counters.
Purpose
To be set according to user (copy service provider) request.
If a paper jam occurs frequently in the optional document finisher when the number of copies is counted at the
time of paper ejection, copies are provided without copy counts. The copy service provider cannot charge for
such copying. To prevent this, the copy timing should be made earlier.
If a paper jam occurs frequently in the paper conveying or fuser sections when the number of copies is
counted before the paper reaches those sections, copying is charged without a copy being made. To prevent
this, the copy timing should be made later.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the copy count timing.
Display Description
FEED When secondary paper feed starts
EJECT When the paper is ejected
Initial setting: EJECT
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-75
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U265 Setting OEM purchaser code
Description
Sets the OEM purchaser code.
Purpose
Sets the code when replacing the main PWB and the like.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Change the preset value using the numeric keys.
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
4. Turn the main power switch off and on.

U278 Setting the delivery date

Description
Enter delivery date in month, day, and year.
Purpose
To operate when installing the machine. Perform this to confirm the delivery date.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select [TODAY].
3. Press the start key. The delivery date is set.

Clearing
1. Select [CLEAR].
2. Press the start key. The delivery date is cleared.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U285 Setting service status page
Description
Determines displaying the digital dot coverage report on reporting.
Purpose
According to user request, changes the setting.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Press [COVERAGE].
Highlighted: ON, Non-highlighted: OFF
Initial setting: ON
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-76
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication
Description
Sets whether to display the cleaning guidance when detecting the black line.
Purpose
Displays the cleaning guidance in order to make the call for service with the black line decrease by the rubbish
on the contact glass when scanning from the DP.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to set. The screen for setting each item is displayed.
Display Description
BLACK LINE MODE Black line cleaning guidance ON/OFF setting
BLACK LINE COUNT Setting counts of the cleaning guidance indication

Setting: [BLACK LINE MODE]

1. Select ON or OFF.
Display Description
ON Displays the cleaning guidance
OFF Not to display the cleaning guidance
Initial setting: ON
Setting count value is displayed only if the setting is ON.
2. Press the start key. The setting is set.

Setting: [BLACK LINE COUNT]

1. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
COUNT *1000 Setting counts of the cleaning guidance 0 to 255 8
indication ( x 1000 sheets)
When setting is 0, the black line cleaning indication is displayed only if the black line is detected.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-77
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U328 Side ejection setting
Description
Sets whether to eject to the side of the machine when an optional curl eliminator is installed.
Purpose
Set according to the preference of the user.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select [ON] or [OFF].
Display Description
ON To eject to the side of the machine
OFF Not to eject to the side of the machine
Initial setting: OFF
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
4. Turn the main power switch off and on.

U332 Setting the size conversion factor

Description
Sets the coefficient of nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size. The coefficient set here is used to
convert the black ratio in relation to the A4/Letter size and to display the result in user simulation.
Purpose
To set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
Calculation Rate Size parameter 0.1 to 3.0 1.0
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-78
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U341 Specific paper feed location setting for printing function
Description
Sets a paper feed location specified for printer output.
Purpose
To use a paper feed location only for printer output.
A paper feed location specified for printer output cannot be used for copy output.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the paper feed location for the printer.
Two or more cassette can be selected.
Display Description
CASSETTE 1 Cassette 1
CASSETTE 2 Cassette 2
CASSETTE 3 Cassette 3 (optional paper feeder)
CASSETTE 4 Cassette 4 (optional paper feeder)
LCF Optional 3000-sheet paper feeder
When an optional paper feed device is not installed, the corresponding count is not displayed.
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U342 Setting the ejection restriction
Description
Sets or cancels the restriction on the number of sheets to be ejected continuously when the internal eject tray
is selected as the eject location.
Purpose
According to user request, sets or cancels restriction on the number of sheets.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select [ON] or [OFF].
Display Description
ON Sets restriction on the number of sheets
OFF Cancels restriction on the number of sheets
Initial setting: ON

Details of restriction (number of sheets to be ejected continuously after the start key is pressed)
Condition Number of sheets
When no optional ejection device is installed 250 sheets
When the job separator is installed 150 sheets
When the finisher is installed 100 sheets
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-79
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U343 Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode
Description
Switches the initial setting between duplex and simplex copy.
Purpose
To be set according to frequency of use: set to the more frequently used mode.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select ON or OFF.
Display Description
ON Duplex copy
OFF Simplex copy
Initial setting: OFF
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication
Description
Sets when to display a message notifying that the time for maintenance is about to be reached, by setting the
number of copies that can be made before the current maintenance cycle ends.
When the difference between the number of copies of the maintenance cycle and that of the maintenance
count reaches the set value, the message is displayed.
Purpose
To change the time for maintenance due indication.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Change the setting using the +/- or numeric keys.
Display Description Setting range
COUNT Time for maintenance due indication 0 to 9999
(Remaining number of copies that can be made before the
current maintenance cycle ends)
3. Press the start key. The value is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-80
 2KR/2KS-1

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U402 Adjusting margins of image printing
Description
Adjusts margins for image printing.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect.

Adjustment
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be adjusted.
Setting Initial Change in
Display Description
range setting value per step
LEAD Printer leading edge margin 0 to 10.0 4.0 0.1 mm
A Printer left margin 0 to 10.0 3.0 0.1 mm
C Printer right margin 0 to 10.0 3.0 0.1 mm
TRAIL Printer trailing edge margin 0 to 10.0 3.9 0.1 mm
TRAIL(DUP) Printer trailing edge margin 0 to 10.0 4.0 0.1 mm
(second side)
TRAIL(MPT) Printer trailing edge margin 0 to 10.0 4.0 0.1 mm
(MP tray)
3. Press the system menu key.
4. Press the start key to output a test pattern.
5. Press the system menu key.
6. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys.
Increasing the value makes the margin wider, and decreasing it makes the margin narrower.

Printer leading edge margin

(3.0 ± 2.5 mm)

Printer Printer
left margin right margin
(2.0 +2.0/-1.5mm) (2.0 +2.0/-1.5 mm)

Printer trailing edge margin

(3.0 ± 2.5 mm)

Figure 1-3-24

7. Press the start key. The value is set.

Caution
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following adjustments in
maintenance mode.

U402 U403 U404

(P.1-3-82) (P.1-3-83)

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-81
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the platen
Description
Adjusts margins for scanning the original on the contact glass.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect.

Adjustment
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be adjusted.
Setting Initial Change in
Display Description
range setting value per step
A MARGIN Scanner left margin 0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5 mm
B MARGIN Scanner leading edge margin 0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5 mm
C MARGIN Scanner right margin 0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5 mm
D MARGIN Scanner trailing edge margin 0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5 mm
3. Press the system menu key.
4. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy.
5. Press the system menu key.
6. Change the setting value using the +/- keys.
Increasing the value makes the margin wider, and decreasing it makes the margin narrower.

Scanner leading edge margin

(3.0 ± 2.5 mm)

Scanner Scanner
left margin right margin
(2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm) (2.5 +1.5/-2.0 mm)

Scanner trailing edge margin

(3.0 ± 2.0 mm)

Figure 1-3-25

7. Press the start key. The value is set.

Caution
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the following adjustments in
maintenance mode.

U403 U404
(P.1-3-83)

Completion
Press the stop key. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.

1-3-82
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP
Description
Adjusts margins for scanning the original from the DP.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect when the DP is used.

Caution
Before making this adjustment, ensure that the following adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.

U402 U403 U404

(P.1-3-81) (P.1-3-82)

Adjustment
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be adjusted.
Setting Initial Change in
Display Description
range setting value per step
A MARGIN Left margin 0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5 mm
B MARGIN Leading edge margin 0 to 10.0 2.5 0.5 mm
C MARGIN Right margin 0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5 mm
D MARGIN Trailing edge margin 0 to 10.0 4.0 0.5 mm
A MARGIN Left margin (second side) 0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5 mm
(BACK)*
B MARGIN Leading edge margin (second side) 0 to 10.0 2.5 0.5 mm
(BACK)*
C MARGIN Right margin (second side) 0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5 mm
(BACK)*
D MARGIN Trailing edge margin (second side) 0 to 10.0 4.0 0.5 mm
(BACK)*

*: Dual scan DP only.

3. Press the system menu key.
4. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy.
5. Press the system menu key.
6. Change the setting value using the +/- keys.
Increasing the value makes the margin wider, and decreasing it makes the margin narrower.

Leading edge margin

(3.0 ± 1.5 mm)

Left margin Right margin

(2.0 ± 1.0 mm) (2.0 ± 1.0 mm)

Trailing edge margin

(2.0 ± 1.0 mm)

Figure 1-3-26
7. Press the start key. The value is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-83
2KR/2KS-1

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U407 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing
Description
Adjusts the leading edge registration during memory copying.
Purpose
Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edge of the copy image on the
front face and that on the reverse face during duplex switchback copying.

Caution
Before making this adjustment, ensure that the following adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.

U034 U402 U066 U403 U071

(P.1-3-22) (P.1-3-81) (P.1-3-29) (P.1-3-82) (P.1-3-34)

U404 U407
(P.1-3-83)

Adjustment
1. Press the start key.
Setting Initial Change in
Display Description
range setting value per step
ADJUST DATA Leading edge registration for memory -47 to 47 0 0.1 mm
image printing
2. Press the system menu key.
3. Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy.
4. Press the system menu key.
5. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys.
For copy example 1, decrease the value.
For copy example 2, increase the value.

Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2

Figure 1-3-27

6. Press the start key. The value is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-84
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U410 Adjusting the halftone automatically
Description
Carries out processing for the data acquisition that is required in order to perform automatic adjustment of the
halftone.
Purpose
Performed when the quality of reproduced halftones has dropped.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select [EXECUTE].
3. Press the start key. A test pattern is outputted.
4. Place the output test pattern as the original.
Align the corner inside the circle with the left inside corner of the original marker.

Test pattern

Figure 1-3-28

5. Place approximately 20 sheets of white paper on the test pattern and set them.
6. Press the start key. Adjustment is made.
7. When normally completed, [ALL COMP.] is displayed.
If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, error code is displayed.

Error codes
Codes Description
S01 Patch not detected
S02 Original deviation in the main scanning direction
S03 Original deviation in the auxiliary scanning direction
S04 Original inclination error
If [S**] appears, check the original. If [C**] appears, execute again maintenance item U410.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-85
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U411 Adjusting the scanner automatically
Description
Uses a specified original and automatically adjusts the following items in the scanner and the DP scanning
sections.
Purpose
To perform automatic adjustment of various items in the scanner and the DP scanning sections.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item. The screen for executing is displayed.
Display Description Original to be used for
adjustment (P/N)
SCANNER Automatic adjustment in the scanner section 302FZ56990
DP(FACE UP) Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning 302AC68243
section (first page)
DP(FACE DOWN)* Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning 302AC68243/303JX57010/
section (second page) 303JX57020
*: Dual scan DP only.

Method: [SCANNER]
1. Enter the target values which are shown on the specified original (P/N: 302FZ56990) executing mainte-
nance item U425.
2. Set a specified original (P/N: 302FZ56990) on the platen.
3. Select the item.
Display Description
ALL Automatic adjustment using the platen for: original size magnification/
leading edge timing/center line, input gamma, chromatic aberration filter,
MTF filter and matrix.
INPUT Automatic adjustment using the platen for: original size magnification/
leading edge timing/center line.
C.A. Automatic adjustment using the platen for: chromatic aberration filter.
MTF Automatic adjustment using the platen for: MTF filter.
GAMMA Automatic adjustment using the platen for: input gamma.
MATRIX Automatic adjustment using the platen for: matrix.
4. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.
When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [Complete] is displayed. If a problem occurs dur-
ing auto adjustment, [ERROR XX] (XX is replaced by an error code) is displayed and operation stops.
Should this happen, determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the
beginning, or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance items.

1-3-86
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U411 Method: [DP(FACE UP)]
1. Measure the leading edge, main scanning, and auxiliary scanning of the specified original (P/N:
302AC68243) and enter the values by executing maintenance item U425.
2. Set a specified original (P/N: 302AC68243) in the DP. Cut the trailing edge of the original.

5 mm
F

149 ± 1 mm

R 74 ± 1 mm

Figure 1-3-29

3. Press [INPUT].
Display Description
INPUT Automatic adjustment of first page using the DP for: original size mag-
nification/leading edge timing/center line.
4. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.
When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [Complete] is displayed. If a problem occurs during
auto adjustment, [ERROR XX] (XX is replaced by an error code) is displayed and operation stops.
Should this happen, determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the begin-
ning, or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance items.

Method: [DP(FACE DOWN)]

1. Select [ORIGINAL TARGET] and press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
Display Description
NORMAL TARGET Execution is not required.
ORIGINAL TARGET Uses the specified original for acquiring data as the target data.
2. Place the specified original for acquiring gamma target data (P/N: 303JX57010) on the platen, and press
the start key.
3. Place the specified original for acquiring matrix target data (P/N: 303JX57020) on the platen, and press
the start key.
When normally completed, [Complete] is displayed.
4. Select the item (place all originals face down).
Display Description Original to be used for
adjustment (P/N)
ALL Automatic adjustment of second page using the 302AC68243/303JX57010/
DP for: original size magnification/leading edge 303JX57020
timing/center line, input gamma, chromatic
aberration filter, MTF filter and matrix.
INPUT Automatic adjustment of second page using the 302AC68243
DP for: original size magnification/leading edge
timing/center line.
MTF/GAMMA Automatic adjustment of second page using the 303JX57010
DP for: MTF filter and input gamma.
MATRIX Automatic adjustment of second page using the 303JX57020
DP for: matrix.

1-3-87
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U411 [INPUT]
1. Select [INPUT].
2. Place a specified original (P/N: 302AC68243).
3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.

[MTF/GAMMA]
1. Select [MTF/GAMMA].
2. Place a specified original (P/N: 303JX57010).
3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.

[MATRIX]
1. Select [MATRIX].
2. Place a specified original (P/N: 303JX57020).
3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts.

When [ALL] is selected, the adjustment of [INPUT], [MTF/GAMMA] and [MATRIX] can be executed at once.
When adjusting, place the three specified originals, and then press the start key.
Set the original 303JX57020, and then place 303JX57010 and 302AC68243 in order on the top of the origi-
nal.

When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [COMPLETE] is displayed. If a problem occurs dur-
ing auto adjustment, [ERROR XX] (XX is replaced by an error code) is displayed and operation stops.
Should this happen, determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the begin-
ning, or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance items.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed.

1-3-88
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U411 Error Codes
Codes Description
ERROR 01 Black band detection error (scanner leading edge registration)
ERROR 02 Black band detection error (scanner center line)
ERROR 03 Black band detection error (scanner main scanning direction magnification)
ERROR 04 Black band is not detected (scanner leading edge registration)
ERROR 05 Black band is not detected (scanner center line)
ERROR 06 Black band is not detected (scanner main scanning direction magnification)
ERROR 07 Black band is not detected (scanner auxiliary scanning direction magnification)
ERROR 08 Black band is not detected (DP main scanning direction magnification far end)
ERROR 09 Black band is not detected (DP main scanning direction magnification near end)
ERROR 0a Black band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction magnification leading edge)
ERROR 0b Black band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction magnification leading edge
original check)
ERROR 0c Black band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge)
ERROR 0d Black band is not detected (DP auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge 2)
ERROR 0e DMA time out
ERROR 0f Auxiliary scanning direction magnification error
ERROR 10 Auxiliary scanning direction leading edge detection error
ERROR 11 Auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge detection error
ERROR 12 Auxiliary scanning direction skew 1.5 error
ERROR 13 Maintenance request error
ERROR 14 Main scanning direction center line error
ERROR 15 Main scanning direction skew 1.5 error
ERROR 16 Main scanning direction magnification error
ERROR 17 Service call error
ERROR 18 DP JAM error
ERROR 19 PWB error
ERROR 1a Original error

1-3-89
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U425 Setting the target
Description
Enters the lab values that is indicated on the back of the chart (P/N: 302FZ56990) used for adjustment. Also
enters the measurement value of the chart (P/N: 302AC68243) used for adjustment.
Purpose
Performs data input in order to correct for differences in originals during automatic adjustment.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
CCD Entering the target values of the chart (P/N: 302FZ56990) used for
adjustment
DP Entering the measurement value of the chart (P/N: 302AC68243)
used for adjustment
CIS Execution is not required

Setting: [CCD]
1. Select the item to be set.
Display Description
N875 Setting the N875 patch for the original for adjustment
N475 Setting the N475 patch for the original for adjustment
N125 Setting the N125 patch for the original for adjustment
CYAN Setting the cyan patch for the original for adjustment
MAGENTA Setting the magenta patch for the original for adjustment
YELLOW Setting the yellow patch for the original for adjustment
RED Setting the red patch for the original for adjustment
GREEN Setting the green patch for the original for adjustment
BLUE Setting the blue patch for the original for adjustment
ADJUST ORIGINAL Setting the main and auxiliary scanning directions

2. Select the item to be set.

Display Description Setting range
L Setting the L value 0.0 to 100.0
A Setting the A value -200.0 to 200.0
B Setting the B value -200.0 to 200.0
3. Enters the value that is indicated on the back of the chart using the +/- or numeric keys.
4. Press the start key. The value is set.

1-3-90
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U425 Setting: [ADJUST ORIGINAL]
1. Measure the distance from the left edge to the black belt (a) of the original at A, B and C.
Measurement procedure
1) Measure the distance from the edge to the black belt (a) of the original at A (35 mm from the leading
edge), B (110 mm from the leading edge) and C (185 mm from the leading edge), respectively.
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((A + C) / 2 + B) / 2
2. Enter the values solved using the +/- keys in [MAIN ADJ].
3. Press the start key. The value is set.
4. Measure the distance from the leading edge to the black belt (b) of the original at D, E and F.
Measurement procedure
1) Measure the length from the edge to the black belt (b) of the original at D (30 mm from the left edge),
E (148.5 mm from the left edge) and F (267 mm from the left edge), respectively.
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((D + F) / 2 + E) / 2
5. Enter the values solved using the +/- keys in [SUB LEAD ADJ].
6. Press the start key. The value is set.
7. Measure the length (G) from the leading edge of the black belt (b) to the bottom of the N475 patch of the
original.
8. Enter the measured value using the +/- keys in [SUB TAIL ADJ].
9. Press the start key. The value is set.
10. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop key.

Left edge
30 mm 148.5 mm 267 mm
Leading
edge D E F

Black
35 mm belt (b)
A
Black
belt (a)

110 mm [MAIN ADJ] =

B
((A + C) / 2 + B) / 2

[SUB LEAD ADJ] =

((D + F) / 2 + E) / 2

[SUB TAIL ADJ] = G

185 mm
C

Original for adjustment (P/N: 302FZ56990)

Figure 1-3-30

1-3-91
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U425 Setting: [DP]
1. Measure the distance from the leading edge to the black belt (inside) of the original at A.
2. Enter the measured value using the +/- keys in [LEAD].
3. Measure the distance from the left edge to the black belt (inside) of the original at B.
4. Enter the measured value using the +/- keys in [MAIN SCAN].
5. Measure the distance from the black belt of leading edge (inside) to the black belt of trailing edge
(inside) of the original at C.
6. Enter the measured value using the +/- keys in [SUB SCAN].
7. Press the start key. The value is set.

Original for adjustment (P/N: 302AC68243)

Figure 1-3-31

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-92
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U470 Setting the JPEG compression ratio
Description
Sets the compression ratio for JPEG images in each image quality mode.
Purpose
To change the setting in accordance with the image that the user is copying. For example, in order to soften
the coarseness of the image when making copies at over 200% magnification, change the level of compres-
sion by raising the value. Lowering the value will increase the compression and thereby lower the image qual-
ity; Raising the value will increase image quality but lower the image processing speed.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be set. The setting screen for the selected item is displayed.
Display Description
System Compression ratio for temporary storage in system
Copy Compression ratio for copying
Send Compression ratio for sending

Setting: [System]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
Y Brightness 1 to 100 90
C Color differential 1 to 100 90
3. Press the start key. The value is set.

Setting: [Copy]
1. Select the item to be set.
2. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
Text Y Brightness in the text mode 1 to 100 90
Text C Color differential in the text mode 1 to 100 90
Photo Y Brightness in the photo mode 1 to 100 90
Photo C Color differential in the photo mode 1 to 100 90
3. Press the start key. The value is set.

Setting: [Send]
1. Select [Text], [Photo] or [HC-PDF].
2. Select the item to be set.
3. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys.
Display Description Setting Initial
range setting
Text Y (1) to (5) Brightness in the text mode 1 to 100 30/40/51/70/90
Text C (1) to (5) Color differential in the text mode 1 to 100 30/40/51/70/90
Photo Y (1) to (5) Brightness in the photo mode 1 to 100 30/40/51/70/90
Photo C (1) to (5) Color differential in the photo mode 1 to 100 30/40/51/70/90
HC-PDF Y (1) to (3) Brightness of high compression PDF 1 to 100 15/25/60
HC-PDF C (1) to (3) Color differential of high compression PDF 1 to 100 15/25/60
4. Press the start key. The value is set.

1-3-93
2KR/2KS-4

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U470 Supplement
While this maintenance item is being executed, copying from an original is available in interrupt copying mode
(which is activated by pressing the system menu key).

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

U473 Adjusting laser power output

Description
Adjusts the laser output power
Purpose
Performed when the quality of dots, lines or low density has dropped.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select [Set Density (EmitTime/Dot).
3. Select the item.
Display Description
0 (100%) LSU laser output (100%)
1 (90%) LSU laser output (90%)
2 (80%) LSU laser output (80%)
3 (70%) LSU laser output (70%)
Initial setting: 0
4. Press the start key. The setting is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U485 Setting the image processing mode
Description
Adjusts the sensitivity of scanning a confidential document.
Changes how to apply rotation to a PDF document.

Purpose
To change the detection level when the confidential document guard is not printed well for detection in scan-
ning. Also, changes the process of how PDF images are rotated.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
Conf. Doc. Detection Confidential document guard detection level
PDF Rotate Processing the rotation of PDF images

Setting: [Conf. Doc. Detection]

1. Change the setting value using +/- or numeric keys.
Display Description Setting range Initial setting
Conf. Doc. Confidential document guard detection 1 to 5 1
Detection level
A smaller value raises the detection sensitivity but increases the possibility of false detection.
A larger value lowers the detection sensitivity but decreases the possibility of false detection.
2. Press the start key. The value is set.

1-3-94
 2KR/2KS-4

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U485 Setting: [PDF Rotate]
1. Change the setting value using +/- or numeric keys.
Display Description
0 Applies rotation to the internal parameter
1 Applies rotation to the 'actual image' itself
Initial setting: 0
2. Press the start key. The value is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U510 Setting the enterprise mode
Description
Sets whether or not the application function is enabled.
Purpose
According to user request, changes the setting.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select [MODE1].
3. Select the item.
Display Description
ON Application function is enabled
OFF Application function is disabled
INSTALL Executing the install
UNINSTALL Executing the uninstall
4. Press the start key. The setting is set.

Method: [INSTALL]
1. Insert the USB memory that contains the application into the USB memory slot on the machine.
2. Turn the main power switch on.
3. Enter the maintenance item.
4. Press the start key.
5. Select [INSTALL].
6. Press the start key. Installation of application is started.
7. When normally completed, [Complete] is displayed.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-95
2KR/2KS-1

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U901 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper feed locations
Description
Displays or clears copy counts by paper feed locations.
Purpose
To check the time to replace consumable parts. Also to clear the counts after replacing the consumable parts.

Method
1. Press the start key. The counts by paper feed locations are displayed.
Display Description
MP TRAY MP tray
CASETTE 1 Cassette 1
CASETTE 2 Cassette 2
CASETTE 3 Cassette 3 (optional paper feeder)
CASETTE 4 Cassette 4 (optional paper feeder)
DUPLEX Duplex unit
LCF Optional 3000-sheet paper feeder
When an optional paper feed device is not installed, the corresponding count is not displayed.

Clearing
1. Select the counts to be cleared. CASETTE 3, CASETTE 4 and LCF cannot be cleared.
2. Select the counts for all and press [ALL CLEAR].
3. Press the start key. The counts is cleared.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U902 Checking/clearing the punch-hole scrap counter
Description
Sets the punch limit and displays and clears the punch-hole scrap count when 3000-sheet document finisher
is installed.
Purpose
Sets the punch limit to notify the user of the time to collect punch-hole scrap. Also, used to manually clear the
punch-hole scrap count if a message requiring collection of punch-hole scrap is shown on the touch panel
after collection. If punch-hole scrap is collected with the machine power turned off, the punch-hole scrap count
is not cleared and consequently this problem occurs.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
3. Change the value using the numeric keys.
Display Description Setting range
PUNCH LIMIT (*1000) Punch limit (maximum number of punching times) 0 to 9999000
PUNCH WASTE Punch-hole scrap count (current number of punch- 0 to 9999999
COUNT ing times)
The punch limit can be set in increments of 1000.
4. Press the start key. The value is set.

Clearing
1. Enter 0 using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The count is cleared.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-96
 2KR/2KS-1

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U903 Checking/clearing the paper jam counts
Description
Displays or clears the jam counts by jam locations.
Purpose
To check the paper jam status. Also to clear the jam counts after replacing consumable parts.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Display Description
Count Displays/clears the jam counts
Total Count Displays the total jam counts

Method: [Count]
1. Select [Count]. The count of jam code by type is displayed.
Codes for which the count value is 0 are not displayed.
2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Select the counts for all jam codes and press [ALL CLEAR].
The individual counter cannot be cleared.
4. Press the start key. The count is cleared.

Method: [Total Count]

1. Select [Total Count]. The total number of jam code by type is displayed.
2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys.
The total number of jam count cannot be cleared.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U904 Checking/clearing the service call counts
Description
Displays or clears the service call code counts by types.
Purpose
To check the service call code status by types. Also to clear the service call code counts after replacing con-
sumable parts.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Display Description
Count Displays/clears the call for service counts
Total Count Displays the total call for service counts

Method: [Count]
1. Select [Count]. The count for service call detection by type is displayed.
Codes for which the count value is 0 are not displayed.
2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Select the counts for all service call codes and press [ALL CLEAR].
The individual counter cannot be cleared.
4. Press the start key. The count is cleared.

Method: [Total Count]

1. Select [Total Count]. The total number of service call counts by type is displayed.
2. Change the screen using the cursor up/down keys.
The total number of service call count cannot be cleared.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-97
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U905 Checking/clearing counts by optional devices
Description
Displays the counts of DP or finisher.
Purpose
To check the use of DP and finisher.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the device, the count of which is to be checked.
3. Press the start key. The count of the selected device is displayed.
Display Description
DP Counts of optional DP
FINISHER Counts of optional document finisher, built-in finisher or 3000-sheet
document finisher

DP
Display Description
ADP No. of single-sided originals that has passed through the DP
RADP No. of double-sided originals that has passed through the DP
CONCURRENT No. of dual scan originals that has passed through the DP

Document finisher/Built-in finisher

Display Description
CP CNT No. of copies that has passed
STAPLE Frequency the stapler has been activated

3000-sheet document finisher

Display Description
CP CNT No. of copies that has passed
STAPLE Frequency the stapler has been activated
PUNCH Frequency the punch has been activated
STACK Frequency the stacker has been activated
SADDLE Frequency the center holding has been activated

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U906 Resetting partial operation control
Description
Resets the service call code for partial operation control.
Purpose
To be reset after partial operation is performed due to problems in the cassettes or other sections, and the
related parts are serviced.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Press [Execute].
3. Press the start key to reset partial operation control.
4. Turn the main power switch off and on.

1-3-98
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U908 Checking the total counter value
Description
Displays the total counter value.
Purpose
To check the total counter value.

Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for total count value is displayed.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U910 Clearing the black ratio data
Description
Clears the accumulated black ratio data for A4 sheet.
Purpose
To clear data as required at times such as during maintenance service.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Select [EXCUTE].
3. Press the start key. The accumulated black ratio data is cleared.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U911 Checking copy counts by paper sizes
Description
Displays the paper feed counts by paper sizes.
Purpose
To check the counts after replacing consumable parts.

Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for the paper feed counts by paper size is displayed.

Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-99
2KR/2KS-1

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U917 Setting backup data reading/writing
Description
Retrieves the backup data to a USB memory from the machine; or writes the data from the USB memory to
the machine.
Purpose
To store and write data when replacing the HDD.

Method
1. Press the power key on the operation panel, and after verifying the main power indicator has gone off,
switch off the main power switch.
2. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot.
3. Turn the main power switch on.
4. Enter the maintenance item.
5. Press the start key.
6. Select [Export] or [Import].
Display Description
Export Retrieving from the machine to a USB memory
Import Writing data from the USB memory to the machine

7. Select the item.

Display Description Depending data*1
Address Book Address book -
Job Accnt. Job accounting -
FAX Forward FAX transfer information Job accounting, user management and docu-
ment box information
One Touch Information on one-touch Address book
User User managements Job accounting
Shortcut Shortcut information Job accountings, user managements and docu-
ment box information
Document Box Document box information Job accountings and user managements
Program Program information Job accountings, user managements and docu-
ment box information
ADDRESS BOOK Address book and Infor- Address book and Information on one-touch
ONE TOUCH*2 mation on one-touch
*1: Since data are dependent with each other, data other than those assigned are also retrieved or
written in.
*2: When ADDRESS BOOK ONE TOUCH is selected, editing with the Set up tool is not possible,
however, Import/Export in high speed mode is possible.
8. Press the start key. Starts reading or writing.
The progress of selected item is displayed in %.
When an error occurs, the operation is canceled and an error code is displayed (see page 1-3-101).
9. When normally completed, [Finished] is displayed.
10. Turn the main power switch off and on after completing writing when selecting [Import].

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-100
 2KR/2KS-1

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U917 Error Codes
Codes Description Codes Description
321e0001 Parameter error 321e002f Box open error
321e0002 File write error 321e0030 Box close error
321e0003 File initialization error 321e0031 Box creation error
321e0004 File error 321e0032 Box creation error
321e0005 Processing error 321e0033 Box deletion error
321e0006 Address book clear error (contact) 321e0034 Box movement error
321e0007 Address book open error (contact) 321e0035 Fax memory directory creation error
321e0008 Address book list error (contact) 321e0036 Fax memory error in writing
321e0009 Address book list error (contact) 321e0037 Fax memory error in reading
321e000a Address book clear error (group) 321e0038 Shortcut error in writing
321e000b Address book open error (group) 321e0039 Shortcut error in reading
321e000c Address book list error (group) 321e003a Program error in writing
321e000d Address book list error (group) 321e003b Program error in reading
321e000e One-touch open error 321e003c Address/One Touch directory creation error
321e000f One-touch list error 321e003d Address/One Touch error in writing
321e0010 One-touch list error 321e003e Address/One Touch error in reading
321e0011 Job accounting clear error 321e003f File reading error
321e0012 Job accounting file open error 321e0040 File writing error
321e0013 Job accounting file open error 321e0041 Data mismatch
321e0014 Job accounting error in writing 321e0042 Log file open error
321e0015 Job accounting list error 321e0043 Log file error in writing
321e0016 Job accounting list error 321e0044 Directory open error
321e0017 User managements backup error 321e0045 Directory error in reading
321e0018 User managements clear error 321d0000 Unspecified error
321e0019 User managements file open error 321d0001 HDD unavailable
321e001a User managements file open error 321d0002 USB memory is not inserted
321e001b User managements file open error 321d0003 File for writing is not found in the USB
321e001c User managements error in writing 321d0004 File for reading is not found in the HDD
321e001d User managements list error 321d0005 USB error in writing
321e001e User managements list error 321d0006 USB error in reading
321e001f User managements list error 321d0007 USB unmount error
321e0020 User managements list error 321d0008 File rename error
321e0021 User managements file open error 321d0009 File open error
321e0022 User managements error 321d000a File close error
321e0023 User managements error 321d000b File reading error
321e0024 User managements file open error 321d000c File writing error
321e0025 User managements error 321d000d File copy error
321e0026 User managements file open error 321d000e File compressed error
321e0027 User managements error 321d000f File decompressed error
321e0028 Box file open error 321d0010 Directory open error
321e0029 Box error in writing 321d0011 Directory creation error
321e002a Box error in reading 321d0012 File writing error
321e002b Box list error 321d0013 File reading error
321e002c Box list error 321d0014 File deletion error
321e002d Box error 321d0015 Log file copy error to the USB
321e002e Box error

1-3-101
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U920 Checking the copy counts
Description
Checks the copy counts.
Purpose
To check the copy counts.

Method
1. Press the start key. The current counts are displayed.
Display Description
Copy Count Count value of copy
Printer Count Count value of printer
Fax Count Count value of fax

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U927 Clearing the all copy counts and machine life counts (one time only)
Description
Resets all of the counts back to zero.
Supplement
The total account counter and the machine life counter can be cleared only once if all count values are 1000
or less.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Press [EXECUTE].
3. Press the start key. All copy counts and machine life counts are cleared.
[CAN NOT EXECUTE] is displayed if the count cannot be cleared.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U928 Checking machine life counts
Description
Displays the machine life counts.
Purpose
To check the machine life counts.

Method
1. Press the start key. The current machine life counts is displayed.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-102
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U931 Setting the automatic toner install
Description
Sets automatic toner installation on or off when power is turned on.
Purpose
Changed to off when deactivating automatic toner installation.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select ON or OFF.
Display Description
ON Automatic toner install function ON
OFF Automatic toner install function OFF
Initial setting: OFF
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
4. The machine automatically returns to the same status as when the power is turned on.

U935 Relay board maintenance

Description
Sets the mode when call for service (C0060) occurs.
Purpose
Sets the machine status temporarily when call for service (C0060) occurs. However, after the setting, call for
service (C0060) occurs again when progress of period.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item.
Display Description
MODE0 Setting mode: OFF
MODE1 Setting mode: ON (Usable up to three times of use)
Initial setting: MODE0
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.
4. Turn the main power switch off and on.

Supplement
After removing the cause of the problem, be sure to change the setting in OFF.

1-3-103
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U942 Setting of deflection for feeding from DP
Description
Adjusts the deflection generated when the DP is used.
Purpose
Use this mode if an original non-feed jam, oblique feed or wrinkling of original occurs when the DP is used.

Setting
1. Press the start key.
2. Select the item to be adjusted.
Display Description Setting Initial Change in
REGIST TOP Deflection of single-sided original -31 to 31 0 0.18 mm
REGIST BACK Deflection of double-sided original -31 to 31 0 0.18 mm
REGIST MIX Deflection of dual scanning -31 to 31 0 0.18 mm
3. Press the system menu key.
4. Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy.
5. Press the system menu key.
6. Change the setting value using the +/- or numeric keys.
The greater the value, the larger the deflection; the smaller the value, the smaller the deflection.
If an original non-feed jam or oblique feed occurs, increase the setting value. If wrinkling of original
occurs, decrease the value.
7. Press the start key. The setting is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U964 Checking of log
Description
Sends a log file saved on the HDD to a USB memory.
Purpose
To transfer a log file saved on the HDD to a USB memory as a means of investigating malfunctions.

Method
1. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot.
2. Turn the main power switch on.
3. Enter the maintenance item.
4. Press the start key.
5. Select [Execute].
6. Press the start key.
Starts sending the log file saved on the HDD to the USB memory.
7. When normally completed, [Finished] is displayed.
When an error occurs, an error code is displayed.
8. Turn the main power switch off and on.

Error codes
Display Description
No Usb Storage USB memory is not inserted
No File File is not found
Mount Error USB memory mount error
File Delete Error File deletion error
Copy Error File copy error
Unmount Error USB memory unmount error
Other Error Other error

1-3-104
 2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U969 Checking of toner area code
Description
Displays the toner area code.
Purpose
To check the toner area code.

Method
1. Press the start key. The toner area code is displayed.

Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U977 Data capture mode
Description
Store the print data sent to the machine into USB memory.
Purpose
In case to occur the error at printing, check the print data sent to the machine.

Method
1. Insert USB memory in USB memory slot.
2. Turn the main power switch on.
3. Enter the maintenance item.
4. Press the start key.
5. Select [Execute].
6. Press the start key.
7. Send the print data to the machine.
Once the print data is stored into USB memory, [Complete] will be displayed.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U984 Checking the developing unit number
Description
Displays the developing unit number.
Purpose
To check the developing unit number.

Method
1. Press the start key. The number is displayed.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U985 Displaying the developing unit history
Description
Displays the past record of machine number and the developing counter.
Purpose
To check the count value machine number and the developing counter.

Method
1. Press the start key. Past record of 5 cases is displayed.
Display Description
MACHINE No. Historical records of the machine number
HISTORY1 to 5
DEVELOP COUNT Historical records of developing counter
HISTORY1 to 5

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.

1-3-105
2KR/2KS

Maintenance
Description
item No.
U989 HDD scandisk
Description
Restores data in the hard disk by scanning the disk.
Purpose
If power is turned off while accessing to the hard disk is performed, the control information in the hard disk
drive may be damaged. Use this mode to restore the data.

Method
1. Press the start key.
2. Press [EXECUTE].
3. Press the start key. When scanning of the disk is complete, the execution result is displayed.
4. Turn the main power switch off and on.

U990 Checking/clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light

Description
Displays, clears or changes the accumulated time for the CIS to light.
Purpose
To check duration of use of the CIS. Also to clear the accumulated time for the CIS after replacement.

Method
1. Press the start key.
The accumulated time of illumination for the CIS is displayed in minutes.
2. Clear the accumulated time using the +/- or numeric keys.
3. Press the start key. The time is set.

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U991 Checking the scanner count
Description
Displays the scanner operation count.
Purpose
To check the status of use of the scanner.

Method
1. Press the start key.
Display Description
COPY SCAN COUNT Scanner operation count for copying
FAX SCAN COUNT Scanner operation count for fax
OTHER SCAN COUNT Scanner operation count except for copying

Completion
Press the stop key. The screen for selecting a maintenance No. item is displayed.

1-3-106
 2KR/2KS

1-3-2 Management mode

In addition to a maintenance function for service, the machine is equipped with a management function which can be oper-
ated by users (mainly by the administrator). In this management mode, settings such as default settings can be changed.

(1) Using the management mode

Start

Press the System Menu key.

Press [Common Settings]. Execute Common Settings (page 1-3-108).

Press [Copy]. Execute Copy Settings (page 1-3-111).

Press [Send]. Execute Sending Settings (page 1-3-111).

Press [Document Box/Removable Execute Document Box Settings

Memory]. (page 1-3-111).

Press [Printer]. Execute Printer Settings (page 1-3-112).

Press [Report]. Execute Printing Reports/Sending Notice

(page 1-3-112).

Press [Adjustment/Maintenance]. Execute Adjustment/Maintenance

(page 1-3-113).

Press [Date/Timer]. Execute Date/Timer (page 1-3-113).

Press [Edit Destination]. Execute Editing Destination (page 1-3-114).

Press [Internet]. Execute Internet Browser Setup

(page 1-3-115).

Press [Application]. Execute Applications (page 1-3-116).

Press [System]. Execute System Settings (page 1-3-116).

Press [User Login/Job Accounting]. Execute User Login Administration

(page 1-3-118).

Execute Job Accounting (page 1-3-119).

End

1-3-107
2KR/2KS

(2) Common Settings Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose
Tray
1. Press [Next] of Original/Paper Settings, [Next] of
Switching the Language for Display [Language]
MP Tray Setting and then [Change] of Paper Size.
1. Press [Change] of Language.
2. To detect paper size automatically, press [Auto] and
2. Press the key for the language you want to use.
select Metric or Inch for Paper Size. To select paper
3. Press [OK].
size, press [Standard Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2],
The touch panel language will be changed.
[Others] or [Size Entry] for Paper Size.
If you select [Size Entry], press [+], [-] to enter X
(horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions.
Default Screen
Press [# keys] to enter the paper size using the
1. Press [Change] of Default Screen.
numeric keys.
2. Select the screen to be displayed as the default
3. Press [OK]. The previous screen reappears.
screen.
4. Press [Change] of Media Type to select the media
3. Press [OK].
type and press [OK].

Sound
Paper Weight
1. Press [Next] of Sound and then [Next] of Buzzer.
1. Press [Next] of Original/Paper Settings and then
2. Press [Change] of Volume, Key Confirmation, Job
[Next] of Media Type Setting.
Finish, Ready, or Warning.
2. Press [Next] for the media type whose weight you
3. Select the buzzer volume level, or other sound
want to change.
options.
3. Press [Change] of Paper Weight.
4. Select the weight and press [OK].
5. Press [Close]. The previous screen reappears.
Original/Paper Settings
6. To change the duplex printing settings for Custom 1
1. Press [Next] of Original/Paper Settings and then
(-8), press [Next] of Custom 1(-8) and then
[Next] of Custom Original Size.
[Change] of Duplex. Select [Prohibit] or [Permit]
2. Press [Change] of any one of Custom 1 to Custom
and press [OK]. The previous screen reappears.
4, on which you wish to register the size.
7. Press [Close].
3. Press [On], and then press [+], [-] or numeric keys
8. To change the name for Custom 1(-8), press [Next]
to enter X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions.
of Custom 1(-8) and then [Change] of Name. Enter
4. Press [OK].
the name and press [OK].

Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to

Default Paper Source
Print
1. Press [Next] of Original/Paper Settings and then
1. Press [Next] of Original/Paper Settings and then
[Change] of Default Paper Source.
[Next] of Custom Paper Size.
2. Select a paper cassette for the default setting.
2. Press [Change] of any one of Custom 1 to Custom
3. Press [OK].
4, on which you want to register the size.
3. Press [On], and then press [+], [-] or numeric keys
to enter X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions.
Automatic Detection of Originals (Available for met-
Press [Media Type] to select the type of paper and
ric models only)
press [OK] if necessary.
1. Press [Next] of Original/Paper Settings and then
4. Press [OK].
[Change] of Original Auto Detect.
2. Select [A6] or [Hagaki] of A6/Hagaki. Select [Off] to
disable automatic detection or [On] to enable auto-
Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Cassettes
matic detection of Folio and 11x15" respectively.
1. Press [Next] of Original/Paper Settings, [Next] of
3. Press [OK].
Cassette Setting, [Next] of Cassette 1 to Cassette
4, on which you want to register the size, and then
[Change] of Paper Size.
Media for Auto Selection
2. To detect paper size automatically, press [Auto] and
1. Press [Next] of Original/Paper Settings and then
select Metric or Inch for Paper Size. To select paper
[Change] of Media for Auto (B & W).
size, press [Standard Sizes 1] or [Standard Sizes 2]
2. Select [All Media Types] or any media type for
for Paper Size.
paper selection.
3. Press [OK]. The previous screen reappears.
3. Press [OK].
4. Press [Change] of Media Type to select media type
and press [OK].

1-3-108
 2KR/2KS

Paper Source for Cover Paper Continuous Scan

1. Press [Next] of Original/Paper Settings, cursor 1. Press cursor down key, [Next] of Function Defaults
down key and then [Change] of Paper Source for and then [Change] of Continuous Scan.
Cover. 2. Select [Off] or [On] for the default. Use the proce-
2. Select the paper source to load cover paper. dure below to select the default quality setting for
3. Press [OK]. originals.
3. Press [OK].

Special Paper Action

1. Press [Next] of Original/Paper Settings, cursor Original Image
down key and then [Change] of Special Paper 1. Press cursor down key, [Next] of Function Defaults
Action. and then [Change] of Original Image.
2. Select [Adjust Print Direction] or [Speed Priority]. 2. Select the [Text+Photo], [Photo], [Text], [for OCR]
3. Press [OK]. or [Printed Document] as the default.
3. Press [OK].

Switching Unit of Measurement

1. Press [Change] of Measurement. Scan Resolution
2. Select [mm] for metric or [inch] for inch. 1. Press cursor down key, [Next] of Function Defaults
3. Press [OK]. and then [Change] of Scan Resolution.
2. Select the default resolution.
3. Press [OK].
Error Handling
1. Press [Next] of Error Handling.
2. Press [Change] at the error you wish to change the Color Selection (Copy)
handling. 1. Press cursor down key, [Next] of Function Defaults
3. Select the error handling method in the selection and then [Change] of mode Color Selection(Copy).
screen for each of the errors and then press [OK]. 2. Select the default color setting.
4. The previous screen appears. To set the handling 3. Press [OK].
for a different error, repeat steps 2 and 3.

Color Selection (Send/Store)

Paper Output 1. Press cursor down key, [Next] of Function Defaults
1. Press [Next] of Paper Output. and then [Change] of mode Color Sel. (Send/
2. Press [Change] of Copy/Custom Box, Printer, FAX Store).
Port 1 or FAX Port 2. 2. Select the default color mode.
3. Select Output Tray. 3. Press [OK].
For [Finisher Tray], [Tray B], [Tray C] or [Tray 1] to
[Tray 7], select [Face Up] (print surface up) or [Face
Down] (print surface down) as the paper orientation File Format
at output. 1. Press cursor down key, [Next] of Function Defaults
4. Press [OK]. and then [Change] of File Format.
2. Select the default file format.
3. Press [OK].
Orientation Confirmation
1. Press [Change] of Orientation Confirmation.
2. Select the default for [Off] or [On]. File Separation
3. Press [OK]. 1. Press cursor down key, [Next] of Function Defaults
and then [Change] of File Separation.
2. Select the default for [Off] or [Each Page].
Function Defaults 3. Press [OK].
1. Press cursor down key, [Next] of Function Defaults
and then [Change] of Original Orientation.
2. Select [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left] for the Density
default. 1. Press cursor down key, [Next] of Function Defaults,
3. Press [OK]. cursor down key and then [Change] of Density.
2. Select the default density.
3. Press [OK].

1-3-109
2KR/2KS

Zoom Auto Image Rotation

1. Press cursor down key, [Next] of Function Defaults, 1. Press cursor down key, [Next] of Function Defaults,
cursor down key and then [Change] of Zoom. cursor down key and then [Change] of Auto Image
2. Select the default zoom setting. Rotation.
3. Press [OK]. 2. Select the default for [Off] or [On].
3. Press [OK].

File Name Entry

1. Press cursor down key, [Next] of Function Defaults, EcoPrint
cursor down key and then [Change] of File Name 1. Press cursor down key, [Next] of Function Defaults,
Entry. cursor down key twice, and then [Change] of Eco-
2. Press [File Name] to enter the file name in not more Print.
than 32 characters. 2. Select [Off] or [On] for the default.
3. Press [OK]. 3. Press [OK].
4. Press [Date and Time] to add the date/time to the
job, or press [Job No.] to add the job number to the
job. The added information will be displayed in PDF/TIFF/JPEG Image
Additional Info. 1. Press cursor down key and [Next] of Function
5. Press [OK]. Defaults. Press cursor down key twice and then
[Change] of PDF/TIFF/JPEG Image.
2. Select the default image quality from [1] (Low Qual-
E-mail Subject/Body ity) to [5] (High Quality).
1. Press cursor down key, [Next] of Function Defaults, 3. Press [OK].
cursor down key, and then [Change] of E-mail Sub-
ject/Body.
2. Press [Subject] to enter an E-mail subject not more High Comp. PDF Image
than 60 characters. 1. Press cursor down key and [Next] of Function
3. Press [OK]. Defaults. Press cursor down key twice and
4. Press [Body] to enter an E-mail Body not more than [Change] of High Comp. PDF Image.
500 characters. 2. Select the default for [Compression Ratio Priority],
5. Press [OK]. [Standard], or [Quality Priority].
6. Check that the entries are correct and press [OK]. 3. Press [OK].

Border Erase Default Color TIFF Compression Settings

1. Press cursor down key, [Next] of Function Defaults, 1. Press cursor down key and [Next] of Function
cursor down key and then [Change] of Border Defaults. Press cursor down key twice and then
Erase Default. [Change] of Color TIFF Compression.
2. Press [+] or [-] for the Border and Gutter width to 2. Select [TIFF V6] or [TTN2].
erase. 3. Press [OK].
You can use the number keypad to enter the num-
ber directly.
3. Press [OK]. Repeat Copying
1. Press cursor down key and [Next] of Function
Defaults. Press cursor down key twice and
Border Erase to Back Page [Change] of Repeat Copy.
1. Press cursor down key, [Next] of Function Defaults, 2. Select the default for [Off] or [On].
cursor down key and then [Change] of Border 3. Press [OK].
Erase to Back Page.
2. Press [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not Erase].
3. Press [OK]. Collate/Offset
1. Press cursor down key, [Next] of Function Defaults,
cursor down key twice and then [Change] of Col-
Margin Default late/Offset.
1. Press cursor down key, [Next] of Function Defaults, 2. Select the defaults for Collate and Offset respec-
cursor down key and then [Change] of Margin tively.
Default. 3. Press [OK].
2. Use the [+] or [-] to enter the margin widths for Left/
Right and Top/Bottom(-0.75 - +0.75).
You can use the number keypad to enter the num-
ber directly.
3. Press [OK].

1-3-110
 2KR/2KS

JPEG/TIFF Print (4) Sending Settings

1. Press cursor down key, [Next] of Function Defaults,
cursor down key twice and then [Change] of JPEG/
Quick Setup Registration
TIFF Print.
1. Press [Next] of Quick Setup Registration.
2. Select the default for [Fit to Paper Size], [Image
2. Press [Change] of the function to be registered in
Resolution], or [Fit to Print Resolution].
Quick Setup.
3. Press [OK].
3. Select a key (1-6) allocated on the Quick Setup
Registration screen. Press [Off] to delete a key
from the Quick Setup.
XPS Fit to Page
4. Press [OK]. If you overwrite the setting, a confirma-
1. Press cursor down key, [Next] of Function Defaults,
tion screen appears. Press [Yes].
cursor down key twice and then [Change] of XPS
Fit to Page.
2. Select [Off] or [On] for the default.
Destination Check before Send
3. Press [OK].
1. Press [Change] of Dest. Check before Send.
2. Select [Off] or [On].
3. Press [OK].

Color Type
(3) Copy Settings
1. Press [Change] of Color Type.
2. Select [RGB] or [sRGB].
Paper Selection 3. Press [OK].
1. Press [Change] of Paper Selection.
2. Press [Auto] or [Default Paper Source].
3. Press [OK]. Entry Check for New Destination
1. Press [Change] of Entry Check for New Dest.
2. Select [Off] or [On].
Auto Paper Selection 3. Press [OK].
1. Press [Change] of Auto Paper Selection.
2. Press [Most Suitable Size] or [Same as Original
Size]. Setting the Default Send Screen
3. Press [OK]. 1. Press [Change] of Default Screen.
2. Press [Destination] or [Address Book].
3. Press [OK].
Auto % Priority
1. Press [Change] of Auto % Priority.
2. Select the default for [Off] or [On].
3. Press [OK].

(5) Document Box Settings

Reserve Next Priority
1. Press [Change] of Reserve Next Priority.
Quick Setup Registration
2. Select the default for [Off] or [On].
1. Press [Next] of Quick Setup Registration.
3. Press [OK].
2. Press [Next] of Store File or Send.
3. Press [Change] of the function to be registered in
Quick Setup.
Preset Limit
4. Select a key (1-6) allocated on the Quick Setup
1. Press [Change] of Preset Limit.
screen. Press [Off] to delete a key from the Quick
2. Press [+] or [-] or use the numeric keys to enter the
Setup.
limit for the number of copies.
5. Press [OK]. If you overwrite the setting, a confirma-
3. Press [OK].
tion screen appears. Press [Yes].

Quick Setup Registration

1. Press [Next] of Quick Setup Registration.
2. Press [Change] of the function to be registered in
Quick Setup.
3. Select a key (1-6) allocated on the Quick Setup
Registration screen. Press [Off] to delete a key
from the Quick Setup.
4. Press [OK]. If you overwrite the setting, a confirma-
tion screen appears. Press [Yes].

1-3-111
2KR/2KS

(6) Printer Settings LF Action

1. Press cursor down key and [Change] of LF Action.
2. Press [LF Only], [LF and CR] or [Ignore LF].
Emulation
3. Press [OK].
1. Press [Change] of Emulation.
2. Select the desired emulation.
3. Press [OK].
CR Action
1. Press cursor down key and [Change] of CR Action.
2. Press [CR Only], [LF and CR] or [Ignore CR].
Setting of Alternative Emulation
3. Press [OK].
1. Press [Change] of Emulation, [KPDL(Auto)] and
then [Alt Emulation].
2. Select the desired alternative emulation and then
Paper Feed Mode
press [OK].
1. Press cursor down key and [Change] of Paper
3. Press [OK].
Feed Mode.
2. Press [Auto] or [Fixed].
3. Press [OK].
Setting of KPDL error report
1. Press [Change] of Emulation, [KPDL] or
[KPDL(Auto)] and then [KPDL Error Report].
2. Press [On] or [Off] and then press [OK].
3. Press [OK].
(7) Printing Reports/Sending Notice
EcoPrint
1. Press [Change] of EcoPrint. Printing Reports
2. Press [Off] or [On]. 1. Press [Next] of Print Report.
3. Press [OK]. 2. Press [Print] for the report you want to print. Print-
ing starts.
A confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes].
Override A4/Letter
1. Press [Change] of Override A4/Letter.
2. Press [Off] or [On]. Send Result Report
3. Press [OK]. 1. Press [Next] of Result Report Setting, [Next] of
Send Result Report and then [Change] of E-mail/
Folder.
Duplex 2. Press [Off], [On], or [Error Only].
1. Press [Change] of Duplex. 3. Press [OK].
2. Press [1-sided], [2-sided Bind LongEdge], or [2-
sided Bind ShortEdge].
3. Press [OK].

Copies
1. Press [Change] of Copies.
2. Press [+],[-] or the numeric keys to set the default
number of copies.
3. Press [OK].

Orientation
1. Press [Change] of Orientation.
2. Press [Portrait] or [Landscape].
3. Press [OK].

Form Feed Timeout

1. Press cursor down key and [Change] of Form Feed
Timeout.
2. Press [+] or [-] to set the Form Feed Timeout.
You can set the timeout delay in seconds.
You cannot use the number keypad to enter this
value.
3. Press [OK].

1-3-112
 2KR/2KS

(8) Adjustment/Maintenance Gray Adjustment

1. Press cursor down key and then [Next] of Gray

Copy Density Adjustment
Adjustment.
1. Press [Next] of Copy Density Adjustment.
2. Press [Execute]. A color pattern is printed.
2. Press [Change] of Auto or of Manual.
3. As shown in the illustration, place the printed side
3. Press [-3] - [+3] (Lighter-Darker) to adjust density.
down on the platen with the three black boxes
4. Press [OK].
aligned to the top.

Send/Box Density Adjust

1. Press and [Next] of Send/Box Density Adjust.
2. Press [Change] of Auto or of Manual.
3. Press [-3] - [+3] (Lighter-Darker) to adjust density.
4. Press [OK].

Print Density
1. Press [Change] of Print Density.
2. Press [1] - [5] (Lighter-Darker) to adjust density.
3. Press [OK].

4. Press [Execute]. The color pattern is read and

Drum Refresh
adjustment begins.
1. Press [Next] of Drum Refresh.
5. Press [OK] in the adjustment end confirmation
2. Press [Execute] to Drum Refresh.
screen.
3. After Drum Refresh is completed, press [OK] to
return to the Adjustment/Maintenance screen.
System Initialization
1. Press [Execute] of System Initialization.
Correcting Fine Black Lines
2. If user login administration is disabled, the user
1. Press [Change] of Correcting Black Line.
authentication screen appears. Enter your login
2. Press [Off], [On(Low)] or [On(High)].
user name and password and then press [Login].
3. Press [OK].
3. When the confirmation screen appears, press[Yes].
Initialization starts.
4. Once the initialization ends, the message Task is
Display Brightness
completed. Turn the main power switch off and on.
1. Press [Change] of Display Brightness.
appears. Turn the main power switch off.
2. Press [1] - [4] (Darker- Lighter) to adjust brightness.
3. Press [OK].

Silent Mode
1. Press [Change] of Silent Mode.
(9) Date/Timer
2. Press [Off] or [On].
3. Press [OK].
Date/Time
1. Press [Change] of Date/Time.
Charger Auto Cleaning 2. Press [+] or [-] to enter the date and time respec-
1. Press [Change] of Silent Mode. tively.
2. Press [Off] or [On]. 3. Press [OK].
3. Press [OK].

Date Format
Auto Color Correction 1. Press [Change] of Date Format.
1. Press cursor down key and [Change] of Auto Color 2. Select [MM/DD/YYYY], [DD/MM/YYYY], or [YYYY/
Correction. MM/DD] and press [OK].
2. Press one of keys [1] to [5] (Color - B & W) to set
the detection level.
3. Press [OK].

1-3-113
2KR/2KS

Time Zone (10) Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One

1. Press [Change] of Time Zone. Touch Keys)
2. Select the location.
3. Press [Off] or [On] of Summer Time and press [OK].
Adding a Contact
1. Press [Register/Edit] of Address Book, [Add], [Con-
tact] and then [Next].
Auto Panel Reset
2. To specify the address number, press [Change] in
1. Press [Change] of Auto Panel Reset.
Address Number.
2. Press [Off] or [On].
3. Press [+],[-] or numeric keys to enter a particular
3. Press [OK].
Address Number (1-2500).
To have the number assigned automatically, enter
"0000".
Panel Reset Timer
4. Press [OK]. The screen shown in step 2 reappears.
1. Press [Change] of Panel Reset Timer.
5. Press [Change] of Name.
2. Press [+] or [-] to enter the time until Auto Panel
6. Enter the destination name (up to 32 characters) to
Reset is turned on.
be displayed on the Address Book and press [OK].
You cannot use the number keypad to enter this
The screen shown in step 2 reappears.
value.
7. Press [E-mail] to add an e-mail address, [SMB] to
3. Press [OK].
add a folder on the computer, or [FTP] to add an
FTP folder.
The procedure differs depending on the transmis-
Sleep Timer
sion method selected.
1. Press [Change] of Sleep Timer.
E-mail Address
2. Press [+], [-] or the numeric keys to enter the time
1. Press [Change] of E-mail Address, enter the E-
until Auto Sleep is turned on.
mail address and press [OK].
3. Press [OK].
The table below explains the items to be
entered.
The Folder (FTP) Address
Auto Error Clear ON/OFF
1. Press [Change] of Host Name, Path, Login User
1. Press [Change] of Auto Error Clear.
Name and Login Password, enter the informa-
2. Press [Off] or [On].
tion for each item and press [OK].
3. Press [OK].
The Folder (SMB) Address
1. Press [Change] of Host Name, Path, Login User
Name and Login Password, enter the informa-
Error Clear Timer
tion for each item and press [OK].
1. Press cursor down key and then [Change] of Error
8. Check if the destination entry is correct and press
Clear Timer.
[Register]. The destination is added to the Address
2. Press [+] or [-] to enter the time until printing
Book.
restarts.
You cannot use the number keypad to enter this
value.
Adding a Group
3. Press [OK].
1. Press [Register/Edit] of Address Book, [Add],
[Group] and then [Next].
2. To specify the address number, press [Change] in
Interrupt Clear Timer
Address Number.
1. Press cursor down key and then [Change] of Inter-
3. Use [+], [-] or the numeric keys to enter an address
rupt Clear Timer.
number (1 to 2500).
2. Press [+] or [-] to enter the time for the interrupt
To have the number assigned automatically, set
clear timer.
"0000".
3. Press [OK].
4. Press [OK]. The Add Group screen reappears.
5. Press [Change] of Name.
6. Enter the group name displayed on the Address
Book not more than 32 characters.
7. Press [Member].
8. Press [Add].
9. Select a destination (contacts) to add to the group.
10. Press [OK].
If you have more destinations to add, repeat Steps
8 to 10.
11. Check if the selected destination was added to the
group and press [Register]. Now the group is added
to the Address Book.

1-3-114
 2KR/2KS

Editing a Destination Deleting the Registered Information

1. Press [Register/Edit] of Address Book. 1. Press [Delete].
2. Select a destination or group to edit. 2. Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the deletion
3. Press [Detail]. of the data registered in the One Touch Key.
The procedure differs depending on the details to
be edited.
Editing an Individual Destination Sort Settings
1. Change Address Number, Name and destination 1. Press [Next] of Address Book Defaults and then
type and address. [Change] of Sort.
2. After you have completed the changes, press 2. Select [No.] or [Name].
[Register]. 3. Press [OK].
3. Press [Yes] in the change confirmation screen to
register the changed destination.
Editing a Group Narrow Down Settings
1. Change Address Number and Name. 1. Press [Next] of Address Book Defaults and then
2. Press [Member]. [Change] of Narrow Down.
3. To delete any destination from the group, select 2. Select the type of destination filter.
the destination and press [Delete]. 3. Press [OK].
Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the dele-
tion.
4. After you have completed the changes, press
[Register].
5. Press [Yes] in the change confirmation screen to (11) Internet Browser Setup
register the changed group.
Deleting an Individual Destination or Group Internet Browser Setting
1. Press [Delete]. Press [Yes] on the screen to con- 1. Press [Change] of Internet Browser.
firm the deletion. Deletion is performed. 2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press [OK].

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key

1. Press [Register/Edit] of One touch Key. Browser Preferences
2. Select a One Touch Key number (0001 to 1000) for 1. Press [Next] of Browser Environment.
the destination. Pressing Quick No. Search key or 2. To set your home page, press [Change] of Home
[No.] enables direct entry of a One Touch Key num- Page, press [URL], enter the URL and then press
ber. [OK]. Press [OK] again.
Select a One Touch Key with no registered destina- 3. To set the text size, press [Change] of Text Size,
tion. select [Large], [Medium] or [Small] as the text size
3. Press [Register/Edit]. The address book appears. and then press [OK].
4. Select a destination (individual or group) to add to 4. To set the display mode, press [Change] of Display
the One Touch Key number. Pressing [Detail] Mode, select [Normal], [Just-Fit Rendering] or
shows the detailed information of the selected des- [Smart-Fit Rendering] as the display mode and then
tination. press [OK].
5. Press [OK]. The destination will be added to the 5. To specify the settings for accepting cookies, press
One Touch Key. [Change] of Cookie, select [Accept All], [Reject All]
or [Prompt before Accepting] as your cookie accep-
tance policy and then press [OK].
Editing One Touch Key
1. Press [Register/Edit] of One Touch Key.
2. Select a One Touch Key number (0001 to 1000) for
Proxy Settings
the destination. Pressing Quick No. Search key or
1. Press [Change] of Proxy and then press [On].
[No.] enables direct entry of a One Touch Key num-
To set a proxy server (HTTP)
ber.
1. Press [Keyboard] of Proxy Server (HTTP), enter
The procedure differs depending on the details to
the proxy address and press [OK].
be edited.
2. Press [# Keys] and enter the port number.
Changing the Registered Information
To set a proxy server (HTTPS)
1. Press [Register/Edit].
1. Press [Keyboard] of Proxy Server (HTTPS),
2. Select a new destination (individual or group).
enter the proxy address and press [OK].
Pressing [Detail] shows the detailed information
2. Press [# Keys] and enter the port number.
of the selected destination.
To set domains for which no proxy is used
3. Press [OK].
1. Press [Keyboard] of Do Not Use Proxy for Fol-
4. Press [Yes] on the screen to add the destination
lowing Domains, enter the domain name and
to the One Touch Key.
press [OK].
2. Press [OK].

1-3-115
2KR/2KS

(12) Applications (13) System Settings

Installing Applications Restarting the System

1. Insert the USB memory containing the application 1. Press [Execute] of Restart.
to be installed into the USB memory slot (A1). 2. When the confirmation screen appears, press
2. Press [Add]. [Yes]. The system is restarted.
3. Select the application to be installed and press
[Install].
You can view detailed information on the selected Network Setup
application by pressing [Detail].
4. When the confirmation screen appears, press TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup
[Yes]. 1. Press [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP
Installation of the application begins. Depending on Setting.
the application being installed, the installation may 2. Press [Change] of TCP/IP.
take some time. Once the installation ends, the 3. Press [On] and then press [OK].
original screen reappears. 4. Press [Change] of IPv4.
5. To install another application, repeat steps 3 to 4. 5. Press [DHCP].
6. To remove the USB memory, press [Remove Mem- 6. Press [Off] of DHCP and then press [OK].
ory] and wait until the Removable Memory can be 7. Press [Bonjour].
safely removed message appears. Then remove 8. Press [Off] of Bonjour and then press [OK].
the USB memory. 9. Press [IP Address] and enter the address using the
numeric keys.
10. Press [Subnet Mask] and enter the address using
Activating/Deactivating Application Use the numeric keys.
1. Select the desired application and press [Activate]. 11. Press [Default Gateway] and enter the address
You can view detailed information on the selected using the numeric keys.
application by pressing [Detail]. 12. Check if all the address entries are correct and
2. Enter the license key and press [Official]. Some press [OK].
applications do not require you to enter an license 13. After changing the setting, restart the system or
key. If the license key entry screen does not turn the machine OFF and then ON again.
appear, go to Step 3.
To use the application as a trial, press [Trial] without
entering the license key. TCP/IP (IPv6) Setup
3. When the confirmation screen appears, press 1. Press [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP
[Yes]. Setting.
2. Press [Change] of TCP/IP.
3. Press [On] and then press [OK].
Deleting Applications 4. Press [Next] of IPv6.
1. Select the application to be deleted and press 5. Press [Change] of IPv6.
[Delete]. 6. Press [On].
You can view detailed information on the selected 7. Press [OK].
application by pressing [Detail]. 8. After changing the setting, restart the system or
2. When the deletion confirmation screen appears, turn the machine OFF and then ON again.
press [Yes]. The application is deleted.

Manual Setting (IPv6)

1. Press [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP
Setting.
2. Press [Next] of IPv6.
3. Press [Next] of Manual Setting.
4. Press [IP Address (Manual)] to enter IP address.
5. Press [OK].
Press [# Keys] of Prefix Length (0 - 128) to enter
the prefix length using the numeric keys.
6. Press [Default Gateway] to enter the default gate-
way.
7. Check that all the entries are correct and Press
[OK].
8. After changing the setting, restart the system or
turn the machine OFF and then ON again.

1-3-116
 2KR/2KS

RA (Stateless) Settings SSL Setup

1. Press [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP 1. Press [Next] of Network, [Next] of Secure Protocol,
Setting. and then [Next] of SSL.
2. Press [Next] of IPv6. 2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press [Change] of RA(Stateless). 3. Press [OK].
4. Press [On] or [Off] of RA (Stateless). 4. After changing the setting, restart the system or
5. Press [OK]. turn the machine OFF and then ON again.
6. After changing the setting, restart the system or
turn the machine OFF and then ON again.
IPP Security Setup
1. Press [Next] of Network, [Next] of Secure Protocol,
DHCP (IPv6) Settings and then [Change] of IPP Security.
1. Press [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP 2. Press [IPP over SSL Only] or [IPP or IPP over
Setting. SSL].
2. Press [Next] of IPv6. 3. Press [OK].
3. Press [Change] of DHCP. 4. After changing the setting, restart the system or
4. Press [On] or [Off] of DHCP. turn the machine OFF and then ON again.
5. Press [OK].
6. After changing the setting, restart the system or
turn the machine OFF and then ON again. HTTP Security Setup
1. Press [Next] of Network, [Next] of Secure Protocol,
and then [Change] of HTTPS Security.
NetWare Setup 2. Press [HTTP or HTTPS] or [HTTPS Only].
1. Press [Next] of Network and then [Change] of Net- 3. Press [OK].
Ware. 4. After changing the setting, restart the system or
2. Press [On]. turn the machine OFF and then ON again.
3. Press the key for the frame type you want to use.
4. Press [OK].
5. After changing the setting, restart the system or LDAP Security Setup
turn the machine OFF and then ON again. 1. Press [Next] of Network, [Next] of Secure Protocol,
and then [Change] of LDAP Security.
2. Press [Off], [LDAP over SSL] or [LDAPv3/TLS].
AppleTalk Setup 3. Press [OK].
1. Press [Next] of Network and then [Change] of 4. After changing the setting, restart the system or
AppleTalk. turn the machine OFF and then ON again.
2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press [OK].
4. After changing the setting, restart the system or IPSec Setting
turn the machine OFF and then ON again. 1. Press [Next] of Network, and then [Change] of
IPSec.
2. Press [On].
WSD Scan Setup 3. Press [OK].
1. Press [Next] of Network and then [Change] of WSD 4. After changing the setting, restart the system or
Scan. turn the machine OFF and then ON again.
2. Press [On] or [Off].
3. Press [OK].
4. After changing the setting, restart the system or LAN Interface Setup
turn the machine OFF and then ON again. 1. Press [Next] of Network and then [Change] of LAN
Interface.
2. Select [Auto], [10BASE-T Half], [10BASE-T Full],
WSD Print Setup [100BASE-TX Half] or [100BASE-TX Full] as the
1. Press [Next] of Network and then [Change] of WSD LAN interface.
Print. 3. Press [OK].
2. Press [On] or [Off]. 4. After changing the setting, restart the system or
3. Press [OK]. turn the machine OFF and then ON again.
4. After changing the setting, restart the system or
turn the machine OFF and then ON again.

1-3-117
2KR/2KS

Interface Block Setting (14) User Login Administration

USB Host (USB memory slot setting)

Enabling/Disabling User Login Administration
1. Press [Next] of Interface Block Setting and then
1. If user login administration is disabled, the user
[Change] of USB Host.
authentication screen appears. Enter your login
2. Press [Block].
user name and password and then press [Login].
3. Press [OK].
2. Press [Next] of User Login Setting and then
[Change] of User Login.
3. Select [Local Authentication] or [Network Authenti-
USB Device (USB interface setting)
cation]. Select [Off] to disable user login administra-
1. Press [Next] of Interface Block Setting and then
tion.
[Change] of USB Device.
If you select [Network Authentication], enter the
2. Press [Block].
host name (62 characters or less) and domain
3. Press [OK].
name (256 characters or less) for the Authentica-
tion Server. Select [NTLM] or [Kerberos] as the
server type.
Optional interface (Optional interface card setting)
4. Press [OK].
1. Press [Next] of Interface Block Setting and then
[Change] of Optional Interface 1 or Optional Inter-
face 2.
Adding a User
2. Press [Block].
1. If user login administration is disabled, the user
3. Press [OK].
authentication screen appears. Enter your login
user name and password and then press [Login].
2. Press [Next] of User Login Setting, [Register/Edit]
Document Guard Setting
of Local User List, and then [Add].
1. Press and then [Change] of Document Guard.
3. Press [Change] of User Name.
2. Press [On].
4. Enter the user name and press [OK].
To scan documents, press [Off].
5. Enter the login user name and E-mail address fol-
3. Press [OK].
lowing 3 and 4 above.
6. Press [Change] of Login Password and then [Pass-
word].
Optional Functions
7. Enter the login password and press [OK].
8. Press [Confirm Password].
Starting Application Use
9. Enter the same login password to confirm and
1. Press [Next] of Optional Function.
press [OK].
2. Select the desired application and press [Activate].
10. Press [OK].
You can view detailed information on the selected
11. Press [Change] of Access Level.
application by pressing [Detail].
12. Select the user access privilege and press [OK].
3. In the license key entry screen, press [Official].
13. Press [Change] of Account Name.
Some applications do not require you to enter an
14. Select the account and press [OK].
license key. If the license key entry screen does not
15. Press [Register] to add a new user on the local user
appear, go to Step 4.
list.
To use the application as a trial, press [Trial] without
entering the license key.
4. When the confirmation screen appears, press
[Yes].

Checking Application Details

1. Press [Next] of Optional Function.
2. Select the application you want to check the details
of and press [Detail].
You can now view detailed information on the
selected application.

1-3-118
 2KR/2KS

Changing User Properties Obtain Network User Property

1. If user login administration is disabled, the user 1. If user login administration is disabled, the user
authentication screen appears. Enter your login authentication screen appears. Enter your login
user name and password and then press [Login]. user name and password and then press [Login].
2. Press [Next] of User Login Setting and [Register/ 2. Press [Next] of User Login Setting, [Change] of
Edit] of Local User List. Obtain NW User Property.
3. Select the user whose properties you wish to 3. Press [On].
change. 4. Press [Server Name].
The procedure differs depending on the details to 5. Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address and
be edited. press [OK].
Changing user information 6. Press [# keys] to enter the LDAP port number using
1. Press [Detail]. the numeric keys.
2. Refer to steps 3 to 14 of Adding a User to 7. Press [Name 1].
change a user property. 8. Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to
3. Press [Register]. be displayed and press [OK].
4. Press [Yes] in the registration confirmation 9. 11 Follow steps 7 and 8 above to set Name 2.
screen. The user information is changed. 10. Press [E-mail Address].
Deleting a user 11. Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the e-mail
1. Press [Delete]. address and press [OK].
2. Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm deletion. 12. Press [Search Timeout] to set the amount of time to
The selected user will be deleted. wait before time-out.
13. Press [+], [-] or the numeric keys to enter the time.
14. Press [LDAP Security] to select the type of encryp-
Unknown login user name Job tion according to the type of security employed by
1. If user login administration is disabled, the user the LDAP server.
authentication screen appears. Enter your login 15. Select [Off], [LDAP over SSL], or [LDAPv3/TLS]
user name and password and then press [Login]. and press [OK].
2. Press [Change] of Unknown ID Job.
3. Press [Reject] or [Permit].
4. Press [OK].

Group Authorization (15) Job accounting

1. If user login administration is disabled, the user
authentication screen appears. Enter your login
Enabling/Disabling Job Accounting
user name and password and then press [Login].
1. If user login administration is disabled, the user
2. Press [Next] of User Login Setting, [Next] of Group
authentication screen appears. Enter your login
Authorization Set., and then [Change] of Group
user name and password and then press [Login].
Authorization.
2. Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, and then
3. Press [On].
[Change] of Job Accounting.
4. Press [OK].
3. Press [On]. To disable job accounting, press [Off].
4. Press [OK].
Group List
1. If user login administration is disabled, the user
Adding an Account
authentication screen appears. Enter your login
1. If user login administration is disabled, the user
user name and password and then press [Login].
authentication screen appears. Enter your login
2. Press [Next] of User Login Setting, [Next] of Group
user name and password and then press [Login].
Authorization Set., [Register/Edit] of Group List,
2. Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, [Register/
and then [Add].
Edit] of Accounting List, and then [Add].
3. Press [Change] of Group ID.
3. Press [Change] of Account Name.
4. Enter the group ID and press [OK].
4. Enter the account name and press [OK].
5. Press [Change] of Group Name.
The Account screen reappears.
6. Enter the group name and press [OK].
5. Follow steps 3 and 4 above to enter the Account ID.
7. Press [Change] of Access Level.
6. Activate or deactivate restriction.
8. Select the user access privilege and press [OK].
7. Press [Register] to add a new account on the
9. Press [Change] of Print Restriction.
Account List.
10. Select [Reject Usage] or [Off] and press [OK].
11. Follow steps 9 and 10 above to set Copy Restric-
tion, Send Restriction, FAX TX Restriction, Storing
Restr. in Box, and Storing Restr. in Memory.
12. Press [Register] to add a new group on the group
list.

1-3-119
2KR/2KS

Managing Accounts 2. Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, [Next] of

1. If user login administration is disabled, the user Default Setting and then [Next] of Default Counter
authentication screen appears. Enter your login Limit.
user name and password and then press [Login]. 3. Press [Change] for the item you want to modify and
2. Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting and then then press [+] or [-] or use the numeric keys to enter
[Register/Edit] of Accounting List. the default restriction on the number of sheets.
3. Select an account to change or delete. 4. Press [OK].
Changing account information 5. To set another default restriction, repeat steps 3 to
1. Press [Detail]. 4.
2. Refer to steps 3 to 5 of Adding an Account and
steps 3 to 6 of Restricting Using the Machine to
change account information. Total Job Accounting/Resetting the Counter
3. Press [Register]. 1. If user login administration is disabled, the user
4. Press [Yes] in the registration confirmation screen. authentication screen appears. Enter your login
The account information is changed. user name and password and then press [Login].
Deleting an account 2. Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting and then
1. Press [Delete]. [Next] of Total Job Accounting.
2. Press [Yes]. To delete the account. 3. Press [Check] at the function to check the count.
The results will be displayed.
4. Confirm the count and press [Close].
Managing the Copier/Printer Counts 5. Press [Execute] of Counter Reset to reset the
1. If user login administration is disabled, the user counter.
authentication screen appears. Enter your login 6. Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the reset.
user name and password and then press [Login]. The counter is reset.
2. Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, [Next] of
Default Setting and then [Change] of Copier/Printer
Count. Each Job Accounting/Resetting the Counter
3. Press [Total] or [Split]. 1. If user login administration is disabled, the user
4. Press [OK]. authentication screen appears. Enter your login
user name and password and then press [Login].
2. Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting and [Check]
Applying Restriction of Each Job Accounting.
1. If user login administration is disabled, the user 3. Select the account to check the count.
authentication screen appears. Enter your login 4. Press [Detail].
user name and password and then press [Login]. 5. Press [Check] at the function to check the count.
2. Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, [Register/ The results will be displayed.
Edit] of Accounting List, and then [Add]. 6. Confirm the count and press [Close].
3. Press [Change] for the item to be restricted. 7. Press [Execute] of Counter Reset to reset the
4. Select the restriction mode. counter.
If [Counter Limit] is selected, press [+],[-] or numeric 8. Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the reset.
keys to select the number of pages. The counter will be reset.
5. Press [OK].
6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 for other accounts to be
restricted. Counting by Paper Size
7. Press [Register]. The restricted account is added. 1. If user login administration is disabled, the user
authentication screen appears. Enter your login
user name and password and then press [Login].
Applying Limit of Restriction 2. Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, [Next] of
1. If user login administration is disabled, the user Default Setting, [Change] of Count by Paper Size,
authentication screen appears. Enter your login [Change] of Paper Size 1 to 5 and then [On].
user name and password and then press [Login]. 3. Select the paper size.
2. Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting, [Next] of 4. Press [Media Type] to specify media type.
Default Setting and then [Change] of Apply Limit. 5. Select the media type and press [OK].
3. Select [Immediately], [Subsequently], or [Alert 6. Press [Close].
Only].
4. Press [OK].
Printing an Accounting Report
1. If user login administration is disabled, the user
Default Counter Limit authentication screen appears. Enter your login
1. If user login administration is disabled, the user user name and password and then press [Login].
authentication screen appears. Enter your login 2. Press [Next] of Job Accounting Setting and then
user name and password and then press [Login]. [Print] of Print Accounting Report.
3. Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the printing.

1-3-120
 2KR/2KS

1-4 Troubleshooting

1-4-1 Paper misfeed detection

(1) Paper misfeed indication

When a paper misfeed occurs, the machine immediately stops copying and displays the jam location on the operation
panel.
Paper misfeed counts sorted by the detection condition can be checked in maintenance item U903.
To remove paper jammed in the machine, open the front cover, left cover or pull the cassette out.
To remove original jammed in the optional DP, open the DP top cover.
To remove the jammed paper in optional document finisher, detach the finisher from the machine.
Paper misfeed detection can be reset by opening and closing the respective covers to turn safety switch off and on.

I
K
J
G
I
I I G
I F
I D D

I
A
E
B
I E
C
I
C
I

Figure 1-4-1

(A) Misfeed in cassette 1

(B) Misfeed in cassette 2
(C) Misfeed in optional cassette 3 or 4
(D) Misfeed in MP tray
(E) Misfeed in left cover 1, 2 or 3
(F) Misfeed in duplex section
(G) Misfeed in paper feed section
(H) Misfeed in optional DP
(I) Misfeed in optional document finisher
(J) Misfeed in optional built-in finisher
(K) Misfeed in optional job separator

1-4-1
2KR/2KS

(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions

ORSW OFSW TULSW

DPTSW2
SBTSW

Document processor
DPTSW1 OESW

PCSW Built-in finisher

FSSW

ESW

DUP
PCSW
DUP
FCL RCL
RSW MPFCL
FCL1

FSW1 MPPFCL
PFCL1 MPFSW

FCL2
FSW2
PFCL2

FCL3
FSW3
PFPFCL1 PFPFCL2
PFPFCL1
PPS1 PPS2 PPS3
PFCCL
PFFSW

PFPFCL2

Paper feeder
3000-sheet paper feeder

Figure 1-4-2

1-4-2
 2KR/2KS-1

Section Description Conditions Specified time

System 00 The power is turned on when a sensor in the conveying -
Initial JAM system is on.
04 Cover is open during copying. -
Cover open
05 Secondary paper feed does not start within specified time 40 s
Secondary paper feed of arrival of paper at the registration section.
does not start
09 A communication sequence error occurs between the -
Sequence error jam machine and the 3000-sheet paper feeder.
Paper 10 Feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn on within the specified 1152 ms
feed No paper feed from time of paper feed clutch 1 (PFCL1) turning on; the clutch is
section cassette 1 then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on, but
the switch again fails to turn on within the specified time.
11 Feed switch 2 (FSW2) does not turn on within the specified 1209 ms
No paper feed from time of paper feed clutch 2 (PFCL2) turning on; the clutch is
cassette 2 then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on, but
the switch again fails to turn on within the specified time.
12 Feed switch 3 (FSW3) does not turn on within the specified 1209 ms
No paper feed from time of PF paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) turning on; the
cassette 3 clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned
back on, but the switch again fails to turn on within the
specified time (paper feed from paper feeder).
Feed switch 3 (FSW3) does not turn on within the specified 780 ms
time of PF paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) turning on
(paper feed from 3000-sheet paper feeder).
13 The PF feed switch (PFFSW) does not turn on within the 1209 ms
No paper feed from specified time of PF paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2) turning
cassette 4 on; the clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and
turned back on, but the switch again fails to turn on within
the specified time (paper feed from paper feeder).
14 The MP feed switch (MPFSW) does not turn on within the 3913 ms
No paper feed from MP specified time of the MP paper feed clutch (MPPFCL) turn-
tray ing on; the clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and
turned back on, but the switch again fails to turn on within
the specified time.
15 Paper path sensor 3 (PPS3) does not turn on within speci- 360 ms
Jam in paper feeder fied time of PF paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2) turning on
horizontal paper con- (paper feed from 3000-sheet paper feeder).
veying section 1
16 Paper path sensor 2 (PPS2) does not turn on within speci- 380 ms
Jam in paper feeder fied time of the paper path sensor 3 (PPS3) turning on
horizontal paper con- (paper feed from 3000-sheet paper feeder).
veying section 2
17 Paper path sensor 1 (PPS1) does not turn on within speci- 250 ms
Jam in paper feeder fied time of the paper path sensor 2 (PPS2) turning on
horizontal paper con- (paper feed from 3000-sheet paper feeder).
veying section 3

1-4-3
2KR/2KS-1

Section Description Conditions Specified time

Paper 18 The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within spec- 1283 ms
feed Misfeed in vertical ified time of feed switch 1 (FSW1) turning on.
section paper conveying sec-
Feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn on within specified 1478 ms
tion
time of feed switch 2 (FSW2) turning on.
Feed switch 2 (FSW2) does not turn on within specified 1474 ms
time of feed switch 3 (FSW3) turning on.
19 Feed switch 3 (FSW3) does not turn on within specified 1217 ms
Misfeed in paper feeder time of the PF feed switch (PFFSW) turning on.
vertical paper convey-
ing section
20 The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within spec- 3043 ms
Misfeed in MP tray ver- ified time of the MP feed switch (MPFSW) turning on.
tical paper conveying
section
21 The feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn off within specified Paper length +
Multiple sheets in paper time of its turning on. 3357 ms
feed section
The feed switch 2 (FSW2) does not turn off within specified Paper length +
time of its turning on. 3357 ms
The feed switch 3 (FSW3) does not turn off within specified Paper length +
time of its turning on (paper feed from paper feeder). 3357 ms
The feed switch 3 (FSW3) does not turn off within specified 1050 ms
time of its turning on (paper feed from 3000-sheet paper
feeder).
The PF feed switch (PFFSW) does not turn off within speci- Paper length +
fied time of its turning on. 3357 ms
The MP feed switch (MPFSW) does not turn off within spec- Paper length +
ified time of its turning on. 3357 ms
The feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn off within specified 1152 ms
time of the paper feed clutch 1 (PFCL1) turning on.
The feed switch 2 (FSW2) does not turn off within specified 1209 ms
time of the paper feed clutch 2 (PFCL2) turning on.
The feed switch 3 (FSW3) does not turn off within specified 2643 ms
time of the PF paper feed clutch 1 (PFPFCL1) turning on.
The PF feed switch (PFFSW) does not turn off within speci- 3913 ms
fied time of the PF paper feed clutch 2 (PFPFCL2) turning
on.
The MP feed switch (MPFSW) does not turn off within spec- 3913 ms
ified time of the MP paper feed clutch (MPPFCL) turning on.
22 The feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn off within specified 1478 ms
Multiple sheets in verti- time of the feed switch 2 (FSW2) turning off.
cal conveying section
The feed switch 2 (FSW2) does not turn off within specified 1539 ms
time of the feed switch 3 (FSW3) turning off.
The feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn off within specified 1478 ms
time of the feed switch 2 (FSW2) turning on
The feed switch 2 (FSW2) does not turn off within specified 1474 ms
time of the feed switch 3 (FSW3) turning on.

1-4-4
 2KR/2KS

Section Description Conditions Specified time

Paper 23 The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within spec- 2739 ms
feed Multiple sheets in MP ified time of the MP feed switch (MPFSW) turning off.
section tray conveying section
The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within spec- 3043 ms
ified time of the MP feed switch (MPFSW) turning on.
Paper 30 The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within spec- 1170 ms
conveying Misfeed in registration/ ified time of the feed switch 1 (FSW1) turning off.
section transfer section
The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within spec- 1278 ms
ified time of the feed switch 1 (FSW1) turning on.
Fuser 40 The eject switch (ESW) does not turn on within specified 2243 ms
section Misfeed in fuser section time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on.
(MP tray)
The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within speci- 2243 ms
fied time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on.
41 The eject switch (ESW) does not turn on within specified 2243 ms
Misfeed in fuser section time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on.
(cassette 1)
The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within speci- 2243 ms
fied time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on.
42 The eject switch (ESW) does not turn on within specified 2243 ms
Misfeed in fuser section time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on.
(cassette 2)
The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within speci- 2243 ms
fied time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on.
43 The eject switch (ESW) does not turn on within specified 2243 ms
Misfeed in fuser section time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on.
(cassette 3)
The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within speci- 2243 ms
fied time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on.
44 The eject switch (ESW) does not turn on within specified 2243 ms
Misfeed in fuser section time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on.
(cassette 4)
The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within speci- 2243 ms
fied time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on.
46 The eject switch (ESW) does not turn on within specified 2243 ms
Misfeed in fuser section time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on.
(3000-sheet paper
The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within speci- 2243 ms
feeder)
fied time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on.
47 The eject switch (ESW) does not turn on within specified 2243 ms
Misfeed in fuser section time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on.
(duplex section)
The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within speci- 2243 ms
fied time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on.
Eject 50 The eject switch (ESW) does not turn off within specified 2243 ms
section Misfeed in eject section time of the registration switch (RSW) turning off.
The eject switch (ESW) does not turn off within specified 2243 ms
time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on.

1-4-5
2KR/2KS

Section Description Conditions Specified time

Eject 51 The job eject switch (JESW) does not turn on within speci- 1587 ms
section Misfeed in job separa- fied time of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on.
tor eject section
The job eject switch (JESW) does not turn off within speci- 1587 ms
fied time of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning off.
The job eject switch (JESW) does not turn off within speci- 1587 ms
fied time of the feedshift switch (FSSW) turning on.
Feedshift 52 The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn on within speci- 1196 ms
section Misfeed in feedshift fied time of the start of eject motor (EM) reverse rotation.
section
During paper switchback operation, the feedshift switch 2313 ms
(FSSW) does not turn off within specified time of the its
turning on.
The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn off within speci- 2243 ms
fied time of the registration switch (RSW) turning off.
The feedshift switch (FSSW) does not turn off within speci- 2243 ms
fied time of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on.
Duplex 60 The duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW) does not 2196 ms
section Duplex paper convey- turn on within specified time of the feedshift switch (FSSW)
ing section 1 turning on.
The duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW) does not 2196 ms
turn off within specified time of the feedshift switch (FSSW)
turning off.
61 The feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn on within specified 1543 ms
Duplex paper convey- time of the duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW)
ing section 2 turning on.
The feed switch 1 (FSW1) does not turn off within specified 1543 ms
time of the duplex paper conveying switch (DUPPCSW)
turning off.
DP 70 The original feed switch (OFSW) does not turn on within 1159 ms
No original feed specified time during the first sheet feeding (Retry 5 times).
The original feed switch (OFSW) does not turn on within 1159 ms
specified time during the second sheet feeding (Retry 5
times).
During original tray ascent, the tray upper limit switch 2s
(TULSW) does not turn on within specified time.
71 The original registration switch (ORSW) does not turn on 1013 ms
An original jam in the within specified time of the original feed switch (OFSW)
original feed section turning on.
72 DP timing switch 1 (DPTSW1) turns off within the specified 914 ms
An original jam in the time since the switch turns on.
original conveying sec-
tion

1-4-6
 2KR/2KS

Section Description Conditions Specified time

DP 73 During single scanning, the DP timing switch 1 (DPTSW1) 1774 ms
An original jam in the does not turn on within specified time of the original regis-
original registration tration switch (ORSW) turning on (Retry 5 times).
section
During duplex switchback scanning, the DP timing switch 1 1774 ms
(DPTSW1) does not turn on within specified time of the
original registration switch (ORSW) turning on (Retry 5
times).
During dual scanning, the DP timing switch 2 (DPTSW2) 1014 ms
does not turn on within specified time of the original regis-
tration switch (ORSW) turning on (Retry 5 times).
74 The original feed switch (OFSW) or original registration 2084 ms
An original jam in the switch (ORSW) does not turn off within specified time of the
original feed section DP timing switch 1 (DPTSW1) turning on.
Scanning of previous original is not complete when DP tim- -
ing switch 1 (DPTSW1) turns on.
75 During single scanning, the DP timing switch 1 (DPTSW1) 1416 ms
An original jam in the does not turn off within specified time of the original regis-
original conveying sec- tration switch (ORSW) turning off.
tion
During duplex switchback scanning, the DP timing switch 1 1416 ms
(DPTSW1) does not turn off within specified time of the
original registration switch (ORSW) turning off.
During dual scanning, the DP timing switch 2 (DPTSW2) 656 ms
does not turn off within specified time of the original regis-
tration switch (ORSW) turning off.
76 During duplex switchback scanning, the switchback tray 2318 ms
An original jam in the switch (SBTSW) does not turn on within specified time of
original switchback the DP timing switch 1 (DPTSW1) turning on.
section 1
77 During duplex switchback scanning, the original registration 935 ms
An original jam in the switch (ORSW) does not turn on within specified time since
original switchback original switchback operation starts.
section 2
78 The DP or DP top cover is opened during original feeding. -
DP cover open JAM
When the power is turned on or original feeding starts, the -
original feed switch (OFSW), the original registration switch
(ORSW) or DP timing switch 1, 2 (DPTSW1, 2) turning on.
79 During single scanning or dual scanning, the original eject 1705 ms
An original jam in the switch (OESW) does not turn on within specified time of the
original eject section DP timing switch 1 (DPTSW1) turning on.
During duplex switchback scanning, the original eject 841 ms
switch (OESW) does not turn on within specified time since
switchback ejection starts.
During single scanning or dual scanning, the original eject 1705 ms
switch (OESW) does not turn off within specified time of the
DP timing switch 1 (DPTSW1) turning off.

1-4-7
2KR/2KS-2

Section Description Conditions Specified time

Finisher 80 Paper ejection is not output from the machine to the docu- 15 s
Jam between the fin- ment finisher within specified time of the paper entry sensor
isher and machine (PES) turning on.
81 (3000-sheet document finisher) 1052 ms
Paper entry sensor non The paper entry sensor (PES) is not turned off even if a
arrival jam specified time has elapsed after the machine eject signal
was received.
(3000-sheet document finisher) 1052 ms
The paper entry sensor (PES) is not turned on even if a
specified time has elapsed after the machine eject signal
was received.
(3000-sheet document finisher) 2313 ms
The paper entry sensor (PES) does not turn off within spec-
ified time of its turning on.
(Document finisher) 733 ms
The paper entry sensor (PES) is not turned on even if a
specified time has elapsed after the machine eject signal
was received.
(Built-in finisher) 1217 ms
The paper conveying switch (PCSW) is not turned on even
if a specified time has elapsed after the machine eject sig-
nal was received.
(Built-in finisher) Paper length +
The paper conveying switch (PCSW) does not turn off 869 ms
within specified time of its turning on when paper is con-
veyed to the intermediate tray from the paper conveying
unit.
82 (3000-sheet document finisher) 600 ms
Jam in stapler The home position is not detected within the specified time
when driving the staple motor.
(Document finisher) -
The staple home position sensor (STSPS) is not turned on
within the specified time when driving the staple motor
(STM).
(Built-in finisher) 600 ms
The staple home position sensor (STHPS) is not turned on
within the specified time when driving the staple motor
(STM).
83 (3000-sheet document finisher) 1182 ms
Eject sensor stay jam Eject switch 1 (ESW1) is not turned off within specified time
of its turning on.
(Document finisher) -
In the straight mode, the exit sensor (EPS) is not turned off
within specified time of its turning on.
(Document finisher) 902 ms
In the bundle discharge mode or the staple mode, bundle
discharge operation does not turn off within specified time
since the operation starts.
(Built-in finisher) Paper length +
The paper conveying switch (PCSW) does not turn off 869 ms
within specified time of its turning on when paper is ejected
to the finisher tray from the intermediate tray.

1-4-8
 2KR/2KS

Section Description Conditions Specified time

Finisher 84 Eject switch 2 (ESW2) is not turned off even if a specified 1209 ms
Jam in eject section of time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was
right sub tray (3000- received.
sheet document fin-
Eject switch 2 (ESW2) is not turned on even if a specified 1209 ms
isher only)
time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was
received.
Eject switch 2 (ESW2) is not turned off within specified time 2313 ms
of its turning on.
85 Eject switch 3 (ESW3) does not turn off within specified 1426 ms
Jam in eject section of time of paper entry sensor (PES) turning on.
left sub tray (3000-
Eject switch 3 (ESW3) does not turn on within specified 1426 ms
sheet document fin-
time of paper entry sensor (PES) turning on.
isher only)
Eject switch 3 (ESW3) is not turned off within specified time 2313 ms
of its turning on.
86 Internal tray entry sensor 1 (ITPES1) is not turned on even 2070 ms
Jam in eject section of if a specified time has elapsed after the eject signal was
internal tray 1 (3000- received.
sheet document fin-
isher only)
87 Inner tray entry sensor 2 (ITPES2) does not turn on within 1322 ms
Jam in eject section of specified time of the paper entry sensor (PES) turning on.
inner tray 2 (3000-
Inner tray entry sensor 2 (ITPES2) does not turn off within 676 ms
sheet document fin-
specified time of the paper entry sensor (PES) turning off.
isher only)
88 Eject switch 1 (ESW1) is not turned on within specified 1324 ms
Jam in eject section of time.
main tray (3000-sheet
At the time of bundle up initial operation, paper conveying -
document finisher only)
belt home position sensor 1 (PCBHPS1) does not turn on.
At the time of bundle down initial operation, paper convey- -
ing belt home position sensor 2 (PCBHPS2) does not turn
on.
At the time of side registration standby operation, side reg- 500 ms
istration home position sensor 1 (SRHPS1) does not turn
off within specified time.
At the time of side registration standby operation, side reg- 500 ms
istration home position sensor 2 (SRHPS2) does not turn
off within specified time.

1-4-9
2KR/2KS

Section Description Conditions Specified time

Finisher 89 The centerfold paper entry sensor (CPES) does not turn off 5373 ms
Jam in center-folding within specified time of centerfold paper conveying sensor
unit (3000-sheet docu- (CPCS) turning on.
ment finisher only)
The centerfold paper entry sensor (CPES) does not turn on 5373 ms
within specified time of centerfold paper conveying sensor
(CPCS) turning on.
The centerfold paper entry sensor (CPES) is not turned off 2313 ms
within specified time of its turning on.
The centerfold eject switch (CESW) is not turned on within 4080 ms
specified time.
The centerfold eject switch (CESW) is not turned off within 8200 ms
specified time of its turning on.
Centerfold side registration sensor 1 (CSRS1) is not turned 600 ms
on within specified time.
Centerfold side registration sensor 2 (CSRS2) is not turned 600 ms
on within specified time.
The home position is not detected within the specified time 1000 ms
after driving the centerfold staple motor (CSTM).
The centerfold paper conveying sensor (CPCS) is not 1370 ms
turned off within specified time.
The centerfold paper conveying sensor (CPCS) is not 1370 ms
turned on within specified time.
The centerfold paper conveying sensor (CPCS) is not 2313 ms
turned off within specified time of its turning on.
90 The tray eject sensor (TEJS) does not turn on within speci- 5120 ms
Jam in mailbox (3000- fied time from start of paper eject (tray 1).
sheet document fin-
The tray eject sensor (TEJS) does not turn on within speci- 4633 ms
isher only)
fied time from start of paper eject (tray 2).
The tray eject sensor (TEJS) does not turn on within speci- 4147 ms
fied time from start of paper eject (tray 3).
The tray eject sensor (TEJS) does not turn on within speci- 3660 ms
fied time from start of paper eject (tray 4).
The tray eject sensor (TEJS) does not turn on within speci- 3173 ms
fied time from start of paper eject (tray 5).
The tray eject sensor (TEJS) does not turn on within speci- 2687 ms
fied time from start of paper eject (tray 6).
The tray eject sensor (TEJS) does not turn on within speci- 2200 ms
fied time from start of paper eject (tray 7).
The tray eject sensor (TEJS) is not turned off within speci- Depends on paper
fied time of its turning on. size

1-4-10
 2KR/2KS-2

Section Description Conditions Specified time

Finisher 91 (3000-sheet document finisher) -
Finisher cover open The front cover, top cover or right sub tray is opened when
starting the finisher operation.
The centerfold unit top cover is opened when starting the
center-fold operation.
The mailbox cover is opened when starting the operation.
(Document finisher) -
The finisher cover becomes open during paper is running.
Paper is remaining in paths at power on.
92 In the straight mode, the eject paper sensor (EPS) is not -
Eject paper sensor turned on even if a specified time has elapsed after the
non-arrival jam (docu- paper entry sensor (PES) was turned on.
ment finisher only)
93 The reverse sensor (SBS) does not turn on within specified 437 ms
Reverse sensor jam time of paper entry sensor (PES) turning on (unfinished
(document finisher reversing canceled).
only)
The reverse sensor (SBS) is not turned on within specified 431 ms
time (unfinished reversing set).
The reverse sensor (SBS) is not turned off within specified 1826 ms
time its turning on (resident reversing canceled).
The reverse sensor (SBS) is not turned off within specified 700 ms
time its turning on (resident reversing set).
94 The paper entry sensor (PES) is not turned off within speci- 1370 ms
Paper entry sensor fied time its turning on.
stay/remaining jam
(document finisher
only)
95 The paper conveying sensor (PCS) is not turned off within 1370 ms
Paper conveying sen- specified time its turning on (reversing canceled).
sor jam (document fin-
The paper conveying sensor (PCS) is not turned off within 656 ms
isher only)
specified time its turning on (reversing set).
96 Paper ejection is not output from the machine to the docu- 1217 ms
Jam between the built- ment finisher within specified time of the intermediate tray
in finisher and machine sensor (ITS) turning on.
(built-in finisher only)

1-4-11
2KR/2KS

(3) Paper misfeeds

Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures

(1) A piece of paper torn from Check visually and remove it, if any.
A paper jam in the copy paper is caught
paper feed, convey- around feed switch 1/2/3,
ing or eject section is registration switch, eject
indicated as soon as switch or feedshift switch.
the main power
Defective switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually.
switch is turned on.
Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the
touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Feed switch 1/2/3, registration switch, eject switch, feedshift
switch
(2) Paper is extremely curled. Replace the paper.
A paper jam in the
Check if the paper feed pul- Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys.
paper feed section is
ley, separation pulley or for-
indicated during
warding pulley of the
copying (no paper
cassette 1 are deformed.
feed from cassette
1). Broken feed switch 1 actua- Check visually and replace switch.
Jam code 10 tor.
Defective feed switch 1. Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 1 on and off
manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding
switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Check if the paper feed Run maintenance item U032 and select the paper feed clutch 1 on
clutch 1 malfunctions. the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and rem-
edy if necessary.
Electrical problem with the Check (see page 1-4-57).
paper feed clutch 1.
(3) Paper is extremely curled. Replace the paper.
A paper jam in the
Check if the paper feed pul- Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys.
paper feed section is
ley, separation pulley or for-
indicated during
warding pulley of the
copying (no paper
cassette 2 are deformed.
feed from cassette
2). Broken feed switch 2 actua- Check visually and replace switch.
Jam code 11 tor.
Defective feed switch 2. Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 2 on and off
manually. Replace feed switch 2 if indication of the corresponding
switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Check if the paper feed Run maintenance item U032 and select the paper feed clutch 2 on
clutch 2 malfunctions. the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and rem-
edy if necessary.
Electrical problem with the Check (see page 1-4-57).
paper feed clutch 2.

1-4-12
 2KR/2KS

Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures

(4) Paper feeder
A paper jam in the
Paper is extremely curled. Replace the paper.
paper feed section is
indicated during Check if the paper feed pul- Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys.
copying (no paper ley, forwarding pulley and
feed from cassette separation pulley of cas-
3). sette 3 are deformed.
Jam code 12
Broken feed switch 3 actua- Check visually and replace switch.
tor.
Defective feed switch 3. Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 3 on and off
manually. Replace feed switch 3 if indication of the corresponding
switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Check if PF paper feed Run maintenance item U247 and select PF paper feed clutch 1 on
clutch 1 malfunctions. the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and rem-
edy if necessary.
Electrical problem with PF Check (see service manual of paper feeder).
paper feed clutch 1.
3000-sheet paper feeder
Paper is extremely curled. Replace the paper.
Broken feed switch 3 actua- Check visually and replace switch.
tor.
Defective feed switch 3. Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 3 on and off
manually. Replace feed switch 3 if indication of the corresponding
switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Check if the clutch malfunc- Run maintenance item U247 and select following clutch on the
tions. touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy
if necessary.
PF paper feed clutch 1/2, PF paper conveying clutch
Electrical problem with Check (see service manual of 3000-sheet paper feeder).
clutch.
(5) Paper is extremely curled. Replace the paper.
A paper jam in the
Check if the paper feed pul- Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys.
paper feed section is
ley, forwarding pulley and
indicated during
separation pulley of cas-
copying (no paper
sette 4 are deformed.
feed from cassette
4). Broken paper feeder feed Check visually and replace switch.
Jam code 13 switch actuator.
Defective PF feed switch. With 5 V DC present at YC3-7 on the PF main PWB, check if YC3-
5 on the PF main PWB remains low or high when the PF feed
switch is turned on and off. If it does, replace the PF feed switch.
Check if PF paper feed Run maintenance item U247 and select PF paper feed clutch 2 on
clutch 2 malfunctions. the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and rem-
edy if necessary.
Electrical problem with PF Check (see service manual of paper feeder).
paper feed clutch 2.

1-4-13
2KR/2KS

Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures

(6) Paper is extremely curled. Replace the paper.
A paper jam in the
Check if the MP paper feed Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys.
paper feed section is
pulley, MP forwarding pulley
indicated during
and MP separation pulley
copying (no paper
are deformed.
feed from MP tray).
Jam code 14 Broken MP feed switch Check visually and replace switch.
actuator.
Defective MP feed switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn MP feed switch on and off
manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding
switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Check if the MP paper feed Run maintenance item U032 and select MP paper feed clutch on
clutch malfunctions. the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and rem-
edy if necessary.
Electrical problem with the Check (see page 1-4-57).
MP paper feed clutch.
(7) Paper is extremely curled. Replace the paper.
A paper jam in the
Check if the paper side Check visually and replace.
paper feed section is
guides are deformed.
indicated during
copying (jam in 3000- Defective paper path sen- With 5 V DC present at CN6-12 on the PF main PWB, check if
sheet paper feeder sor 3. CN6-11 on the PF main PWB remains low or high when paper
horizontal paper con- path sensor 3 is turned on and off. If it does, replace paper path
veying section). sensor 3.
Jam code 15
Check if PF paper feed Run maintenance item U247 and select PF paper feed clutch 2 on
clutch 2 malfunctions. the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and rem-
edy if necessary.
Electrical problem with PF Check (see service manual of 3000-sheet paper feeder).
paper feed clutch 2.
(8) Paper is extremely curled. Replace the paper.
A paper jam in the
Check if the paper side Check visually and replace.
paper feed section is
guides are deformed.
indicated during
copying (jam in 3000- Defective paper path sen- With 5 V DC present at CN6-9 on the PF main PWB, check if
sheet paper feeder sor 2. CN6-8 on the PF main PWB remains low or high when paper path
horizontal paper con- sensor 2 is turned on and off. If it does, replace paper path sensor
veying section). 2.
Jam code 16
Check if PF paper feed Run maintenance item U247 and select PF paper feed clutch 1 on
clutch 1 malfunctions. the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and rem-
edy if necessary.
Electrical problem with PF Check (see service manual of 3000-sheet paper feeder).
paper feed clutch 1.

1-4-14
 2KR/2KS

Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures

(9) Paper is extremely curled. Replace the paper.
A paper jam in the
Check if the paper side Check visually and replace.
paper feed section is
guides are deformed.
indicated during
copying (jam in 3000- Defective paper path sen- With 5 V DC present at CN6-6 on the PF main PWB, check if
sheet paper feeder sor 1. CN6-5 on the PF main PWB remains low or high when paper path
horizontal paper con- sensor 1 is turned on and off. If it does, replace paper path sensor
veying section). 1.
Jam code 17
Check if PF paper convey- Run maintenance item U247 and select PF paper conveying
ing clutch malfunctions. clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status
and remedy if necessary.
Electrical problem with PF Check (see service manual of 3000-sheet paper feeder).
paper conveying clutch.
(10) Broken feed switch 1/2/3 Check visually and replace switch.
A paper jam in the actuator.
paper feed section is
Defective switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn following switch on and off
indicated during
manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding
copying (jam in verti-
switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
cal paper conveying
Feed switch 1/2/3, registration switch
section).
Jam code 18 Defective feed pulleys or Check visually and replace.
feed rollers.
(11) Broken feed switch 3 actua- Check visually and replace switch.
A paper jam in the tor.
paper feed section is
Defective feed switch 3. Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 3 on and off
indicated during
manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding
copying (jam in paper
switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
feeder vertical paper
conveying section). Broken PF feed switch Check visually and replace switch.
Jam code 19 actuator.
Defective PF feed switch. With 5 V DC present at YC3-7 on the PF main PWB, check if YC3-
5 on the PF main PWB remains low or high when the PF feed
switch is turned on and off. If it does, replace the PF feed switch.
(12) Broken MP feed switch Check visually and replace switch.
A paper jam in the actuator.
paper feed section is
Defective switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn following switch on and off
indicated during
manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding
copying (jam in MP
switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
tray vertical paper
MP feed switch, registration switch
conveying section).
Jam code 20

1-4-15
2KR/2KS

Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures

(13) Broken feed switch 1/2/3 or Check visually and replace switch.
A paper jam in the MP feed switch actuator.
paper feed section is
Defective switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually.
indicated during
Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the
copying (multiple
touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
sheets in paper feed
Feed switch 1/2/3, MP feed switch
section).
Jam code 21 Broken PF feed switch Check visually and replace switch.
actuator.
Defective PF feed switch. With 5 V DC present at YC3-7 on the PF main PWB, check if YC3-
5 on the PF main PWB remains low or high when the PF feed
switch is turned on and off. If it does, replace the PF feed switch.
Check if the clutch malfunc- Run maintenance item U032 and select following clutch on the
tions. touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy
if necessary.
Paper feed clutch 1/2, MP paper conveying clutch
Electrical problem with Check (see page 1-4-57).
clutch.
Check if PF paper feed Run maintenance item U247 and select PF paper feed clutch 1/2
clutch 1/2 malfunctions. on the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and
remedy if necessary.
Electrical problem with PF Check (see service manual of 3000-sheet paper feeder).
paper feed clutch 1/2.
Defective feed pulleys or Check visually and replace.
feed rollers.
(14) Broken feed switch 1/2/3 Check visually and replace switch.
A paper jam in the actuator.
paper feed section is
Defective switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually.
indicated during
Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the
copying (multiple
touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
sheets in vertical
Feed switch 1/2/3
conveying section).
Jam code 22 Defective feed pulleys or Check visually and replace.
feed rollers.
(15) Broken MP feed switch Check visually and replace switch.
A paper jam in the actuator.
paper feed section is
Defective switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually.
indicated during
Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the
copying (multiple
touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
sheets in MP tray
MP feed switch, registration switch
conveying section).
Jam code 23
(16) Broken feed switch 1 actua- Check visually and replace switch.
A paper jam in the tor.
paper conveying sec-
Defective switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually.
tion is indicated dur-
Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the
ing copying (jam in
touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
registration/transfer
Feed switch 1, registration switch
section).
Jam code 30 The contact between the Check visually and replace.
right and left registration
rollers is not correct.

1-4-16
 2KR/2KS

Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures

(17) Broken eject switch or feed- Check visually and replace switch.
A paper jam in the shift switch actuator.
fuser section is indi-
Defective switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually.
cated during copying
Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the
(jam in fuser section).
touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Jam codes 40 to 44,
Eject switch, feedshift switch
46 and 47
Check if the registration Run maintenance item U032 and select the registration clutch on
clutch malfunctions. the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and rem-
edy if necessary.
Electrical problem with the Check (see page 1-4-57).
registration clutch.
(18) Broken eject switch actua- Check visually and replace switch.
A paper jam in the tor.
eject section is indi-
Defective switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually.
cated during copying
Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the
(jam in eject section).
touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Jam code 50
Registration switch, eject switch
Check if the registration Run maintenance item U032 and select the registration clutch on
clutch malfunctions. the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and rem-
edy if necessary.
Electrical problem with the Check (see page 1-4-57).
registration clutch.
(19) Broken feedshift switch or Check visually and replace switch.
A paper jam in the job eject switch actuator.
eject section is indi-
Defective switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually.
cated during copying
Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the
(jam in job separator
touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
eject section).
Feedshift switch, job eject switch
Jam code 51
(20) Check if the feedshift sole- Run maintenance item U033 and select the feedshift solenoid on
A paper jam in the noid malfunctions. the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and rem-
feedshift section is edy if necessary.
indicated during
Electrical problem with the Check (see page 1-4-57).
copying (jam in feed-
feedshift solenoid.
shift section).
Jam code 52 Broken feedshift switch Check visually and replace switch.
actuator.
Defective switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually.
Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the
touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Feedshift switch, registration switch
Check if the registration Run maintenance item U032 and select the registration clutch on
clutch malfunctions. the touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and rem-
edy if necessary.
Electrical problem with the Check (see page 1-4-57).
registration clutch.

1-4-17
2KR/2KS

Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures

(21) Broken feedshift switch or Check visually and replace switch.
A paper jam in the duplex paper conveying
duplex section is indi- switch actuator.
cated during copying
Defective switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually.
(jam in duplex paper
Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the
conveying section 1).
touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Jam code 60
Feedshift switch, duplex paper conveying switch
(22) Broken duplex paper con- Check visually and replace switch.
A paper jam in the veying switch or feed switch
duplex section is indi- 1 actuator.
cated during copying
Defective switch. Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually.
(jam in duplex paper
Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the
conveying section 2).
touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Jam code 61
Duplex paper conveying switch, feed switch 1
(23) Defective original feed Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original feed switch on
An original jams in switch. and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corre-
DP is indicated dur- sponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
ing copying (no origi-
Defective original feed Run maintenance item U243 and select original feed motor on the
nal feed).
motor. touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy
Jam code 70
if necessary.
Defective tray upper limit Run maintenance item U244 and turn the tray upper limit switch
switch. on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corre-
sponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Defective original lift motor. Run maintenance item U243 and select original lift motor on the
touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy
if necessary.
(24) Defective switch. Run maintenance item U244 and turn the following switch on and
An original jams in off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding
DP is indicated dur- switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
ing copying (jam in Original feed switch, original registration switch
the original feed sec-
Defective motor. Run maintenance item U243 and select the following motor on the
tion).
touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy
Jam code 71
if necessary.
Original feed motor, original conveying motor
(25) Defective DP timing switch Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch 1 on
An original jams in 1. and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corre-
DP is indicated dur- sponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
ing copying (jam in Defective motor. Run maintenance item U243 and select the following motor on the
the original convey- touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy
ing section). if necessary.
Jam code 72 Original feed motor, original conveying motor
(26) Defective switch. Run maintenance item U244 and turn the following switch on and
An original jams in off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding
DP is indicated dur- switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
ing copying (jam in Original registration switch, DP timing switch 1/2
the original registra- Defective motor. Run maintenance item U243 and select the following motor on the
tion section). touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy
Jam code 73 if necessary.
Original feed motor, original conveying motor

1-4-18
 2KR/2KS

Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures

(27) Defective switch. Run maintenance item U244 and turn the following switch on and
An original jams in off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding
DP is indicated dur- switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
ing copying (jam in DP timing switch1, original feed switch, original registration switch
the original feed sec- Defective motor. Run maintenance item U243 and select the following motor on the
tion). touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy
Jam code 74 if necessary.
Original feed motor, original conveying motor
(28) Defective switch. Run maintenance item U244 and turn the following switch on and
An original jams in off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding
DP is indicated dur- switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
ing copying (jam in Original registration switch, DP timing switch 1/2
the original convey- Defective motor. Run maintenance item U243 and select the following motor on the
ing section). touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy
Jam code 75 if necessary.
Original feed motor, original conveying motor
(29) Defective switch. Run maintenance item U244 and turn the following switch on and
An original jams in off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding
DP is indicated dur- switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
ing copying (jam in DP timing switch 1, switchback tray switch
the original switch- Defective motor. Run maintenance item U243 and select the following motor on the
back section 1). touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy
Jam code 76 if necessary.
Original conveying motor, original switchback motor
(30) Defective original registra- Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original registration
An original jams in tion switch. switch on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the
DP is indicated dur- corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in
ing copying (jam in reverse.
the original switch- Defective motor. Run maintenance item U243 and select the following motor on the
back section 2). touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy
Jam code 77 if necessary.
Original switchback motor, original feed motor
(31) A piece of paper torn from Check visually and remove it, if any.
A original jam in the original is caught around
DP is indicated as original feed switch, original
soon as the main registration switch or DP
power switch is timing switch 1/2.
turned on.
Defective switch. Run maintenance item U244 and turn the following switch on and
(DP cover open
off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding
JAM). switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
Jam code 78 Original feed switch, original registration switch, DP timing switch
1/2
(32) Defective switch. Run maintenance item U244 and turn the following switch on and
An original jams in off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding
DP is indicated dur- switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
ing copying (jam in DP timing switch 1, original eject switch
the original eject sec- Defective motor. Run maintenance item U243 and select the following motor on the
tion). touch panel to be turned on and off. Check the status and remedy
Jam code 79 if necessary.
Original feed motor, original switchback motor

1-4-19
2KR/2KS

Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures

(33) Defective paper entry sen- (3000-sheet document finisher)
A paper jam in fin- sor. Run maintenance item U241 and turn the paper entry sensor on
isher is indicated dur- and off manually. Replace the sensor if indication of the corre-
ing copying (jam sponding sensor on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
between finisher and
machine).
Jam code 80
(34) 3000-sheet document finisher
A paper jam in fin-
Extremely curled paper. Change the paper.
isher is indicated dur-
ing copying (paper Defective paper entry sen- Run maintenance item U241 and turn the paper entry sensor on
jam during paper sor. and off manually. Replace the sensor if indication of the corre-
insertion to the fin- sponding sensor on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
isher).
Jam code 81 Defective finisher main Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation.
PWB.
Document finisher
Extremely curled paper. Change the paper.
Defective paper entry sen- With 5 V DC present at CN3-1 and CN3-3 on the finisher main
sor. PWB, check if CN3-2and CN3-4 on the finisher main PWB
remains low or high when the paper entry sensor is turned on and
off. If it does, replace the paper entry sensor.
Defective finisher main Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation.
PWB.
Built-in finisher
Extremely curled paper. Replace the paper.
Defective paper conveying With 5 V DC present at YC2-23 on the finisher control PWB,
switch. check if YC2-21 on the finisher control PWB remains low or high
when the paper conveying switch is turned on and off. If it does,
replace the paper conveying switch.
Check if the feedshift roller Check and remedy.
or feedshift pulley is
deformed.
(35) 3000-sheet document finisher/Document finisher
A paper jam in fin-
Defective staple home posi- Run maintenance item U241 and turn the staple home position
isher is indicated dur-
tion sensor. sensor on and off manually. Replace the sensor if indication of the
ing copying (finisher
corresponding sensor on the touch panel is not displayed in
stapler jam).
reverse.
Jam code 82
Built-in finisher
The stapler is blocked with Remove the stapler cartridge, and check the cartridge and the sta-
a staple. pling section of the stapler. Remove the staple if any.
Defective stapler section. With 5 V DC present at YC2-24 on the finisher control PWB,
check if YC2-19 on the finisher control PWB remains low or high.
If it does, replace the stapler section.

1-4-20
 2KR/2KS

Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures

(36) 3000-sheet document finisher
A paper jam in fin-
Defective eject switch 1. Run maintenance item U241 and turn eject switch 1 on and off
isher is indicated dur-
manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding
ing copying (eject
switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
sensor stay jam).
Jam code 83 Document finisher
Defective eject paper sen- With 5 V DC present at CN7-1 on the finisher main PWB, check if
sor. CN7-3 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the
eject paper sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the eject
paper sensor.
Check if the paper convey- Check and remedy.
ing motor malfunctions.
Check if the eject roller and Check and remedy.
eject pulley contact each
other.
Check if the eject guide is Check and remedy.
deformed.
Defective finisher main Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation.
PWB.
Built-in finisher
Defective paper conveying With 5 V DC present at YC2-23 on the finisher control PWB,
switch. check if YC2-21 on the finisher control PWB remains low when
the paper conveying switch is turned on and off. If it does, replace
the paper conveying switch.
Check if the feedshift roller Check and remedy.
or feedshift pulley is
deformed.
(37) Defective eject switch 2. Run maintenance item U241 and turn eject switch 2 on and off
A paper jam in fin- manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding
isher is indicated dur- switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
ing copying (right sub
tray eject jam).
Jam code 84
(38) Defective eject switch 3. Run maintenance item U241 and turn eject switch 3 on and off
A paper jam in fin- manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding
isher is indicated dur- switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
ing copying (left sub
tray eject jam).
Jam code 85
(39) Defective internal tray Run maintenance item U241 and turn internal tray paper entry
A paper jam in fin- paper entry sensor 1. sensor 1 on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of
isher is indicated dur- the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in
ing copying (internal reverse.
tray paper entry sen-
sor 1 jam).
Jam code 86
(40) Defective inner tray paper Run maintenance item U241 and turn inner tray paper entry sen-
A paper jam in fin- entry sensor 2. sor 2 on and off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the
isher is indicated dur- corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in
ing copying (inner reverse.
tray paper entry sen-
sor 2 jam).
Jam code 87

1-4-21
2KR/2KS

Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures

(41) Defective eject switch 1. Run maintenance item U241 and turn eject switch 1 on and off
A paper jam in fin- manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding
isher is indicated dur- switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
ing copying (main
tray eject jam).
Jam code 88
(42) Defective sensor/switch. Run maintenance item U241 and turn the following switch on and
A paper jam in fin- off manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding
isher is indicated dur- switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
ing copying (center- Centerfold paper entry sensor, centerfold eject switch, centerfold
folding unit jam). paper conveying sensor
Jam code 89
(43) Defective tray eject sensor. Run maintenance item U241 and turn tray eject sensor on and off
A paper jam in fin- manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding
isher is indicated dur- switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse.
ing copying (mailbox
jam).
Jam code 90
(44) Defective switchback sen- With 5 V DC present at CN3-5 on the finisher main PWB, check if
A paper jam in fin- sor. CN3-7 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the
isher is indicated dur- switchback sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the
ing copying switchback sensor.
(switchback sensor
Check if the switchback Check.
jam).
motor malfunctions.
Jam code 93
Check if the switchback Check and remedy.
roller and switchback pul-
ley contact each other.
Check if the switchback Check and remedy.
guide is deformed.
Defective finisher main Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation.
PWB.
(45) Extremely curled paper. Change the paper.
A paper jam in fin-
Defective paper entry sen- With 5 V DC present at CN3-1and CN3-3 on the finisher main
isher is indicated dur-
sor. PWB, check if CN3-2 and CN3-4 on the main PCB remains low or
ing copying (paper
high when the paper entry sensor is turned on and off. If it does,
entry sensor stay
replace the paper entry sensor.
jam).
Jam code 94 Check if the paper entry Check and remedy.
guide is deformed.
Defective finisher main Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation.
PWB.

1-4-22
 2KR/2KS

Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures

(46) Defective paper conveying With 5 V DC present at CN9-1 on the finisher main PWB, check if
A paper jam in fin- sensor. CN9-3 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the
isher is indicated dur- paper conveying sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the
ing copying (paper paper conveying sensor.
conveying sensor
Check if the paper convey- Check.
jam).
ing motor malfunctions.
Jam code 95
Check if the paper convey- Check and remedy.
ing roller and paper convey-
ing pulley contact each
other.
Check if the paper convey- Check and remedy.
ing guide is deformed.
Defective finisher main Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation.
PWB.
(47) Defective intermediate tray With 5 V DC present at YC3-1 on the finisher control PWB, check
A paper jam in built- sensor. if YC3-2 on the finisher control PWB remains low or high when the
in finisher is indicated intermediate tray sensor is turned on and off. If it does, replace the
during copying (jam intermediate tray sensor.
between finisher and
machine).
Jam code 96

1-4-23
2KR/2KS

1-4-2 Self-diagnosis

(1) Self-diagnostic function

This unit is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, copying is disabled and the problem dis-
played as a code consisting of C followed by a number, indicating the nature of the problem.
A message is also displayed requesting the user to call for service.
After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by turning safety switches off and back on.

List of system errors

When an unexpected error is detected for some reason, a system error will be indicated. (When 0800 error is detected,
JAM05 is indicated.) After a system error is indicated, the error can be cleared by turning the power switch off and then on.
If the error is detected continuously, however, perform the operation shown in Table 1-4-1. If a system error occurs fre-
quently, a fault may have occurred. Check the details of the C call to take proper measures.

System error Contents Operation

0800 Image processing problem Repetition of JAM05 → System error → JAM05
1800 Paper feeder communication error (optional System error → service call → partial operation
paper feeder)
4100 BD initialization problem System error → Normal service call processing
8800 Document finisher communication error System error → service call → partial operation
(optional 3000-sheet document finisher)
9000 DP communication problem (optional DP) System error → service call → partial operation

Table 1-4-1
In addition, it is a system error if the following error code is displayed. When an error has occurred, clear the error by
turning the main power switch off then on.
CF1XX, CF2XX, CF3XX, CF4XX, CF5XX, CF6XX, CF7XX, CFAXX, CFBXX, 0xFBXX

Partial operation control

If one of the following service codes is detected, partial operation control will be activated. Take actions to clear the cause
of the trouble and perform maintenance item U906 to reset partial operation control.

Code Contents
C0840 Faults of RTC
C1010 Lift motor 1 error
C1020 Lift motor 2 error
C1030 PF lift motor 1 error (optional paper feeder)
C1040 PF lift motor 2 error (optional paper feeder)
C1100 PF lift motor 1 error (optional 3000-sheet paper feeder)
C1110 PF lift motor 2 error (optional 3000-sheet paper feeder)
C1120 PF left lift position problem (optional 3000-sheet paper feeder)
C1130 PF right lift position problem (optional 3000-sheet paper feeder)
C2600 PF paper conveying/drive motor error (optional 3000-sheet paper feeder/paper feeder)
C3210 CIS lamp problem
C3310 CIS AGC problem
C8020 Punch motor problem (optional 3000-sheet document finisher)
C8030 Tray upper limit detection problem (optional document finisher)
C8040 Belt problem (optional document finisher)
C8050 Paper conveying belt motor 1 problem (optional 3000-sheet document finisher)
C8060 Paper conveying belt motor 2 problem (optional 3000-sheet document finisher)
C8070 Inner tray communication error (optional 3000-sheet document finisher)

1-4-24
 2KR/2KS

Code Contents
C8140 Main tray problem (optional 3000-sheet document finisher)
Tray elevation motor problem (optional document finisher)
C8170 Side registration motor 1 problem (optional 3000-sheet document finisher)
Finisher front side registration motor problem (optional built-in finisher)
C8180 Side registration motor 2 problem (optional 3000-sheet document finisher)
Finisher rear side registration motor problem (optional built-in finisher)
C8190 Finisher trailing edge registration motor problem (optional built-in finisher)
C8210 Stapler moving motor 1 error (optional 3000-sheet document finisher)
Stapler problem (optional document finisher)
Finisher stapler problem (optional built-in finisher)
C8220 Stapler moving motor 2 error (optional 3000-sheet document finisher)
C8230 Stapler motor problem (optional 3000-sheet document finisher)
C8300 Center-folding unit communication error (optional center-folding unit of 3000-sheet document finisher)
C8310 Centerfold side registration motor 2 problem (optional center-folding unit of 3000-sheet document finisher)
C8320 Centerfold paper conveying belt motor problem (optional center-folding unit of 3000-sheet document finisher)
Adjustment motor 2 problem (optional document finisher)
C8330 Blade motor problem (optional center-folding unit of 3000-sheet document finisher)
Adjustment motor 1 problem (optional document finisher)
C8340 Centerfold staple motor problem (optional center-folding unit of 3000-sheet document finisher)
C8350 Centerfold side registration motor 1 problem (optional center-folding unit of 3000-sheet document finisher)
Roller motor problem (optional document finisher)
C8360 Centerfold main motor problem (optional center-folding unit of 3000-sheet document finisher)
Slide motor problem (optional document finisher)
C8440 Sensor adjusting problem (optional document finisher)
C8460 EEPROM problem (optional document finisher)
C8500 Mailbox communication error (optional mailbox of 3000-sheet document finisher)
C8510 Mailbox drive motor problem (optional mailbox of 3000-sheet document finisher)
C9040 DP lift motor going up error (optional DP)
C9050 DP lift motor going down error (optional DP)
C9060 DP EEPROM error (optional DP)
C9070 Communication problem between DP and SHD (optional DP)
C9080 Communication problem between DP and CIS (optional DP)

Measures against the service codes detecting fuser problems

If one of the following service codes is detected, take actions to clear the cause of the trouble and perform maintenance
item U163 to reset the service code.

Code Contents
C6000 Fuser heater break
C6020 Abnormally high fuser thermistor temperature
C6030 Fuser thermistor break error
C6040 Fuser thermistor 1 detection error
C6050 Abnormally low fuser thermistor temperature
C6400 Zero-cross signal error

1-4-25
2KR/2KS

(2) Self diagnostic codes

Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C0030 Fax control PWB system problem Defective fax con- Replace the fax control PWB and verify the
Processing with the fax software was trol PWB. operation.
disabled due to a hardware or software
problem.
C0060 Main PWB type mismatch error Defective PWB. Run maintenance item U935 to contact the
Service Administrative Division.
C0070 Abnormal detection of fax control Defective fax soft- Install the fax software.
PWB incompatibility ware.
In the initial communication with the fax
Defective fax con- Replace the fax control PWB and verify the
control PWB, any normal communication
trol PWB. operation.
command is not transmitted.
C0100 Backup memory (EEPROM) device Defective main Replace the main PWB and check for cor-
problem (Main PWB) PWB. rect operation.
Reading from or writing to EEPROM
Device damage of Contact the Service Administrative Division.
cannot be performed.
EEPROM.
C0120 MAC address data error Defective main Replace the main PWB and check for cor-
For data in which the MAC address is PWB. rect operation.
invalid.
C0150 Backup memory (EEPROM) device Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor-
problem (Engine PWB) PWB. rect operation.
No response is issued from the device in
Device damage of Contact the Service Administrative Division.
reading/writing for 5 ms or more and this
EEPROM.
problem is repeated five times succes-
sively.
Mismatch of reading data from two loca-
tions occurs eight times successively.
Mismatch between writing data and
reading data occurs eight times succes-
sively.
C0160 Backup memory (EEPROM) data Data damage of Contact the Service Administrative Division.
problem (Engine PWB) EEPROM.
Reading data from EEPROM is abnor-
mal.
C0170 Copy counts problem Data damage of Contact the Service Administrative Division.
A checksum error is detected in the main EEPROM.
and engine backup memories for the
Defective PWB. Replace the main PWB or engine PWB and
copy counters.
check for correct operation.
C0180 Machine number mismatch error Data damage of Contact the Service Administrative Division.
Machine number of main PWB and EEPROM.
engine PWB does not match.
C0620 FAX image DIMM problem DIMM installed Check if the DIMM is inserted into the socket
DIMM is not installed correctly. incorrectly. on the main PWB correctly.
DIMM cannot be accessed.
Defective main Replace the main PWB and check for cor-
PWB. rect operation.

1-4-26
 2KR/2KS

Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C0630 DMA problem Poor contact in the Check the connection the signal cable for
DMA transmission of image data does connector termi- CIS and the main PWB, and the continuity
not complete within the specified period nals. across the connector terminals. Repair or
of time. replace if necessary.
Defective main Replace the main PWB and check for cor-
PWB. rect operation.
C0640 Hard disk drive problem Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC49 on
The hard disk cannot be accessed. connector termi- the main PWB and the connector on the
nals. hard disk. Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective hard Run U024 (HDD formatting) without turning
disk. the power off to initialize the hard disk.
Replace the hard disk drive and check for
correct operation if the problem is still
detected after initialization.
Defective main Replace the main PWB and check for cor-
PWB. rect operation.
C0650 FAX image DIMM check problem DIMM installed Check if the DIMM is inserted into the socket
Improper DIMM is installed. incorrectly. on the main PWB correctly.
DIMM of another Perform maintenance mode U671 (RECOV-
machine is ERY FAX DIMM).
installed.
Defective main Replace the main PWB and check for cor-
PWB. rect operation.
C0800 Image processing problem Defective main Replace the main PWB and check for cor-
JAM05 is detected twice. PWB. rect operation.
C0830 Fax control PWB flash program area Defective fax soft- Install the fax software.
checksum error ware.
A checksum error occurred with the pro-
Defective fax con- Replace the fax control PWB and verify the
gram of the fax control PWB.
trol PWB. operation.
C0840 Faults of RTC Defective main Replace the main PWB and check for cor-
The time is judged to go back based on PWB. rect operation.
the comparison of the RTC time and the
The battery is dis- Check visually and remedy if necessary.
current time or five years or more have
connected from the
passed.
main PWB.
C0870 Fax control PWB to main PWB high Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector on the
capacity data transfer problem connector termi- interface PWB and the connector on the fax
High-capacity data transfer between the nals. control PWB, and the continuity across the
fax control PWB and the scanner MIP connector terminals. Repair or replace if
PWB was not normally performed even if necessary.
the data transfer was retried 10 times.
Defective PWB. Replace the fax control PWB or main PWB
and check for correct operation.
C0920 Fax file system error Defective fax con- Replace the fax control PWB and verify the
The backup data is not retained for file trol PWB. operation.
system abnormality of flash memory of
the fax control PWB.

1-4-27
2KR/2KS

Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C1010 Lift motor 1 error Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector of lift
After cassette 1 is inserted, lift switch 1 connector termi- motor 1 and the connector YC8 on the
does not turn on within 12 s. This error is nals. engine PWB, and the continuity across the
detected four times successively. connector terminals. Repair or replace if
necessary.
Broken gears or Replace lift motor 1.
couplings of lift
motor 1.
Defective lift motor Check for continuity across the coil. If none,
1. replace lift motor 1.
Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector of lift
connector termi- switch 1 and the connector YC8 on the
nals. engine PWB, and the continuity across the
connector terminals. Repair or replace if
necessary.
Defective lift switch Check if YC8-B9 on the engine PWB goes
1. low when lift switch 1 is turned off. If not,
replace lift switch 1.
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor-
PWB. rect operation.
C1020 Lift motor 2 error Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector of lift
After cassette 2 is inserted, lift switch 2 connector termi- motor 2 and the connector YC8 on the
does not turn on within 12 s. This error is nals. engine PWB, and the continuity across the
detected four times successively. connector terminals. Repair or replace if
necessary.
Broken gears or Replace lift motor 2.
couplings of lift
motor 2.
Defective lift motor Check for continuity across the coil. If none,
2. replace lift motor 2.
Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector of lift
connector termi- switch 2 and the connector YC8 on the
nals. engine PWB, and the continuity across the
connector terminals. Repair or replace if
necessary.
Defective lift switch Check if YC8-B15 on the engine PWB goes
2. low when lift switch 2 is turned off. If not,
replace lift switch 2.
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor-
PWB. rect operation.

1-4-28
 2KR/2KS

Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C1030 PF lift motor 1 error (optional paper Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC15 on
feeder) connector termi- the engine PWB and the connector on the
After cassette 3 is inserted, PF lift switch nals. PF main PWB, and the continuity across the
1 does not turn on within 12 s. This error connector terminals. Repair or replace if
is detected two times successively. necessary.
During driving the motor, the lift overcur-
Broken gears or Replace PF lift motor 1.
rent protective monitor signal is detected
couplings of PF lift
for 500 ms or more two times succes-
motor 1.
sively. However, the first 1 s after PF lift
motor 1 is turned on is excluded from Defective PF lift Check for continuity across the coil. If none,
detection. motor 1. replace PF lift motor 1.
Defective PF lift Check if YC1-7 on the PF main PWB goes
switch 1. low when PF lift switch 1 is turned off. If not,
replace PF lift switch 1.
C1040 PF lift motor 2 error (optional paper Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC15 on
feeder) connector termi- the engine PWB and the connector on the
After cassette 4 is inserted, PF lift switch nals. PF main PWB, and the continuity across the
2 does not turn on within 12 s. This error connector terminals. Repair or replace if
is detected two times successively. necessary.
During driving the motor, the lift overcur-
Broken gears or Replace PF lift motor 2.
rent protective monitor signal is detected
couplings of PF lift
for 500 ms or more two times succes-
motor 2.
sively. However, the first 1 s after PF lift
motor 2 is turned on is excluded from Defective PF lift Check for continuity across the coil. If none,
detection. motor 2. replace PF lift motor 2.
Defective PF lift Check if YC1-9 on the PF main PWB goes
switch 2. low when PF lift switch 2 is turned off. If not,
replace PF lift switch 2.
C1100 PF lift motor 1 error (optional 3000- Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC15 on
sheet paper feeder) connector termi- the engine PWB and the connector on the
A motor over-current signal is detected nals. PF main PWB, and the continuity across the
continuously for 1 s or longer. connector terminals. Repair or replace if
necessary.
PF lift motor 1 does Check the gears and remedy if necessary.
not rotate correctly
(the motor is over-
loaded).
C1110 PF lift motor 2 error (optional 3000- Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC15 on
sheet paper feeder) connector termi- the engine PWB and the connector on the
A motor over-current signal is detected nals. PF main PWB, and the continuity across the
continuously for 1 s or longer. connector terminals. Repair or replace if
necessary.
PF lift motor 2 does Check the gears and remedy if necessary.
not rotate correctly
(the motor is over-
loaded).

1-4-29
2KR/2KS

Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C1120 PF left lift position problem (optional Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC15 on
3000-sheet paper feeder) connector termi- the engine PWB and the connector on the
Level switch 1 does not turn on within 30 nals. PF main PWB, and the continuity across the
s of PF lift motor 1 turning on. connector terminals. Repair or replace if
necessary.
Defective level Check if YC5-4 on the PF main PWB goes
switch 1. low when level switch 1 is turned off. If not,
replace level switch 1.
Defective PF lift Check for continuity across the coil. If none,
motor 1. replace PF lift motor 1.
The PF left lift does Check the gears and belts, and remedy if
not rise properly. necessary.
C1130 PF right lift position problem (optional Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC15 on
3000-sheet paper feeder) connector termi- the engine PWB and the connector on the
Level switch 2 does not turn on within 30 nals. PF main PWB, and the continuity across the
s of PF lift motor 2 turning on. connector terminals. Repair or replace if
necessary.
Defective level Check if YC5-7 on the PF main PWB goes
switch 2. low when level switch 2 is turned off. If not,
replace level switch 2.
Defective PF lift Check for continuity across the coil. If none,
motor 2. replace PF lift motor 2.
The PF right lift Check the gears and belts, and remedy if
does not rise prop- necessary.
erly.
C1800 Paper feeder communication error Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC15 on
(optional paper feeder) connector termi- the engine PWB and the connector on the
A communication error from paper nals. PF main PWB, and the continuity across the
feeder is detected 10 times in succes- connector terminals. Repair or replace if
sion. necessary.
Defective PWB. Replace the PF main PWB or engine PWB
and check for correct operation.
C1900 Paper feeder EEPROM error (optional Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC15 on
paper feeder) connector termi- the engine PWB and the connector on the
When writing the data, the write data and nals. PF main PWB, and the continuity across the
the read data is not continuously in connector terminals. Repair or replace if
agreement three times. necessary.
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor-
PWB. rect operation.
Defective paper Replace the paper feeder with another unit
feeder. and check the operation. If the operation is
normal, replace or repair optional paper
feeder.

1-4-30
 2KR/2KS

Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C2000 Drive motor problem Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC11 on
Stable OFF is detected for 1 s continu- connector termi- the engine PWB and the connector on the
ously after drive motor stability. nals. drive motor, and the continuity across the
The drive motor is not stabilized in 6 s connector terminals. Repair or replace if
since the motor is activated. necessary.
Defective drive Check if the rollers and gears rotate
transmission sys- smoothly. If not, grease the bushings and
tem. gears. Check for broken gears and replace if
any.
Defective drive Replace the drive motor.
motor.
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor-
PWB. rect operation.
C2250 Main charger cleaning motor error Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC5 on
A locking error has been detected three connector termi- the engine PWB and the connector on the
times in a row during a reciprocating nals. main charger cleaning motor, and the conti-
cleaning motion. nuity across the connector terminals. Repair
or replace if necessary.
Defective drive Check if the rollers and gears rotate
transmission sys- smoothly. If not, grease the bushings and
tem. gears. Check for broken gears and replace if
any.
Defective main Replace the main charger cleaning motor.
charger cleaning
motor.
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor-
PWB. rect operation.
C2500 Paper feed motor error Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC11 on
Stable OFF is detected for 1 s continu- connector termi- the engine PWB and the connector on the
ously after paper feed motor stability. nals. paper feed motor, and the continuity across
The paper feed motor is not stabilized in the connector terminals. Repair or replace if
6 s since the motor is activated. necessary.
Defective drive Check if the rollers and gears rotate
transmission sys- smoothly. If not, grease the bushings and
tem. gears. Check for broken gears and replace if
any.
Defective paper Replace the paper feed motor.
feed motor.
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor-
PWB. rect operation.

1-4-31
2KR/2KS

Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C2600 PF paper conveying/drive motor error Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC15 on
(optional 3000-sheet paper feeder/ connector termi- the engine PWB and the connector on the
paper feeder) nals. PF main PWB, and the continuity across the
The lock signal of the motor is detected connector terminals. Repair or replace if
above 450 ms. necessary.
Defective drive Check if the rollers and gears rotate
transmission sys- smoothly. If not, grease the bushings and
tem. gears. Check for broken gears and replace if
any.
Defective PF paper Replace the PF paper conveying/drive
conveying/drive motor.
motor.
Defective PWB. Replace the PF main PWB or engine PWB
and check for correct operation.
C3100 Scanner carriage problem Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC8 on
The home position is not correct when connector termi- the ISM PWB and the connector of the
the power is turned on or at the start of nals. home position switch, and the connection of
copying using the table. connector YC7 on the ISM PWB and the
connector on the scanner motor and the
continuity across the connector terminals.
Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective home Replace the scanner home position switch.
position switch.
Defective scanner Replace the scanner motor.
motor.
The mirror frame, Check if the mirror flames and exposure
exposure lamp, or lamp are on the rail. And check the scanner
scanner wire is wire winds correctly.
defective.
Defective PWB. Replace the ISM PWB or ISC PWB and
check for correct operation.
C3200 Exposure lamp problem Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC5 on
When input value at the time of exposure connector termi- the ISM PWB and the connector on the
lamp illumination does not exceed the nals. inverter PWB, and the continuity across the
threshold value between 5 s. connector terminals. Repair or replace if
necessary.
Defective exposure Replace the exposure lamp or inverter
lamp or inverter PWB.
PWB.
Incorrect shading Adjust the position of the contact glass
position. (shading plate). If the problem still occurs,
replace the home position switch.
Defective PWB. Replace the ISM PWB, ISC PWB or CCD
PWB and check for correct operation.

1-4-32
 2KR/2KS

Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C3210 CIS lamp problem Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector on the
When input value at the time of CIS illu- connector termi- ISM PWB and the connector on the DP
mination does not exceed the threshold nals. driver PWB, and the continuity across the
value between 5 s. connector terminals. Repair or replace if
necessary.
Defective DP driver Replace the DP driver PWB and check for
PWB. correct operation.
Defective DP Replace the DP inverter PWB and check for
inverter PWB. correct operation.
Defective CIS. Replace the CIS and check for correct oper-
ation.
C3300 Optical system (AGC) problem Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC5 on
After AGC, correct input is not obtained connector termi- the ISM PWB and the connector on the
at CCD. nals. inverter PWB, and the continuity across the
connector terminals. Repair or replace if
necessary.
Defective exposure Replace the exposure lamp or inverter
lamp or inverter PWB.
PWB.
Defective PWB. Replace the ISM PWB, ISC PWB or CCD
PWB and check for correct operation.
C3310 CIS AGC problem Defective DP driver Replace the DP driver PWB and check for
After AGC, correct input is not obtained PWB. correct operation.
at CIS.
CIS output prob- Replace the CIS and check for correct oper-
lem. ation.
Defective DP Replace the DP inverter PWB and check for
inverter PWB. correct operation.
C3500 Communication error between scan- Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC2 on
ner and SHD connector termi- the CCD PWB and the connector YC2 on
An error code is detected. nals. the ISC PWB, and the continuity across the
connector terminals. Repair or replace if
necessary.
Defective PWB. Replace the CCD PWB or ISC PWB and
check for correct operation.
C3900 Backup memory read/write problem Defective backup Replace the ISC PWB or ISM PWB and
(ISC PWB) RAM or PWB. check for correct operation.
Read and write data does not match.
C3910 Backup memory data problem (ISC Defective backup Replace the ISC PWB or ISM PWB and
PWB) RAM or PWB. check for correct operation.
Data in the specified area of the backup
memory does not match the specified
values.
C4000 Polygon motor synchronization prob- Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC3 on
lem connector termi- the engine PWB and laser scanner unit, and
The polygon motor does not reach the nals. the continuity across the connector termi-
stable speed within 20 s of the START nals. Repair or replace if necessary.
signal turning on.
Defective polygon Replace the laser scanner unit.
motor.
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor-
PWB. rect operation.

1-4-33
2KR/2KS

Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C4010 Polygon motor steady-state problem Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC3 on
Stable OFF is detected for 20 s continu- connector termi- the engine PWB and laser scanner unit, and
ously after polygon motor stability. nals. the continuity across the connector termi-
nals. Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective polygon Replace the laser scanner unit.
motor.
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor-
PWB. rect operation.
C4100 BD initialization problem Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC3 on
5 consecutive BD errors were detected connector termi- the engine PWB and laser scanner unit, and
during an 800 ms interval after the poly- nals. the continuity across the connector termi-
gon motor stabilized. nals. Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective polygon Replace the laser scanner unit.
motor.
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor-
PWB. rect operation.
C6000 Fuser heater break Defective fuser Replace the fuser heater 1 or 2.
Fuser thermistor 1 detected less than heater 1 or 2.
70°C/158°F for 10 s during warm-up and
Installation defec- Check the mounting state of the fuser ther-
ready in.
tiveness on fuser mistor 1. If any problem is found, repair it.
During warm-up, the temperature at the
thermistor 1 or 2.
fuser unit thermistor 1 does not rise by
1°C/1.8°F continuously for 5 s. Defective fuser Replace the fuser thermostat.
Fuser thermistor 2 detected less than thermostat.
40°C/104°F for 10 s during warm-up and
ready in. Defective PWB. Replace the power source PWB or engine
During warm-up, the temperature at the PWB and check for correct operation.
fuser unit thermistor 2 does not rise by
1°C/1.8°F continuously for 5 s.
C6020 Abnormally high fuser thermistor Installation defec- Check the mounting state of the fuser ther-
temperature tiveness on fuser mistor 1 or 2. If any problem is found, repair
Fuser thermistor 1 or 2 is detected thermistor 1 or 2. it.
250°C/482°F or more for 40 ms.
Defective fuser Replace the fuser thermistor 1 or 2.
thermistor unit 1 or
2.
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor-
PWB. rect operation.
C6030 Fuser thermistor break error Installation defec- Check the mounting state of the fuser ther-
The fuser thermistor break signal is tiveness on fuser mistor 1 or 2. If any problem is found, repair
detected continuously for 1 s. thermistor 1 or 2. it.
Defective fuser Replace the fuser thermistor 1 or 2.
thermistor 1 or 2.
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor-
PWB. rect operation.

1-4-34
 2KR/2KS

Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C6040 Fuser thermistor 1 detection error Installation defec- Check the mounting state of the fuser ther-
Fuser thermistor 1 detected an abnormal tiveness on fuser mistor 1. If any problem is found, repair it.
value for at least 1 s. thermistor 1.
Defective fuser Replace the fuser thermistor 1.
thermistor 1.
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor-
PWB. rect operation.
C6050 Abnormally low fuser thermistor tem- Defective fuser Replace the fuser heater 1 or 2.
perature heater 1 or 2.
Fuser thermistor 1 is detected 80°C/
Installation defec- Check the mounting state of the fuser ther-
176°F less than 1 s continuously during
tiveness on fuser mistor 1. If any problem is found, repair it.
copying.
thermistor 1.
Defective PWB. Replace the power source PWB or engine
PWB and check for correct operation.
C6400 Zero-cross signal error Defective PWB. Replace the power source PWB or engine
While fuser heater ON/OFF control is PWB and check for correct operation.
performed, the zero-cross signal is not
input within 3 s.
C6410 Fuser unit connector insertion prob- Fuser unit connec- Reinsert the fuser unit connector if neces-
lem tor inserted incor- sary.
Absence of the fuser unit is detected. rectly.
Defective fuser unit Replace the fuser unit.
connector.
C7300 Toner container problem Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC5 on
Toner level is not detected when toner connector termi- the engine PWB and the continuity across
empty is detected. nals. the connector terminals. Repair or replace if
necessary.
Defective toner Replace the toner container sensor.
container sensor.
C7400 Developing unit connector insertion Developing unit Reinsert the developing unit connector if
problem connector inserted necessary.
Absence of the developing unit is incorrectly.
detected.
Defective develop- Replace the developing unit.
ing unit connector.
C7410 Drum unit connector insertion prob- Drum unit connec- Reinsert the drum unit connector if neces-
lem tor inserted incor- sary.
Absence of the drum unit is detected. rectly.
Defective drum unit Replace the drum unit.
connector.
C7800 Broken external thermistor wire Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC10 on
The thermistor output value is 4.5 V or connector termi- the engine PWB and the continuity across
more. nals. the connector terminals. Repair or replace if
necessary.
Defective humidity Replace the humidity sensor.
sensor.

1-4-35
2KR/2KS

Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C7900 Drum EEPROM error Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector on the
Reading from or writing to EEPROM connector termi- engine PWB and the continuity across the
cannot be performed. nals. connector terminals. Repair or replace if
necessary.
Defective drum Replace the drum unit.
unit.
C7910 Developing unit EEPROM error Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector on the
Reading from or writing to EEPROM connector termi- engine PWB and the continuity across the
cannot be performed. nals. connector terminals. Repair or replace if
necessary.
Defective develop- Replace the developing unit.
ing unit.
C8020 Punch motor problem (optional 3000- Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector on the
sheet document finisher) connector termi- punch PWB and the continuity across the
The error signal of the punch motor is nals. connector terminals. Repair or replace if
detected for more than 500 ms while the necessary.
punch motor is operating.
Defective punch Replace the punch motor.
motor.
Defective PWB. Replace the punch PWB or finisher main
PWB and check for correct operation.
C8030 Tray upper limit detection problem The tray upper limit Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
(optional document finisher) sensor, paper sur- nuity within the connector cable. If none,
When the tray elevation motor raises a face sensor 1/2 remedy or replace the cable.
tray, the ON status of the tray upper limit connector makes
sensor is detected. poor contact.
Defective tray Replace the sensor.
upper limit sensor,
paper surface sen-
sor 1/2.
Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check
main PWB. for correct operation.
C8040 Belt problem (optional document fin- The belt sensor, Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
isher) belt solenoid con- nuity within the connector cable. If none,
The belt sensor does not turn on/off nector makes poor remedy or replace the cable.
within specified time of the belt solenoid contact.
turning on.
Defective belt sen- Replace the belt sensor.
sor.
Defective belt sole- Replace the belt solenoid.
noid.
Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check
main PWB. for correct operation.

1-4-36
 2KR/2KS

Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C8050 Paper conveying belt motor 1 prob- Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC2 on
lem (optional 3000-sheet document connector termi- the inner tray PWB and the connector on
finisher) nals. paper conveying belt motor 1, and the conti-
Paper conveying belt home position sen- nuity across the connector terminals. Repair
sor 1 does not turn off within 1.5 s. or replace if necessary.
Paper conveying belt home position sen-
Defective paper Replace paper conveying belt home position
sor 1 does not turn on within 2.5 s.
conveying belt sensor 1.
Jam 88 is indicated.
home position sen-
sor 1.
Defective paper Replace paper conveying belt motor 1.
conveying belt
motor 1.
Defective PWB. Replace the inner tray PWB or finisher main
PWB and check for correct operation.
C8060 Paper conveying belt motor 2 prob- Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC6 on
lem (optional 3000-sheet document connector termi- the inner tray PWB and the connector on
finisher) nals. paper conveying belt motor 2, and the conti-
Paper conveying belt home position sen- nuity across the connector terminals. Repair
sor 2 does not turn off within 1.5 s. or replace if necessary.
Paper conveying belt home position sen-
Defective paper Replace paper conveying belt home position
sor 2 does not turn on within 1.5 s.
conveying belt sensor 2.
home position sen-
sor 2.
Defective paper Replace paper conveying belt motor 2.
conveying belt
motor 2.
Defective PWB. Replace the inner tray PWB or finisher main
PWB and check for correct operation.
C8070 Inner tray communication error Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC6 and
(optional 3000-sheet document fin- connector termi- YC24 on the finisher main PWB and the
isher) nals. connector YC1 and YC4 on the inner tray
Communication with the inner tray is not PWB, and the continuity across the connec-
possible although the connection is tor terminals. Repair or replace if necessary.
detected.
Defective PWB. Replace the inner tray PWB or finisher main
PWB and check for correct operation.

1-4-37
2KR/2KS

Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C8140 Main tray problem (optional 3000- Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC11 on
sheet document finisher) connector termi- the finisher main PWB and the connector on
The main tray is not detected by the nals. the main tray motor, and the continuity
main tray upper limit detection sensor or across the connector terminals. Repair or
the main tray paper upper surface detec- replace if necessary.
tion sensor within 20 s since the tray has
Defective main tray Replace the main tray motor.
started ascending.
motor.
The main tray upper limit detection sen-
sor or the main tray paper upper surface Defective main tray Replace the sensor.
detection sensor is not detected to be upper limit detec-
turned off in 20 s after the main tray has tion sensor/main
descended. tray paper upper
The main tray low limit detection sensor surface detection
is not detected to be turned on in 20 s sensor/main tray
after the main tray has descended. lower limit detec-
During main tray ascent, the main tray tion sensor.
upper limit detection sensor or the main
tray paper upper surface detection sen- Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check
sor stays on for more than 2 s. main PWB. for correct operation.

Tray elevation motor problem The tray elevation Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
(optional document finisher) motor connector nuity within the connector cable. If none,
The tray low limit sensor or paper sur- makes poor con- remedy or replace the cable.
face sensor 1/2 cannot be detected to be tact.
on within 10 s since the tray elevation
The tray elevation Replace the tray elevation motor.
motor is activated.
motor malfunc-
tions.
The tray lower limit Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
sensor, paper sur- nuity within the connector cable. If none,
face sensor 1/2 remedy or replace the cable.
connector makes
poor contact.
Defective tray Replace the sensor.
lower limit sensor,
paper surface sen-
sor 1/2.
Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check
main PWB. for correct operation.

1-4-38
 2KR/2KS

Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C8170 Side registration motor 1 problem Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC2 on
(optional 3000-sheet document fin- connector termi- the inner tray PWB and the connector on
isher) nals. side registration motor 1, and the continuity
When operation returned to a home across the connector terminals. Repair or
position is performed at the time of initial replace if necessary.
operation and a home position is not
Defective side reg- Replace side registration motor 1.
detected even if 3 s passed.
istration motor 1.
Jam 88 is indicated.
Defective PWB. Replace the inner tray PWB or finisher main
PWB and check for correct operation.
Finisher front side registration motor The front side reg- Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
problem (optional built-in finisher) istration motor con- nuity within the connector cable. If none,
When the front-side registration home- nector makes poor remedy or replace the cable.
position sensor is turned on during initial- contact.
ization, the sensor did not turn on while it
Defective front side Replace front side registration motor.
has moved by 106 pulses.
registration motor.
When the front-side registration home-
position sensor is turned off during initial- The front side reg- Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
ization, the sensor did not turn on in 3 s. istration home nuity within the connector cable. If none,
position sensor remedy or replace the cable.
connector makes
poor contact.
Defective front side Replace the front side registration home
registration home position sensor.
position sensor.
Defective finisher Replace the finisher control PWB and check
control PWB. for correct operation.
C8180 Side registration motor 2 problem Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC8 on
(optional 3000-sheet document fin- connector termi- the inner tray PWB and the connector of
isher) nals. side registration motor 2, and the continuity
When operation returned to a home across the connector terminals. Repair or
position is performed at the time of initial replace if necessary.
operation and a home position is not
Defective side reg- Replace side registration motor 2.
detected even if 3 s passed.
istration motor 2.
Jam 88 is indicated.
Defective PWB. Replace the inner tray PWB or finisher main
PWB and check for correct operation.
Finisher rear side registration motor The rear side reg- Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
problem (optional built-in finisher) istration motor con- nuity within the connector cable. If none,
When the rear-side registration home- nector makes poor remedy or replace the cable.
position sensor is turned on during initial- contact.
ization, the sensor did not turn on while it
Defective rear side Replace rear side registration motor.
has moved by 106 pulses.
registration motor.
When the rear-side registration home-
position sensor is turned off during initial- The rear side reg- Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
ization, the sensor did not turn on in 3 s. istration home nuity within the connector cable. If none,
position sensor remedy or replace the cable.
connector makes
poor contact.
Defective rear side Replace the rear side registration home
registration home position sensor.
position sensor.
Defective finisher Replace the finisher control PWB and check
control PWB. for correct operation.

1-4-39
2KR/2KS

Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C8190 Finisher trailing edge registration The trailing edge Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
motor problem (optional built-in fin- registration motor nuity within the connector cable. If none,
isher) connector makes remedy or replace the cable.
When the trailing edge registration poor contact.
home-position sensor is turned on during
Defective trailing Replace trailing edge registration motor.
initialization, the sensor did not turn on
edge registration
while it has moved by 106 pulses.
motor.
When the trailing edge registration
home-position sensor is turned off during The trailing edge Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
initialization, the sensor did not turn on in registration home nuity within the connector cable. If none,
3 s. position sensor remedy or replace the cable.
connector makes
poor contact.
Defective trailing Replace the trailing edge registration home
edge registration position sensor.
home position sen-
sor.
Defective finisher Replace the finisher control PWB and check
control PWB. for correct operation.
C8210 Stapler moving motor 1 error Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC9 on
(optional 3000-sheet document fin- connector termi- the finisher main PWB and the connector of
isher) nals. stapler moving motor 1, and the continuity
When operation returned to a home across the connector terminals. Repair or
position is performed at the time of initial replace if necessary.
operation and a home position is not
Defective stapler Replace stapler moving motor 1.
detected even if 1.5 s passed.
moving motor 1.
Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check
main PWB. for correct operation.
Stapler problem (optional document The stapler con- Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
finisher) nector makes poor nuity within the connector cable. If none,
Jam 82 is indicated. contact. remedy or replace the cable.
The stapler is Remove the stapler cartridge, and check the
blocked with a sta- cartridge and the stapling section of the sta-
ple. pler.
The stapler is bro- Replace the stapler and check for correct
ken. operation.
Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check
main PWB. for correct operation.
Finisher stapler problem (optional The stapler con- Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
built-in finisher) nector makes poor nuity within the connector cable. If none,
The stapler home position sensor does contact. remedy or replace the cable.
not change state from nondetection to
The stapler is Remove the stapler cartridge, and check the
detection within 200 ms of the start of
blocked with a sta- cartridge and the stapling section of the sta-
stapler motor counterclockwise (forward)
ple. pler.
rotation.
During initialization, the stapler home The stapler is bro- Replace the front stapler and check for cor-
position sensor does not change state ken. rect operation.
from non-detection to detection within
600 ms of the start of stapler motor Defective finisher Replace the finisher control PWB and check
clockwise (reverse) rotation. control PWB. for correct operation.

1-4-40
 2KR/2KS

Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C8220 Stapler moving motor 2 error Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC10 on
(optional 3000-sheet document fin- connector termi- the finisher main PWB and the connector of
isher) nals. staple relay PWB and stapler moving motor
When operation returned to a home 2, and the continuity across the connector
position is performed at the time of initial terminals. Repair or replace if necessary.
operation and a home position is not
Defective stapler Replace stapler moving motor 2.
detected even if 3.5 s passed.
moving motor 2.
Defective staple Replace the staple relay PWB and check for
relay PWB. correct operation.
Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check
main PWB. for correct operation.
C8230 Stapler motor problem (optional 3000- Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC10 on
sheet document finisher) connector termi- the finisher main PWB and the connector of
Jam 82 is indicated. nals. staple relay PWB and stapler motor, and the
continuity across the connector terminals.
Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective stapler Replace the stapler motor.
motor.
Defective staple Replace the staple relay PWB and check for
relay PWB. correct operation.
Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check
main PWB. for correct operation.
C8300 Center-folding unit communication Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC5 and
error (optional center-folding unit of connector termi- YC20 on the finisher main PWB and the
3000-sheet document finisher) nals. connector YC1 and YC2 on the centerfold
Communication with the center-folding main PWB, and the continuity across the
unit is not possible although the connec- connector terminals. Repair or replace if
tion is detected. necessary.
Defective center- Replace the centerfold set switch.
fold set switch.
Defective center- Replace the centerfold main PWB and
fold main PWB. check for correct operation.
Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check
main PWB. for correct operation.
C8310 Centerfold side registration motor 2 Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC6 on
problem (optional center-folding unit connector termi- the centerfold main PWB and the connector
of 3000-sheet document finisher) nals. of centerfold side registration motor 2, and
The home position is not detected when the continuity across the connector termi-
initial operation even if 1 s passed. nals. Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective center- Replace centerfold side registration motor 2.
fold side registra-
tion motor 2.
Defective PWB. Replace the centerfold main PWB or finisher
main PWB and check for correct operation.

1-4-41
2KR/2KS

Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C8320 Centerfold paper conveying belt Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC6,
motor problem (optional center-fold- connector termi- YC7 on the centerfold main PWB and the
ing unit of 3000-sheet document fin- nals. connector of centerfold paper conveying belt
isher) motor 1/2, and the continuity across the con-
The home position is not detected when nector terminals. Repair or replace if neces-
initial operation even if 2.5 s passed. sary.
Defective center- Replace centerfold paper conveying belt
fold paper convey- motor 1/2.
ing belt motor 1/2.
Defective PWB. Replace the centerfold main PWB or finisher
main PWB and check for correct operation.
Adjustment motor 2 problem The adjustment Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
(optional document finisher) sensor 2, adjust- nuity within the connector cable. If none,
The adjustment sensor 2 does not turn ment motor 2 con- remedy or replace the cable.
on/off within specified time of the adjust- nector makes poor
ment motor 2 turning on. contact.
Defective adjust- Replace the adjustment sensor 2.
ment sensor 2.
Defective adjust- Replace the adjustment motor 2.
ment motor 2.
Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check
main PWB. for correct operation.
C8330 Blade motor problem (optional cen- Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC8 on
ter-folding unit of 3000-sheet docu- connector termi- the centerfold main PWB and the connector
ment finisher) nals. of the blade motor, and the continuity across
The home position is not detected when the connector terminals. Repair or replace if
initial operation even if 1.5 s passed. necessary.
Defective blade Replace the blade motor.
motor.
Defective PWB. Replace the centerfold main PWB or finisher
main PWB and check for correct operation.
Adjustment motor 1 problem The adjustment Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
(optional document finisher) sensor 1, adjust- nuity within the connector cable. If none,
The adjustment sensor 1 does not turn ment motor 1 con- remedy or replace the cable.
on/off within specified time of the adjust- nector makes poor
ment motor 1 turning on. contact.
Defective adjust- Replace the adjustment sensor 1.
ment sensor 1.
Defective adjust- Replace the adjustment motor 1.
ment motor 1.
Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check
main PWB. for correct operation.

1-4-42
 2KR/2KS

Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C8340 Centerfold staple motor problem Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC9 on
(optional center-folding unit of 3000- connector termi- the centerfold main PWB and the connector
sheet document finisher) nals. of the centerfold staple motor, and the conti-
Jam 89 is indicated. nuity across the connector terminals. Repair
or replace if necessary.
Defective center- Replace the centerfold staple motor.
fold staple motor.
Defective PWB. Replace the centerfold main PWB or finisher
main PWB and check for correct operation.
C8350 Centerfold side registration motor 1 Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC7 on
problem (optional center-folding unit connector termi- the centerfold main PWB and the connector
of 3000-sheet document finisher) nals. of centerfold side registration motor 1, and
The home position is not detected when the continuity across the connector termi-
initial operation even if 1 s passed. nals. Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective center- Replace centerfold side registration motor 1.
fold side registra-
tion motor 1.
Defective PWB. Replace the centerfold main PWB or finisher
main PWB and check for correct operation.
Roller motor problem (optional docu- The roller sensor, Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
ment finisher) roller motor con- nuity within the connector cable. If none,
The roller sensor does not turn on/off nector makes poor remedy or replace the cable.
within specified time of the roller motor contact.
turning on.
Defective roller Replace the roller sensor.
sensor.
Defective roller Replace the roller motor.
motor.
Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check
main PWB. for correct operation.
C8360 Centerfold main motor problem Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC12 on
(optional center-folding unit of 3000- connector termi- the centerfold main PWB and the connector
sheet document finisher) nals. of the centerfold main motor, and the conti-
The motor lock signal is detected above nuity across the connector terminals. Repair
1 s during driving the centerfold main or replace if necessary.
motor.
Defective center- Replace the centerfold main motor.
fold main motor.
Defective PWB. Replace the centerfold main PWB or finisher
main PWB and check for correct operation.
Slide motor problem (optional docu- The slide sensor, Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
ment finisher) slide motor con- nuity within the connector cable. If none,
The slide sensor does not turn on/off nector makes poor remedy or replace the cable.
within specified time of the slide motor contact.
turning on.
Defective slide Replace the slide sensor.
sensor.
Defective slide Replace the slide motor.
motor.
Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check
main PWB. for correct operation.

1-4-43
2KR/2KS

Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C8440 Sensor adjusting problem (optional The paper entry Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
document finisher) sensor connector nuity within the connector cable. If none,
The sensor cannot be adjusted within makes poor con- remedy or replace the cable.
the specified range. tact.
Defective paper Replace the paper entry sensor and check
entry sensor. for correct operation.
The optical path of Remove the foreign matter.
the paper entry
sensor is blocked
by foreign matter.
Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check
main PWB. for correct operation.
C8460 EEPROM problem (optional document Defective Replace the finisher main PWB and check
finisher) EEPROM or fin- for correct operation.
Reading from or writing to EEPROM isher main PWB.
cannot be performed.
C8500 Mailbox communication error Poor contact in the Check the connection of the connector of
(optional mailbox of 3000-sheet docu- connector termi- the mailbox and the connector YC7 on the
ment finisher) nals. finisher main PWB, and the continuity
Communication with the mailbox is not across the connector terminals. Repair or
possible although the connection is replace if necessary.
detected.
Defective PWB. Replace the mailbox main PWB or finisher
main PWB and check for correct operation.
C8510 Mailbox drive motor problem Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC5 on
(optional mailbox of 3000-sheet docu- connector termi- the mailbox main PWB and the connector of
ment finisher) nals. the mailbox drive motor, and the continuity
The motor lock signal is detected above across the connector terminals. Repair or
500 ms during driving the mailbox drive replace if necessary.
motor.
Defective mailbox Replace the mailbox drive motor.
drive motor.
Defective PWB. Replace the mailbox main PWB or finisher
main PWB and check for correct operation.
C8800 Document finisher communication Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector on the
error (optional 3000-sheet document connector termi- engine PWB and the connector on the fin-
finisher) nals. isher main PWB, and the continuity across
A communication error from document the connector terminals. Repair or replace if
finisher is detected 10 times in succes- necessary.
sion.
Defective PWB. Replace the finisher main PWB or engine
PWB and check for correct operation.
C8900 Finisher backup problem (optional Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector on the
3000-sheet document finisher) connector termi- finisher main PWB and the connector of the
Read and write data does not match 3 nals. machine, and the continuity across the con-
times in succession. nector terminals. Repair or replace if neces-
sary.
EEPROM installed Install EEPROM correctly.
incorrectly.
Defective finisher Replace the finisher main PWB and check
main PWB. for correct operation.

1-4-44
 2KR/2KS

Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C8910 Punch backup problem (optional of Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector on the
3000-sheet document finisher) connector termi- punch PWB and the connector YC4 on the
Read and write data does not match 3 nals. finisher main PWB, and the continuity
times in succession. across the connector terminals. Repair or
replace if necessary.
Defective punch Replace the punch PWB and check for cor-
PWB. rect operation.
C8920 Mailbox backup problem (optional Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector on the
mailbox of 3000-sheet document fin- connector termi- mailbox main PWB and the connector YC7
isher) nals. on the finisher main PWB, and the continuity
Read and write data does not match. across the connector terminals. Repair or
replace if necessary.
Defective mailbox Replace the mailbox main PWB and check
main PWB. for correct operation.
C8930 Center-folding backup problem Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector on the
(optional center-folding unit of 3000- connector termi- centerfold main PWB and the connector
sheet document finisher) nals. YC5 on the finisher main PWB, and the con-
Read and write data does not match 3 tinuity across the connector terminals.
times in succession. Repair or replace if necessary.
EEPROM installed Install EEPROM correctly.
incorrectly.
Defective center- Replace the centerfold main PWB and
fold main PWB. check for correct operation.
C9000 DP communication problem Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC6 on
(optional DP) connector termi- the ISM PWB and the connector of the DP,
A communication error is detected. nals. and the continuity across the connector ter-
minals. Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective PWB. Replace the DP driver PWB or ISM PWB
and check for correct operation.
C9040 DP lift motor going up error Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
(optional DP) of the DP lift motor nuity within the connector cable. If none,
The tray upper limit switch does not turn connector. remedy or replace the cable.
on within 2 s of DP lift motor turning on.
Malfunction of the Replace the DP lift motor and check for cor-
DP lift motor. rect operation.
Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
of the tray upper nuity within the connector cable. If none,
limit switch con- remedy or replace the cable.
nector.
Malfunction of the Replace the tray upper limit switch and
tray upper limit check for correct operation.
switch.
Defective DP driver Replace the DP driver PWB and check for
PWB. correct operation.

1-4-45
2KR/2KS

Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
C9050 DP lift motor going down error Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
(optional DP) of the DP lift motor nuity within the connector cable. If none,
The tray lower limit switch does not turn connector. remedy or replace the cable.
on within 2 s of DP lift motor turning on.
Malfunction of the Replace the DP lift motor and check for cor-
DP lift motor. rect operation.
Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
of the tray lower nuity within the connector cable. If none,
limit switch con- remedy or replace the cable.
nector.
Malfunction of the Replace the tray lower limit switch and
tray lower limit check for correct operation.
switch.
Defective DP driver Replace the DP driver PWB and check for
PWB. correct operation.
C9060 DP EEPROM error (optional DP) Defective DP driver Replace the DP driver PWB and check for
Read and write data does not match. PWB. correct operation.
Data in the specified area of the backup
Device damage of Contact the Service Administrative Division.
memory does not match the specified
EEPROM.
values.
C9070 Communication problem between DP Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
and SHD (optional DP) of the SHD PWB. nuity within the connector cable. If none,
A communication error is detected. remedy or replace the cable.
Defective SHD Replace the SHD PWB and check for cor-
PWB. rect operation.
C9080 Communication problem between DP Loose connection Reinsert the connector. Also check for conti-
and CIS (optional DP) of CIS. nuity within the connector cable. If none,
A communication error is detected. remedy or replace the cable.
Defective CIS. Replace CIS and check for correct opera-
tion.
C9500 Contact the Service Administrative Division.
C9510 Contact the Service Administrative Division.
C9520 Contact the Service Administrative Division.
F000 Operation panel PWB communication Defective main Replace the main PWB and check for cor-
error PWB. rect operation.
Defective opera- Replace the operation panel PWB and
tion panel PWB. check for correct operation.
F040 Engine PWB communication error Defective main Replace the main PWB and check for cor-
PWB. rect operation.
Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor-
PWB. rect operation.
F041 Scanner PWB communication error Defective main Replace the main PWB and check for cor-
PWB. rect operation.
Defective ISM Replace the ISM PWB and check for correct
PWB. operation.
F050 Engine ROM checksum error Defective engine Replace the engine PWB and check for cor-
PWB. rect operation.

1-4-46
 2KR/2KS

Remarks
Code Contents
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
F090 Fax control PWB communication Defective main Replace the main PWB and check for cor-
error PWB. rect operation.
F278 Power supply in drive system error Main power switch Turn on power.
was turned off with- (To switch off power, first press the power
out using the key until the main power indicator goes off,
power key, or a then turn the main power switch off.)
power failure has
occurred.

1-4-47
2KR/2KS

1-4-3 Image formation problems

(1)No image appears (2)No image appears (3)Image is too light. (4)Background is (5)A white line
(entirely white). (entirely black). visible. appears longitudi-
nally.

See page 1-4-49. See page 1-4-49. See page 1-4-50. See page 1-4-50. See page 1-4-50.
(6)A black line (7)A black line (8)One side of the (9)Black dots appear (10)Image is blurred.
appears longitudi- appears laterally. copy image is darker on the image.
nally. than the other.

See page 1-4-51. See page 1-4-51. See page 1-4-51. See page 1-4-51. See page 1-4-52.
(11)The leading edge (12)The leading edge (13)Paper creases. (14)Offset occurs. (15)Image is partly
of the image is con- of the image is spo- missing.
sistently misaligned radically misaligned
with the original. with the original.

See page 1-4-52. See page 1-4-52. See page 1-4-52. See page 1-4-53. See page 1-4-53.
(16)Fusing is poor. (17)Image is out of (18)Image center (19)Image is not
focus. does not align with square.
the original center.

See page 1-4-53. See page 1-4-53. See page 1-4-54. See page 1-4-54.

1-4-48
 2KR/2KS

(1) No image appears (entirely white).

Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

No trans- The connector terminals Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
fer charg- of the high voltage PWB connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
ing. make poor contact.
Defective engine PWB. Check if YC13-10 on the engine PWB goes low when main-
tenance item U101 is run. If not, replace the engine PWB.
Defective high voltage Check if transfer charging takes place when CN1-10 on the
PWB. high voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U101 is
run. If not, replace the high voltage PWB.
No LSU Defective laser scanner Replace the laser scanner unit (see page 1-5-22).
laser is unit.
output.
Defective main PWB. Check if YC3-11 on the main PWB goes low when mainte-
nance item U100 is run. If not, replace the main PWB.
No devel- The connector terminals Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
oping bias of the high voltage PWB connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
output. make poor contact.
Defective engine PWB. Check if YC13-1 on the engine PWB goes low when mainte-
nance item U101 is run. If not, replace the engine PWB.
Defective high voltage Check if developing bias is output when CN1-1 on the high
PWB. voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U101 is run.
If not, replace the high voltage PWB.

(2) No image appears (entirely black).

Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

No main Broken main charger Replace the main charger unit (see page 1-5-26).
charging. wire.
Leaking main charger Clean the main charger wire and grid.
housing.
The connector terminals Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
of the high voltage PWB connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
make poor contact.
Defective engine PWB. Check if YC13-4 on the engine PWB goes low when mainte-
nance item U100 is run. If not, replace the engine PWB.
Defective high voltage Check if main charging takes place when CN1-4 on the high
PWB. voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U100 is run.
If not, replace the high voltage PWB.
Exposure Poor contact in the expo- Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
lamp fails sure lamp connector ter- connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
to light. minals.
Defective inverter PWB. Check if the exposure lamp lights when the terminal on the
inverter PWB goes low while maintenance item U061 is run.
If not, replace the inverter PWB.
Defective ISM PWB. Run maintenance item U061 and check if YC5-4 on the ISM
PWB goes low. If not, replace the ISM PWB.

1-4-49
2KR/2KS

(3) Image is too light.

Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

Insufficient toner. If the display shows the message requesting toner replenish-
ment, replace the container.
Deteriorated toner. Perform the drum refresh operation.
Defective The connector terminals Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the
transfer of the high voltage PWB connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
charging make poor contact.
output.
Defective engine PWB. Check if YC13-10 on the engine PWB goes low when main-
tenance item U101 is run. If not, replace the engine PWB.
Defective high voltage Check if transfer charging takes place when CN1-10 on the
PWB. high voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U101 is
run. If not, replace the high voltage PWB.

(4) Background is visible.

Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

Deteriorated toner. Perform the drum refresh operation.
Dirty main charger wire. Clean the wire or, if it is extremely dirty, replace it (see page
1-5-26).

(5) A white line appears longitudinally.

Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

Foreign matter in the developing unit. Check if the magnetic brush is formed uniformly. Replace the
developing unit if any foreign matter (see page 1-5-28).
Dirty shading plate. Clean the shading plate.

1-4-50
 2KR/2KS

(6) A black line appears longitudinally.

Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

Dirty contact glass. Clean the contact glass.
Dirty or flawed drum. Perform the drum refresh operation. If the drum is flawed,
replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-25).
Deformed or worn cleaning blade. Replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-25).
Dirty scanner mirror. Clean the scanner mirror.
Dirty main charger wire. Clean the wire or, if it is extremely dirty, replace it (see page
1-5-26).

(7) A black line appears laterally.

Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

Flawed drum. Replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-25).
Dirty developing section. Clean any part contaminated with toner in the developing
section.
Leaking main charger housing. Clean the main charger wire and grid.
Leaking separation electrode. Clean the separation electrode.

(8) One side of the copy image is darker than the other.

Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

Dirty main charger wire. Clean the wire or, if it is extremely dirty, replace it (see page
1-5-26).
Defective exposure lamp. Check if the exposure lamp light is distributed evenly to run
maintenance item U061. If not, replace the exposure lamp
(see page 1-3-27 and page 1-5-12).

(9) Black dots appear on the image.

Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

Dirty or flawed drum. Perform the drum refresh operation. If the drum is flawed,
replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-25).
Dirty contact glass. Clean the contact glass.
Deformed or worn cleaning blade. Replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-25).
Dirty drum separation claws. Clean the drum separation claws.
Dirty the heat roller separation claws. Clean the heat roller separation claws.

1-4-51
2KR/2KS

(10) Image is blurred.

Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

Scanner moves erratically. Check if there is any foreign matter on the front and rear
scanner rails. If any, remove it.
Deformed press roller. Replace the press roller (see page 1-5-32).
Paper conveying section drive prob- Check the gears and belts and, if necessary, grease them.
lem.

(11) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original.

Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

Misadjusted leading edge registration. Run maintenance mode U034 to readjust the leading edge
registration (see page 1-3-22).
Misadjusted scanner leading edge Run maintenance mode U066 to readjust the scanner lead-
registration. ing edge registration (see page 1-3-29).

(12) The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original.

Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

Feed clutch, paper feed clutch, MP Check the installation position and operation of each clutch.
paper feed clutch or registration If any of them operates incorrectly, replace it.
clutch installed or operating incor-
rectly.

(13) Paper creases.

Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

Paper curled. Check the paper storage conditions.
Paper damp. Check the paper storage conditions.
Defective pressure springs. Replace the pressure springs.
Defective separation. Check the drum separation claws and heat roller separation
claws.

1-4-52
 2KR/2KS

(14) Offset occurs.

Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

Defective cleaning blade. Replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-25).
Defective fuser unit. Check the heat roller and press roller.
Wrong types of paper. Check if the paper meets specifications. Replace paper.

(15) Image is partly missing.

Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

Paper damp. Check the paper storage conditions.
Paper creased. Replace the paper.
Drum condensation. Perform the drum refresh operation.
Dirty or flawed drum. Perform the drum refresh operation. If the drum is flawed,
replace the drum unit (see page 1-5-25).

(16) Fusing is poor.

Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

Wrong types of paper. Check if the paper meets specifications. Replace paper.
Defective pressure springs. Replace the pressure springs.
Flawed press roller. Replace the press roller (see page 1-5-32).
Flawed fuser heater. Replace the fuser heaters (see page 1-5-33).

(17) Image is out of focus.

Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

Defective image scanning unit. Replace the image scanning unit (see page 1-5-20).
Drum condensation. Perform the drum refresh operation.

1-4-53
2KR/2KS

(18) Image center does not align with the original center.

Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

Misadjusted image center line. Run maintenance item U034 to readjust the center line of
image printing (see page 1-3-23).
Misadjusted scanner center line. Run maintenance item U067 to readjust the scanner leading
edge registration (see page 1-3-30).
Original is not placed correctly. Place the original correctly.

(19) Image is not square.

Copy example Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

Laser scanner unit positioned incor- Adjust the installation position of the laser scanner unit (see
rectly. page 1-5-24).

1-4-54
 2KR/2KS

1-4-4 Electric problems

Troubleshooting to each failure must be in the order of the numbered symptoms.

Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

(1) 1. The power cord is not Check the contact between the power plug and the outlet.
The machine does plugged in properly.
not operate when the
2. No electricity at the Measure the input voltage.
main power switch is
power outlet.
turned on.
3. Broken power cord. Check for continuity. If none, replace the cord.
4. Defective main power Check for continuity across the contacts. If none, replace the main
switch. power switch.
5. Defective power source With AC present, check for 24 V DC at YC1-1 on the power
PWB. source PWB, 5 V DC at YC1-6 and 3.3 V DC at YC1-5. If none,
replace the power source PWB.
(2) 1. Poor contact in the con- Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
The eject motor does nector terminals. nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
not operate.
2. Defective drive transmis- Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly. If not, grease the
sion system. bushings and gears. Check for broken gears and replace if any.
3. Defective eject motor. Run maintenance item U030 and check if the eject motor oper-
ates. If not, replace the eject motor.
4. Defective engine PWB. Run maintenance item U030 and check if the eject motor oper-
ates. If not, replace the engine PWB.
(3) 1. Poor contact in the con- Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
The scanner motor nector terminals. nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
does not operate.
2. Broken motor coil. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the motor.
(4) 1. Poor contact in the con- Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
Power source fan nector terminals. nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
motor 1/2 does not
2. Broken motor coil. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the motor.
operate.
3. Defective motor. Run maintenance item U037 and check if the motor operates
when the following terminals on the PWB goes low. If not, replace
the corresponding motor.
Power source fan motor 1/2: YC4-1 on the power source PWB
4. Defective power source Run maintenance item U037 and check if following terminals on
PWB. the PWB goes low. If not, replace the power source PWB.
Power source fan motor 1/2: YC4-1 on the power source PWB

1-4-55
2KR/2KS

Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

(5) 1. Poor contact in the con- Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
Fuser fan motor, nector terminals. nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
developing fan motor,
2. Broken motor coil. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the motor.
LSU fan motor, paper
conveying fan motor 3. Defective motor. Run maintenance item U037 and check if the motor operates
1/2/3 or duplex fan when the following terminals on the PWB goes low. If not, replace
motor 1/2/3 does not the corresponding motor.
operate. Fuser fan motor: YC10-A14 on the engine PWB
Developing fan motor: YC12-B12 on the engine PWB
LSU fan motor: YC12-B3 on the engine PWB
Paper conveying fan motor 1/2/3: YC4-B7 on the engine PWB
Duplex fan motor 1/2/3: YC4-B10 on the engine PWB
4. Defective engine PWB. Run maintenance item U037 and check if following terminals on
the PWB goes low. If not, replace the engine PWB.
Fuser fan motor: YC10-A14 on the engine PWB
Developing fan motor: YC12-B12 on the engine PWB
LSU fan motor: YC12-B3 on the engine PWB
Paper conveying fan motor 1/2/3: YC4-B7 on the engine PWB
Duplex fan motor 1/2/3: YC4-B10 on the engine PWB
(6) 1. Poor contact in the con- Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
Controller fan motor nector terminals. nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
does not operate.
2. Broken motor coil. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the motor.
3. Defective motor. Run maintenance item U037 and check if the motor operates
when the following terminals on the PWB goes low. If not, replace
the corresponding motor.
Controller fan motor: YC23-1 on the main PWB
4. Defective main PWB. Run maintenance item U037 and check if following terminals on
the PWB goes low. If not, replace the main PWB.
Controller fan motor: YC23-1 on the main PWB
(7) 1. Poor contact in the con- Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
Scanner fan motor nector terminals. nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
does not operate.
2. Broken motor coil. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the motor.
3. Defective motor. Run maintenance item U037 and check if the motor operates
when the following terminals on the PWB goes low. If not, replace
the corresponding motor.
Scanner fan motor: YC3-2 on the ISM PWB
4. Defective ISM PWB. Run maintenance item U037 and check if following terminals on
the ISM PWB goes low. If not, replace the ISM PWB.
Scanner fan motor: YC3-2 on the ISM PWB
5. Defective ISC PWB. Run maintenance item U037 and check if following terminals on
the ISC PWB goes high. If not, replace the ISC PWB.
Scanner fan motor: YC3-24 on the ISC PWB

1-4-56
 2KR/2KS

Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

(8) 1. Poor contact in the con- Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
Paper feed clutch 1/ nector terminals. nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
2, feed clutch 1/2/3,
2. Broken clutch coil. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the clutch.
MP paper feed
clutch, MP feed 3. Defective engine PWB. Run maintenance item U032 and check if following terminals on
clutch, registration the engine PWB goes low. If not, replace the engine PWB.
clutch, duplex feed Paper feed clutch 1: YC10-B1 on the engine PWB
clutch or developing Paper feed clutch 2: YC10-B4 on the engine PWB
clutch does not oper- Feed clutch 1: YC23-2 on the engine PWB
ate. Feed clutch 2: YC8-A12 on the engine PWB
Feed clutch 3: YC8-A5 on the engine PWB
MP paper feed clutch: YC12-A9 on the engine PWB
MP feed clutch: YC12-A11 on the engine PWB
Registration clutch: YC10-B6 on the engine PWB
Duplex feed clutch: YC4-B2 on the engine PWB
Developing clutch: YC7-1 on the engine PWB
(9) 1. Poor contact in the con- Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
The feedshift sole- nector terminals. nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
noid or toner feed
2. Broken solenoid coil. Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the solenoid.
solenoid does not
operate. 3. Defective engine PWB. Run maintenance item U033 and check if the solenoid operates. If
not, replace the engine PWB.
(10) 1. Poor contact in the con- Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
The exposure lamp nector terminals. nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
does not turn on or
2. Defective inverter PWB. Run maintenance item U061 and check if the exposure lamp turns
off.
on with the inverter PWB go low. If not, replace the inverter PWB.
3. Defective ISC PWB. Run maintenance item U061 and check if YC3-23 on the ISC
PWB goes high. If not, replace the ISC PWB.
4. Defective ISM PWB. Run maintenance item U061 and check if YC5-4 on the ISM PWB
goes low. If not, replace the ISM PWB.
(11) 1. Broken main charger Replace the main charger unit (see page 1-5-26).
Main charging is not wire.
performed.
2. Leaking main charger Clean the main charger wire and grid.
housing.
3. The connector terminals Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
of the high voltage PWB nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
make poor contact.
4. Defective engine PWB. Check if YC13-4 on the engine PWB goes low when maintenance
item U100 is run. If not, replace the engine PWB.
5. Defective high voltage Check if main charging takes place when CN1-4 on the high volt-
PWB. age PWB goes low while maintenance item U100 is run. If not,
replace the high voltage PWB.
(12) 1. The connector terminals Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
No developing bias is of the high voltage PWB nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
output. make poor contact.
2. Defective engine PWB. Check if YC13-1 on the engine PWB goes low when maintenance
item U101 is run. If not, replace the engine PWB.
3. Defective high voltage Check if developing bias is output when CN1-1 on the high volt-
PWB. age PWB goes low while maintenance item U101 is run. If not,
replace the high voltage PWB.

1-4-57
2KR/2KS

Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

(13) 1. The connector terminals Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
Transfer charging is of the high voltage PWB nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
not performed. make poor contact.
2. Defective engine PWB. Check if YC13-10 on the engine PWB goes low when mainte-
nance item U101 is run. If not, replace the engine PWB.
3. Defective high voltage Check if transfer charging takes place when CN1-10 on the high
PWB. voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U101 is run. If not,
replace the high voltage PWB.
(14) 1. Original is not placed cor- Check the original and correct if necessary.
The original size is rectly.
not detected cor-
2. Poor contact in the origi- Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
rectly.
nal detection switch or nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
original size sensor con-
nector terminals.
3. Defective original detec- If the level of YC4-2 on the ISM PWB does not go low when the
tion switch. original detection switch is turned on and off, replace the original
detection switch.
4. Defective original size Check if sensor operates correctly. If not, replace it.
sensor.
(15) 1. Poor contact in the touch Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
The touch panel keys panel connector termi- nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
do not work. nals.
2. Defective touch panel or If any keys do not work after running the maintenance item U201
main operation PWB. to initialize the touch panel, replace the touch panel or main oper-
ation unit PWB.
(16) 1. Poor contact in the con- Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
The message nector terminals of paper nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
requesting paper to switch 1/2 or MP paper
be loaded is shown switch.
when paper is
2. Defective paper switch 1/ If the level of following terminal on PWB does not change when
present on the cas-
2 or MP paper switch. the switch is turned on and off, replace the switch.
sette 1/2 or MP tray.
Paper switch 1: YC8-B12 on the feed PWB
Paper switch 2: YC8-B18 on the feed PWB
MP paper switch: YC12-A6 on the engine PWB
(17) 1. Poor contact in the con- Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
The size of paper on nector terminals of paper nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
the cassette 1/2 or size length switch 1/2,
MP tray is not dis- paper size width switch
played correctly. 1/2, MP paper size length
switch or MP paper size
width switch.
2. Defective paper size If the level of following terminal on PWB does not change when
length switch 1/2 or MP the switch is turned on and off, replace the switch.
paper size length switch. Paper size length switch 1: YC8-B2 on the engine PWB
Paper size length switch 2: YC8-A19 on the engine PWB
MP paper size length switch: YC12-B14 on the engine PWB
3. Defective paper size If the level of following terminal on PWB does not change when
width switch 1/2 or MP the width guide in the cassette 1/2 or insert guide on the MP tray
paper size width switch. is moved, replace the switch.
Paper size width switch 1: YC9-3, 4, 5 on the engine PWB
Paper size width switch 2: YC9-9, 10, 11 on the engine PWB
MP paper size width switch: YC12-A1, A2, A3 on the engine PWB

1-4-58
 2KR/2KS

Problem Causes Check procedures/corrective measures

(18) 1. A piece of paper torn Check visually and remove it, if any.
A paper jam in the from copy paper is
paper feed, paper caught around feed
conveying, fuser, switch 1/2/3, registration
eject or duplex sec- switch, feedshift switch,
tion is indicated when eject switch or duplex
the main power paper conveying switch.
switch is turned on.
2. Defective feed switch 1/ Run maintenance item U031 and turn each switch on and off
2/3, registration switch, manually. Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding
feedshift switch, eject switch is not displayed in reverse.
switch or duplex paper
conveying switch.
(19) 1. Poor contact in the con- Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the con-
The message nector terminals of front nector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
requesting cover to cover switch, left cover 1/
be closed is dis- 2 switch.
played when the front
2. Defective front cover Check for continuity across each switch. If there is no continuity
cover or left cover 1/2
switch, left cover 1 switch when the switch is on, replace it.
is closed.
or left cover 2 switch.
(20) 1. Wiring is broken, shorted Check for continuity. If none, repair.
Others. or makes poor contact.

1-4-59
2KR/2KS

1-4-5 Mechanical problems

Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures

(1) Check if the surfaces of the following rollers or Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
No primary paper feed. pulleys are dirty with paper powder:
Forwarding pulley, paper feed pulley, separa-
tion pulley, feed roller, registration roller, MP
forwarding pulley, MP paper feed pulley and
MP separation pulley
Check if the forwarding pulley, paper feed pul- Replace the pulley if it is deformed (see
ley or separation pulley is deformed. page 1-5-3).
Check if the MP forwarding pulley, MP paper Replace the pulley if it is deformed (see
feed pulley or MP separation pulley is page 1-5-5).
deformed.
Electrical problem with the following clutches: See page 1-4-57.
Paper feed clutch 1/2, feed clutch 1/2/3, MP
paper feed clutch and MP feed clutch
(2) Check if the surfaces of the right and left reg- Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
No secondary paper istration rollers are dirty with paper powder.
feed.
Electrical problem with the registration clutch. See page 1-4-57.
(3) Width guide in a cassette installed incorrectly. Check the width guide visually and correct
Skewed paper feed. or replace if necessary.
Deformed width guide in a cassette. Check visually and replace any deformed
guide.
Check if a pressure spring along the paper Repair or replace.
conveying path is deformed or out of place.
(4) Check if the scanner wire is loose. Reinstall the scanner wire (see page 1-5-
The scanner does not 16).
travel.
The scanner motor malfunctions. See page 1-4-55.
(5) Paper is extremely curled. Replace the paper.
Multiple sheets of paper
Check if the separation pulley is worn. Replace the separation pulley if it is worn
are fed at one time.
(see page 1-5-3).
Check if the MP separation pulley is worn. Replace the MP separation pulley if it is
worn (see page 1-5-5).

1-4-60
 2KR/2KS

Problem Causes/check procedures Corrective measures

(6) Paper is extremely curled. Replace the paper.
Paper jams.
Deformed guides along the paper conveying Check visually and replace any deformed
path. guides.
Check if the contact between the right and left Check visually and remedy if necessary.
registration rollers is correct.
Check if the contact between the feed roller Check visually and remedy if necessary.
and feed pulley is correct.
Check if the press roller is extremely dirty or Clean or replace the press roller.
deformed.
Check if the contact between the heat roller Repair if any springs are off the separation
and its separation claws is correct. claws.
Check if the contact between the eject roller Check visually and remedy if necessary.
and pulley is correct.
The feedshift solenoid malfunctions. See page 1-4-57.
Check if the duplex feed pulley, upper duplex Check visually and replace the pulley or
feed roller or lower duplex feed roller is roller if deformed.
deformed.
(7) Check if the developing unit is extremely dirty. Clean the developing unit.
Toner drops on the paper
conveying path.
(8) Check if the pulleys, rollers and gears operate Grease the bearings and gears.
Abnormal noise is heard. smoothly.
Check if the following clutches are installed Correct.
correctly: Paper feed clutch 1/2, feed clutch 1/
2/3, MP paper feed clutch and MP feed clutch

1-4-61
2KR/2KS

1-4-6 Send error code

(1) Scan to SMB error codes

Remarks
Code Display
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1102 Error: User/Password or Domain name is not entered. Enter the user name with the form of either
Shared Name/Folder Name [Domain¥User], [Domain/User] or
[Domain@User].
Assign disable user/pass- Enter the correct user name/password.
word.
Assign the user who is not Enter correct user name/password.
allowed to access to folder. Check the access limit of destination folder.
Assign disable shared name. Enter the correct shared name.
Check if the prohibited letters below are
used to shared name.
@( )!&#$%^~[ ]`
Host name error. Check if the prohibited letters are used to
shared name.
“&’( )|`;<>
1103 Error: Pathname or File Domain name is not enter Enter the user name with the form of either
Name [Domain¥User], [Domain/User] or
[Domain@User].
Connect to the folder which is Enter correct user name/password.
not permitted for reference/ Check the access limit of destination folder.
writing.
Assign disable folder path. Enter correct folder path.
1105 Error: Not support protocol SMB Protocol is set to OFF. Check ON in the [Scanner]-[SMB] screen in
COMMAND CENTER.
2101 Error: Can not connect Enter the disable host name/ Enter the correct host name or IP address.
IP address.
Assign the wrong port num- Enter the correct port number.
ber.
Network is not connected. Check if the server is operating properly.
Check the network connection (cable. net-
work condition within LAN, etc.).
2103 Error: Response wait with The server is unable to com- Check if the server is operating properly.
timeout municate.
2201 Error: Network transfer Error occurs on the network. Check the network connection (cable. net-
work condition within LAN, etc.).
2203 Error: Response wait with Response is not returned Check the network connection (cable. net-
timeout from the server above speci- work condition within LAN, etc.).
fied time.
9181 Error: Page max count over The number of pages of a Set the number of pages as 999 or less.
send file exceeded 999
pages.

1-4-62
 2KR/2KS

(2) Scan to FTP error codes

Remarks
Code Display
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1101 Error: Host name Enter the disable host name/ Enter the correct host name or IP address.
IP address.
1102 Error: User/Password Domain name is not entered. Enter the user name with the form of either
[Domain¥User] or [Domain/User].
Assign disable user/pass- Enter the correct user name/password.
word.
1103 Error: Pathname or File Connect to the folder which is Enter correct user name/password.
Name not permitted for reference/ Check the access limit of destination folder.
writing.
Assign disable folder path. Enter correct folder path.
1105 Error: Not support protocol FTP Protocol is set to OFF. Check ON in the [Scanner]-[FTP] screen in
COMMAND CENTER.
2101 Error: Can not connect Enter the disable host name/ Enter the correct host name or IP address.
IP address.
Assign the wrong port num- Enter the correct port number.
ber.
Network is not connected. Check if the server is operating properly.
Check the network connection (cable. net-
work condition within LAN, etc.).
2102 Error: Can not connect with The server is unable to com- Check if the server is operating properly.
timeout municate.
Send the server which does Enter the correct host name or IP address.
not support FTP server.
2103 Error: Response wait with The server is unable to com- Check if the server is operating properly.
timeout municate.
2201 Error: Network transfer Error occurs on the network. Check the network connection (cable. net-
work condition within LAN, etc.).
2202 Error: Network transfer with Error occurs on the network. Check the network connection (cable. net-
timeout work condition within LAN, etc.).
2203 Error: Response wait with Response is not returned Check the network connection (cable. net-
timeout from the server above speci- work condition within LAN, etc.).
fied time.
3101 Error: Server response The server is error status. Check if the server is working properly.
9181 Error: Page max count over The number of pages of a Set the number of pages as 999 or less.
send file exceeded 999
pages.

1-4-63
2KR/2KS

(3) Scan to E-mail error codes

Remarks
Code Display
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
1101 Error: Host name SMTP sever name is not set. Register [SMTP Server Name] in
Error SMTP server name. [Advanced]-[SMTP] -[General] in
COMMAND CENTER.
1102 Error: User/Password User ID for the authentication Enter the correct user ID/password for
is not entered or entered authentication at [Advance] in COMMAND
wrongly. CENTER.
Wrong authentication pass- Enter the password of [Login User Name] of
word is entered. the [POP3] page or the [SMTP] page cor-
rectly.
1104 Error: No Recipient address The destination address is not Specify the destination address.
specified.
1105 Error: Not support protocol SMTP Protocol is set to OFF. Check ON [SMTP] in [Advanced]-[SMTP] -
[General] in COMMAND CENTER.
1106 Error: No Sender Info Sender address is not enter Enter the correct [Sender Address] in
[Advanced]-[SMTP] -[General] in
COMMAND CENTER.
2101 Error: Can not connect Select [Other authenticate] Select valid POP3 user other than [Other].
when authenticating POP
before SMTP.
The specified server is not Enter the correct [SMTP Server Name] in
SMTP server. [Advanced]-[SMTP] -[General] in
COMMAND CENTER.
Network is not connected. Check if the server is operating properly.
Check the network connection (cable. net-
work condition within LAN, etc.).
2102 Error: Can not connect with The server is unable to com- Check if the server is operating properly.
timeout municate.
2103 Error: Response wait with The server is unable to com- Check if the server is operating properly.
timeout municate.
2201 Error: Network transfer Error occurs on the network. Check the network connection (cable. net-
work condition within LAN, etc.).
2202 Error: Network transfer with Error occurs on the network. Check the network connection (cable. net-
timeout work condition within LAN, etc.).
2203 Error: Response wait with Response is not returned Check the network connection (cable. net-
timeout from the server above speci- work condition within LAN, etc.).
fied time.
2204 Error: E-Mail Size limit The size of E-mail exceeds its Change the [E-mail Size Limit] in
limit. [Advanced]-[SMTP] -[General]-[E-mail Set-
ting] in COMMAND CENTER.
3101 Error: Server response The server is error status. Check if the server is working properly.
Server setting is not authenti- Check the settings for client/server authenti-
cated normally. cation.
3201 Error: Not Found Authenti- Unsupported SMTP Authenti- Check the settings for client/server Authenti-
cation Mechanism cation Mechanism is found. cation Mechanism.
9181 Error: Page max count over The number of pages of a Set the number of pages as 999 or less.
send file exceeded 999
pages.

1-4-64
 2KR/2KS

(4) Network Twain error codes

Remarks
Code Display
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
2202 Error: Network transfer with Response is not returned Check the network connection (cable. net-
timeout from the server above speci- work condition within LAN, etc.).
fied time.
9181 Error: Page max count over The number of pages of a Set the number of pages as 999 or less.
send file exceeded 999
pages.

(5) Software trouble error codes

Remarks
Code Display
Causes Check procedures/corrective measures
5101 Error: Not yet connected Operation handle error. Turn the main power switch off and on.
Error for stored status in the
operation handle.
5102 Error: Already connected Operation handle error. Turn the main power switch off and on.
Error for stored status in the
operation handle.
5103 Error: Not yet opened Error for stored status in the Turn the main power switch off and on.
operation handle.
5104 Error: Already opened Error for stored status in the Turn the main power switch off and on.
operation handle.
7101 Error: Memory Allocation Insufficient memory space. Turn the main power switch off and on.
7102 Error: Socket Create Unable to create a communi- Turn the main power switch off and on.
cation socket.
720f Error: Unknown error Unable to determine the Turn the main power switch off and on.
cause.

1-4-65
2KR/2KS

This page is intentionally left blank.

1-4-66
 2KR/2KS

1-5 Assembly and Disassembly

1-5-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly

(1) Precautions
Before starting disassembly, press the power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the main power indicator is
off before turning off the main power switch. And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet.
Turning off the main power switch before pressing the Power key to off may cause damage to the equipped hard disk.
When the fax kit is installed, be sure to disconnect the modular code before starting disassembly.
When handling PWBs (printed wiring boards), do not touch parts with bare hands.
The PWBs are susceptible to static charge.
Do not touch any PWB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge.
When removing the hook of the connector, be sure to release the hook.
Take care not to get the cables caught.
To reassemble the parts, use the original screws. If the types and the sizes of screws are not known, refer to the PARTS
LIST.

(2) Drum
Note the following when handling or storing the drum.
When removing the drum unit, never expose the drum surface to strong direct light.
Keep the drum at an ambient temperature between -20°C/-4°F and 40°C/104°F and at a relative humidity not higher than
90% RH. Avoid abrupt changes in temperature and humidity.
Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful to or may affect the quality of the drum.
Do not touch the drum surface with any object. Should it be touched by hands or stained with oil, clean it.

(3) Toner
Store the toner container in a cool, dark place.
Avoid direct light and high humidity.

1-5-1
2KR/2KS

(4) How to tell a genuine Kyocera Mita toner container

As a means of brand protection, the Kyocera Mita toner container utilizes an optical security technology to enable visual
validation. A validation viewer is required to accomplish this.

Hold the validation viewer over the left side part of the brand protection seal on the toner container. Through each window
of the validation viewer, the left side part of the seal should be seen as follows:

A black-colored band when seen through the left side window ( )

A shiny or gold-colored band when seen through the right side window ( )

The above will reveal that the toner container is a genuine Kyocera Mita branded toner container, otherwise, it is a coun-
terfeit.

See through the left window See through the right window
( marking) ( marking)

Validation viewer Validation viewer

Brand Brand
protection protection
seal seal

A black-colored band when A shiny or gold-colored band when

seen through the left side window seen through the right side window

Figure 1-5-1

The brand protection seal has an incision as shown below to prohibit reuse.

Incision
Cut

Figure 1-5-2

1-5-2
 2KR/2KS

1-5-2 Paper feed section

(1) Detaching and refitting the forwarding, paper feed and separation pulleys
Follow the procedure below to replace the forwarding, paper feed and separation pulleys.

Procedure
Removing the primary paper feed units
1. Open the front cover and pull out the cas-
settes 1 and 2.
2. Remove the screw and remove the primary
paper feed unit.

Screw

Primary paper
feed unit

Figure 1-5-3

Removing the forwarding pulley

3. Remove the stopper and spring from the pri-
mary paper feed unit.
Forwarding
4. Raise the forwarding pulley retainer in the pulley retainer
direction the arrow, and remove from the pri-
mary paper feed unit.

Stopper

Spring

Figure 1-5-4

5. Remove the stop ring from the forwarding

Forwarding pulley retainer
pulley retainer.
6. Remove the forwarding pulley from the for-
warding pulley shaft.

Forwarding
pulley shaft

Stop ring

Forwarding pulley

Figure 1-5-5

1-5-3
2KR/2KS

Removing the paper feed pulley

Stop ring
7. Remove two stop rings from the primary
paper feed unit. Stop ring
8. Pull the paper feed pulley shaft in the direc-
tion of the arrow and remove the paper feed
pulley.

Paper feed
pulley shaft

Paper feed pulley

Figure 1-5-6

Removing the separation pulley Separation pulley shaft

9. Remove the stop ring from the primary
paper feed unit.
10. Pull the separation pulley shaft in the direc-
tion of the arrow and remove the separation
pulley.

Stop ring

Separation pulley

Figure 1-5-7

11. Replace the forwarding, paper feed and

separation pulleys.
12. Install the separation and paper feed pulleys Machine front Machine rear
to the primary paper feed unit.
13. Install the forwarding pulley to the forward-
ing pulley retainer.
When refitting the forwarding pulley, orient it
correctly as shown in Figure 1-5-8.
14. Refit the forwarding pulley retainer to the pri-
mary paper feed unit. Forwarding pulley
15. Refit the primary paper feed unit.
Figure 1-5-8
16. When the forwarding pulley, paper feed pul-
ley, separation pulley or the primary paper
feed unit is replaced, perform maintenance
mode U901 to clear the counter value (see
page 1-3-96).

1-5-4
 2KR/2KS

(2) Detaching and refitting the MP separation, MP paper feed and MP forwarding pulleys
Follow the procedure below to replace the MP separation, MP paper feed and MP forwarding pulleys.

Procedure
Removing the MP unit OP
T1

Screw
1. Remove four screws and remove the right
lower cover.

Screws
Screw

Right lower cover

Figure 1-5-9

2. Remove two screws and two MP holder

T1
OP

plates.
3. Remove two pins, two screws and two con- MP unit Connectors
nectors, and then remove the MP unit.
Pin

MP holder
plate Screw
Pin

Screw

MP holder plate

Figure 1-5-10

Removing the MP separation pulley

4. Reverse the MP unit and remove the spring Bushing
and stop ring from the MP separation pulley
shaft and move the bushing inside. MP separation
Stop ring
pulley shaft

Spring

Figure 1-5-11

1-5-5
2KR/2KS

5. Raise the MP separation shaft as shown in

the figure, remove the holder plate and the
bushing, and then remove the MP separa-
tion pulley.
Take care not to remove the spring pin of the Holder plate
gear at the rear of the MP separation pulley
shaft. If it is removed, refit it to its original
position. Bushing

MP separation
pulley shaft

MP separation pulley

Figure 1-5-12

Removing the MP paper feed pulley Screw

6. Remove the connector of the MP paper MP unit cover
switch and remove the wire from the three
clamps.
7. Remove the screw and remove the MP unit
cover.

Clamps
Connector

Figure 1-5-13

8. Remove the stop ring and bushing on the

front of the MP paper feed pulley shaft. Stop ring

MP paper feed
pulley shaft

Bushing

Figure 1-5-14

1-5-6
 2KR/2KS

9. Raise the MP paper feed pulley shaft as

Stop ring
shown in the figure, remove the stop ring, MP paper feed
and then remove the MP paper feed pulley. pulley shaft

MP paper feed pulley

Figure 1-5-15

Removing the MP forwarding pulley

Stop ring
10. Remove the sponge.
11. Remove the stop ring and MP paper feed
clutch.
When refitting, insert the cutout in the MP
paper feed clutch over the stopper on the
machine. Sponge

MP paper feed clutch

Figure 1-5-16

12. Remove the screw from the cam at the rear MP forwarding pulley shaft
of the MP forwarding pulley shaft and move Bushing Screw
the cam and the bushing toward the inner
side.

Cam

Figure 1-5-17

1-5-7
2KR/2KS

13. Remove the stop ring of the MP paper feed

pulley shaft and slide the bushing in the
direction of the arrow.
Stop ring
Bushing

MP paper feed
pulley shaft

Figure 1-5-18

14. Slide the MP forwarding pulley shaft tempo-

rarily toward the rear side and then raise it to MP forwarding
pulley shaft
remove from the MP unit.
Remove the shaft while raising the actuator
of the MP paper switch.

Actuator

Figure 1-5-19

15. Remove the bushing and cam on the rear of

the MP forwarding pulley shaft.

Cam

MP forwarding
pulley shaft
Bushing

Figure 1-5-20

1-5-8
 2KR/2KS

16. Remove the stop ring and slide the MP for-

warding pulley with the forwarding pulley
retainer from the shaft to remove it.
17. Replace the MP separation, MP paper feed
and MP forwarding pulleys.

Stop ring
MP forwarding pulley

Forwarding pulley
retainer

Figure 1-5-21

18. Install the MP forwarding pulley to the MP

MP paper feed pulley shaft
forwarding pulley shaft.
19. Refit the MP forwarding pulley shaft to the
MP unit.
20. Install the MP paper feed pulley to the MP
unit.
21. Refit the MP unit cover to the MP unit.
When refitting the MP unit cover, the films
on the cover are positioned under the MP
paper feed pulley shaft.
22. Install the MP separation pulley to the MP
unit.
23. Refit the MP unit.

Films

Figure 1-5-22
24. When the MP forwarding pulley, MP paper
feed pulley or the MP separation pulley is
replaced, perform maintenance mode U901
to clear the counter value (see page 1-3-96).

1-5-9
2KR/2KS

(3) Detaching and refitting the left and right registration cleaner
Take the following procedure when the left or right registration cleaner is to be replaced.

Procedure
Removing the left registration cleaner
1. Open the left cover 1 and remove the trans- Registration guide
fer roller unit. (see page 1-5-29). Left registration roller
2. Remove two roller stoppers and remove the
left registration roller. Registration guide
3. Remove two registration guides.
Roller
stopper

Roller
stopper

Figure 1-5-23

4. Remove the left registration cleaner.

Left registration cleaner
5. Replace the left registration cleaner and reg-
istration guides.
Install the left registration cleaner and regis-
tration guides.
6. Refit the left registration roller, roller stop-
pers and transfer roller unit.

Figure 1-5-24

1-5-10
 2KR/2KS

Removing the right registration cleaner

1. Remove the developing unit and drum unit.
(see pages 1-5-28 and 1-5-25).
2. Remove the right registration cleaner.
3. Replace the right registration cleaner and
Install the cleaner.
4. Refit the drum unit and developing unit.

Right registration cleaner

Frame

Figure 1-5-25

1-5-11
2KR/2KS

1-5-3 Optical section

(1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp

Replace the exposure lamp as follows.

Procedure
1. Remove the original cover or the DP.
2. Remove the ISU filter cover.
ISU filter cover
3. Remove ten screws and then remove the
rear cover.

Screws

DP

A2
Screws
B1

Screw
OP
T1

Rear cover

Screws

Figure 1-5-26

4. Remove the clip holder. Clip holder

5. Open the front cover and left cover 1. Screw
6. Remove four screws and remove front left
cover.

Screws

Front left cover Screw

Figure 1-5-27

1-5-12
 2KR/2KS

7. Remove the screw and pin.

8. Remove the left upper cover.
Left upper cover

Pin

Screw

Figure 1-5-28

9. Remove two screws and then remove the

scanner left cover.
Scanner left cover

Screw

Screw

Figure 1-5-29

10. Remove two screws and then remove the

scanner right cover. Contact glass
Screw
11. Remove the contact glass.

Screw

DP

A2

B1

Scanner right cover

T1
OP

Figure 1-5-30

1-5-13
2KR/2KS

12. Remove the connector from the inverter

PWB.
13. Draw the connector into the machine inside
from opening.

Inverter PWB

Connector

Opening

Figure 1-5-31

14. Remove the sponge from the wire guide and

Wire holder
release the wire.
15. Move the mirror 1 frame to notch position.
16. Release the wire holder and then remove Wire
the wire.

Mirror 1 frame
Sponge

Wire
Mirror 1 frame
Wire guide

Figure 1-5-32

1-5-14
 2KR/2KS

17. Remove the screw and then remove the Exposure lamp
exposure lamp from mirror 1 frame.
18. Check or replace the exposure lamp and Mirror 1
frame
then install the lamp. Screw
19. Refit all the removed parts.
Exposure
lamp

Mirror 1 frame

Figure 1-5-33

1-5-15
2KR/2KS

(2) Detaching and refitting the scanner wires

Take the following procedure when the scanner wires are broken or to be replaced.

NOTE
When fitting the wires, be sure to use those specified below.
Machine front: (P/N: 302H717380), black
Machine rear: (P/N: 302H717390), gray

Fitting requires the following tools

Two frame securing tools (P/N 302FZ17100)
Two scanner wire stoppers (P/N 3596811)

Procedure
Detaching the scanner wires
1. Remove the exposure lamp (see page 1-5-
12).
2. Remove each screw and then remove front
and rear wire holder plates from mirror 1
frame.
3. Remove the mirror 1 frame.

Mirror 1 frame

Rear wire
Screw holder plate

Screw

Front wire
holder plate

Mirror 1 frame

Mirror 1 frame

Figure 1-5-34

1-5-16
 2KR/2KS

4. Remove the round terminals from the scan-

ner wire springs on scanner unit left side.
5. Remove the scanner wire.

Round terminal

Round terminal

Scanner wire
spring

Scanner wire
spring

Figure 1-5-35

Fitting the scanner wires

6. Move the mirror 2 frame as shown in the fig- Frame securing tool
ure and insert two frame securing tools into
the positioning holes at the front and rear of
the machine center to fix the mirror 2 frame
in position.

Frame securing tool

Mirror 2 frame

Figure 1-5-36

1-5-17
2KR/2KS

7. Hook the round terminals onto the catches inside of the scanner unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1)
8. Loop the scanner wires around the outer grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame,
winding from below to above. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (2)
9. Loop the scanner wire around the groove in the scanner wire pulley at the scanner unit right,
winding from above to below. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3)
10. Wind the scanner wires around the scanner wire drum five turns from the rear toward the hole
in the drum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4)
11. Insert the locating ball on the scanner wire into the hole in the scanner wire drum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (5)
12. Wind the scanner wires three turns from the inner toward the hole in the drum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (6)
13. Install the scanner wire stoppers to the scanner wire drum to fix the wires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (7)
14. Loop the scanner wire around the groove in the scanner wire pulley at the scanner unit left,
winding from below to above. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (8)
15. Loop the scanner wires around the inner grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame,
winding from below to above. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (9)
16. Hook the scanner wires around the scanner wire guides at the machine left.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (10)
17. Hook the round terminal onto the scanner wire spring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (11)

Five turns from Five turns from

the rear toward the rear toward
Locating ball

Three turns from Three turns from

the inner toward the inner toward

Figure 1-5-37

1-5-18
 2KR/2KS

18. Remove the two scanner wire stoppers and Frame securing tool
frame securing tools.
19. Focusing on the locating ball of the wire
drum, move aside the wires to inside.
20. Move the mirror 2 frame from side to side to Mirror 2 frame
correctly locate the wires in position.
21. Refit the mirror 1 frame. Frame securing tool
22. Move the mirror 1 and 2 frames to the
machine left, and insert the two frame secur-
ing tools into the positioning holes at the
front and rear of the scanner unit to secure
the frames in position.
23. Hold the wires and fix each front and rear
wire holder plate to mirror 1 frame with the
Mirror 1 frame
screw.
24. Remove the two frame securing tools.
25. Refit the exposure lamp.

Figure 1-5-38

1-5-19
2KR/2KS

(3) Detaching and refitting the ISU (reference)

Follow the procedure below to replace the ISU.

Fitting requires the following tools

Two positions pins (P/N 18568120)

Procedure
Detaching the ISU
1. Remove the contact glass (see page 1-5-
12). Screws
Screws
2. Remove seven screws and then remove the
ISU cover.

ISU cover

Screws

Figure 1-5-39

3. Remove three screws and two connectors,

and then remove the ISU.
4. Check or replace the ISU. Screws
Screw
Connector

Connector

ISU

Figure 1-5-40

1-5-20
 2KR/2KS

Refitting the ISU

5. Adjust the position of ISU to the frame hole
of number and the same number which are
recorded in the lens of ISU and then insert
two positioning pins.
Example: When a lens number is 5, move ISU
ISU so that the positioning hole of 5 of the
number stamped in the scanner unit suit and
Positioning pins
insert two pins.
6. Remove two positioning pins after fixing ISU
with three screws.

Positioning hole Positioning hole

Lens number

Figure 1-5-41

7. Refit two connectors.

8. Refit the ISU cover. Screws B
Screws A
Screw tightening order
1) Three screws A
2) Four screws B ISU cover
9. Refit the contact glass.
Screws B

Connector

Connector

Figure 1-5-42

1-5-21
2KR/2KS

(4) Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit

Take the following procedure when the laser scanner unit is to be replaced.

Procedure
1. Remove the developing unit and drum unit
(see pages 1-5-28 and 1-5-25).
2. Remove the right lower cover and front left
cover (see pages 1-5-5 and 1-5-12).
3. Remove four screws and remove the front
right cover.

Screw

Screws

Front right cover

Screw

Figure 1-5-43

4. Remove three screws and remove the top

tray.

Screws
Screw

Top tray

Figure 1-5-44

5. Remove five screws and remove the inner

cover.
Screws

Screw
Screw

Inner cover

Screw

Figure 1-5-45

1-5-22
 2KR/2KS

6. Remove two screws and two connectors, Fan duct Connectors

and then remove the fan duct.

Screw
Screw

Figure 1-5-46

7. Remove six screws and remove the toner Toner container retainer
container retainer.

Screw
Screw

Screw

Screw

Screws

Figure 1-5-47

8. Remove two pins, two springs, one screw Pin Pin

and one connector. Connector
9. Remove the laser scanner unit. Spring Spring
10. Replace the laser scanner unit and install
the unit.
11. Refit the toner container retainer, fan duct
and inner cover.
12. Refit the top tray, front right cover, right Screw
lower cover and front left cover.
13. Refit the drum unit and the developing unit.

Laser scanner unit

Figure 1-5-48

1-5-23
2KR/2KS-1

(5) Adjusting the skew of the laser scanner unit (reference)

Perform the following adjustment if the leading and trailing edges of the copy image are laterally skewed (lateral square-
ness not obtained).

Procedure

Start

Enter maintenance mode. Refit the laser scanner unit and

turn the main power switch on.

Enter 402 using the numeric keys.

Press the start key. Turn the main power switch off and carry
out steps 1 to 7 of (5) Detaching and
refitting the laser scanner unit (see page
1-5-22).
Press the system menu key. For copy example 1:
Loosen the screw in the direction of the
white arrow ( ).
Press the start key and make Reduce the height of the LSU spacer in
a copy at 100% magnification. the direction of the white arrow ( ).
For copy example 2:
Tighten the screw in the direction of the
black arrow ( ).
Increase the height of the LSU spacer in
the direction of the black arrow ( ).
No
Is the image correct?

Yes
Press the stop key to
exit maintenance mode.

End
Correct image Copy Copy
example 1 example 2

Figure 1-5-49

Screw

LSU spacer

Figure 1-5-50

1-5-24
 2KR/2KS-1

1-5-4 Drum section

(1) Detaching and refitting the drum unit

Follow the procedure below to replace the drum unit.

Cautions:
Avoid direct sunlight or strong light when detaching and refitting the drum unit.
Never touch the drum surface when holding the drum unit.

Procedure
1. Remove the developing unit (see page 1-5-
28).
2. Remove the main charger unit (see page 1-
5-26).
3. Remove the screw and the drum unit.
4. Replace the drum unit and install the unit.

Screw

Drum unit

Figure 1-5-51

1-5-25
2KR/2KS

(2) Detaching and refitting the main charger unit

Follow the procedure below to replace the main charger unit.

Procedure
1. Remove the developing unit (see page 1-5-
28). Inserted part
2. Release the inserted part and remove the
connector cover.
3. Remove the connector.

Connector

Connector cover

Figure 1-5-52

4. Remove the screw. Hole

5. While pushing the hole with a sharp-pointed
object, remove the main charger unit.

Screw

Main charger unit

Figure 1-5-53

6. Release the inserted part and remove the

cleaning motor unit from the main charger Inserted part
unit.
7. Replace the main charger unit.
8. Refit the cleaning motor unit to the main
charger unit.
9. Install the main charger unit. Main charger unit

Cleaning motor unit

Figure 1-5-54

1-5-26
 2KR/2KS

(3) Detaching and refitting the drum separation claws

Follow the procedure below to replace the drum separation claws.

Procedure
1. Remove the developing unit (see page 1-5-
28). Drum unit
2. Remove the drum unit (see page 1-5-25).
3. Remove two screws and remove the lower
cleaning seal.

Screw

Lower cleaning seal

Screw

Figure 1-5-55

4. Release the inserted part and remove the

drum separation claws from the lower clean-
ing seal.
5. Replace the drum separation claws and
Install the claws.
6. Refit the lower cleaning seal to the drum
unit.
7. Refit the drum unit and developing unit.

Lower cleaning seal

Lower cleaning
seal
drum separation
claw

Figure 1-5-56

1-5-27
2KR/2KS-1

1-5-5 Developing section

(1) Detaching and refitting the developing unit

Follow the procedure below to replace the developing unit.

Procedure
1. Open the front cover.
Developing release lever
2. Remove the toner container and waste toner
box.
3. Remove the pin and turn the developing
release lever in the direction of the arrow.

Pin

Figure 1-5-57

4. Remove the developing unit.

5. Replace the developing unit and install the
unit.
6. Perform maintenance mode U130 (see
page 1-3-49).

Developing unit

Figure 1-5-58

1-5-28
 2KR/2KS

1-5-6 Transfer section

(1) Detaching and refitting the transfer roller unit

Follow the procedure below to replace the transfer roller unit.

Procedure
1. Open the left cover 1.
Transfer roller unit
2. While holding down the projection, slide the
transfer roller unit toward the front to remove
it.
3. Replace the transfer roller unit and install
the unit.
4. Perform maintenance mode U127 to clear
the counter value (see page 1-3-48).

Projection

Figure 1-5-59

1-5-29
2KR/2KS

1-5-7 Fuser section

(1) Detaching and refitting the fuser unit

Follow the procedure below to check or replace the fuser unit.

Procedure
1. Remove the clip holder.
Clip holder
2. Open the front cover and left cover 1.
Screw
3. Remove four screws and remove front left
cover.

Screws

Front left cover Screw

Figure 1-5-60

4. Remove the screw and remove the fuser

unit.
5. Check or replace the fuser unit and install
the unit.
6. Perform maintenance mode U167 to clear
the counter value (see page 1-3-52).

Screw

Fuser unit

Figure 1-5-61

1-5-30
 2KR/2KS

(2) Detaching and refitting the heat roller separation claws

Follow the procedure below to replace the heat roller separation claws.

Procedure
1. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-5-30).
Pin
2. Remove the two pins and remove the upper
Upper fuser cover
fuser cover while holding the four claws.

Pin

Claws

Claws

Figure 1-5-62

3. Remove the heat roller separation claws

from the upper fuser cover.
4. Replace the heat roller separation claws and
install the claws to upper fuser cover.
5. Refit the upper fuser cover.
6. Refit the fuser unit.

Heat roller
separation claws

Figure 1-5-63

1-5-31
2KR/2KS

(3) Detaching and refitting the press roller

Follow the procedure below to replace the press roller.

Procedure
1. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-5-30).
2. Remove the upper fuser cover (see page 1- Press spring
5-31).
3. Remove the front and rear press springs.

Press spring

Figure 1-5-64

4. Remove the press roller from the fuser unit.

5. Replace the press roller and install the roller
to fuser unit.
6. Refit the upper fuser cover.
7. Refit the fuser unit.

Press roller

Figure 1-5-65

1-5-32
 2KR/2KS

(4) Detaching and refitting the fuser heater

Follow the procedure below to replace the fuser heater.

Procedure
1. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-5-30).
2. Remove the upper fuser cover (see page 1-
5-31).
3. Remove two screws and the connector.

Connector

Screw

Screw

Figure 1-5-66

4. Pull out the fuser heater from the fuser unit.

Fuser heater

Figure 1-5-67
5. Replace the fuser heater and install the
heater to fuser unit.
6. Refit the upper fuser cover.
7. Refit the fuser unit.

1-5-33
2KR/2KS

(5) Detaching and refitting the heat roller

Follow the procedure below to replace the heat roller.

Procedure
1. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-5-30).
2. Remove the upper fuser cover (see page 1-
5-31).
3. Remove the press roller and fuser heater
(see page 1-5-32 and 1-5-33).
4. Remove the fuser gear.

Fuser gear

Figure 1-5-68

5. Remove the heat roller from the fuser unit.

Remove the C ring, gear, bearing and bush-
ing on the rear side of the heat roller and
remove the C ring, ground plate, bearing
and bushing on the front side.
6. Replace the heat roller and install the roller
to the fuser unit.

Bushing
Bearing

Heat roller
C ring
Gear
Bearing

Ground plate

Bushing
C ring

Figure 1-5-69
7. Refit the fuser gear.
8. Refit the fuser heater, press roller and upper
fuser cover.
9. Refit the fuser unit.

1-5-34
 2KR/2KS

(6) Detaching and refitting the fuser thermistor 1 and 2

Follow the procedure below to replace the fuser thermistor 1 and 2.

Procedure
1. Remove the fuser unit (see page 1-5-30).
2. Remove the upper fuser cover (see page 1-
5-31).
3. Release the stopper of the fuser thermistor
2.
4. Remove the connector and remove the
fuser thermistor 2.
5. Replace the fuser thermistor 2 and install
the thermistor to fuser unit.

Stopper

Connector

Fuser thermistor 2

Figure 1-5-70

6. Remove the press roller and fuser heater Connector

(see page 1-5-32 and 1-5-33).
7. Remove the heat roller (see page 1-5-34).
8. Remove the screw and the connector, and
then remove the fuser thermistor 1.
9. Replace the fuser thermistor 1 and install
the thermistor to fuser unit. Screw
10. Refit the heat roller, fuser heater, press roller
and upper fuser cover.
11. Refit the fuser unit.

Fuser thermistor 1

Figure 1-5-71

1-5-35
2KR/2KS

(7) Adjusting front position of the fuser unit (adjusting lateral squareness)
Follow the procedure below if the drum is not parallel to the fuser unit and therefore paper is not fed straight to the fuser
section and the trailing edge of image on either the front or rear side becomes longer.

Procedure

Start

Place the original on the platen.

Tighten the two screws. Refit the front
left cover and close the front cover.

Press the start key and make

a test copy at 100 % magnification.
Open the front cover and remove the
front left cover (see page 1-5-30).
Loosen the screw holding each of the
fuser unit and adjusting spacer.
For copy example 1:
Move the adjusting spacer in the direction
of the white arrow ( ) to raise the front
No position of the fuser unit.
Is the image correct? For copy example 2:
Move the adjusting spacer in the direction
of the black arrow ( ) to lower the front
Yes position of the fuser unit.

End

Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2

Figure 1-5-72

Fuser unit

Screw
Screw Adjusting spacer

Figure 1-5-73

1-5-36
 2KR/2KS

1-5-8 Others

(1) Detaching and refitting the ozone filter 1 and 2

Follow the procedure below to replace the ozone filter 1 and 2.

Procedure
1. Remove the ozone filter 1 from the machine
left side.

Ozone filter 1

Figure 1-5-74

2. Open the filter cover of the machine rear

Ozone filter 2
side and remove the ozone filter 2.
3. Replace the ozone filter 1 and 2 and install
the filters.

Filter cover

Figure 1-5-75

1-5-37
2KR/2KS

(2) Detaching and refitting the dust filter 1 and 2

Follow the procedure below to replace the dust filter 1 and 2.

Procedure
1. Open the MP tray.
2. Remove the dust filter 1 and 2 from the
machine.
3. Replace the dust filter 1 and 2 and install the
filters.

Dust filter 1

Dust filter 2

Figure 1-5-76

1-5-38
 2KR/2KS

(3) Detaching and refitting the ISU filter

Follow the procedure below to replace the ISU filter.

Procedure
1. Remove the ISU filter cover.
2. Replace the ISU filter and install the filter to
the ISU filter cover.
ISU filter cover

ISU filter

Figure 1-5-77

1-5-39
2KR/2KS

(4) Detaching and refitting the hard disk

Follow the procedure below to replace the hard disk.

Procedure
1. Remove the ISU filter cover.
2. Remove ten screws and then remove the
rear cover. ISU filter cover

Screws

DP

A2
Screws
B1

Screw
OP
T1

Rear cover

Screws

Figure 1-5-78

3. Remove the screw and then remove the

main PWB lid.
4. Remove the fifteen screws and then remove
the shield lid.

DP

Shield lid
Screw
Screws
Main PWB lid

Figure 1-5-79

1-5-40
 2KR/2KS

5. Remove two cable clamps.

6. Pressing the lock lever and remove the fol-
lowing connectors.
Connector (Blue)
Connector (Black)
Connector (Blue)
7. Remove the power source connector.

Cable
clamps
Connector (Black)

DP

Power source
connector
Lock lever

Connector

Cable clamp

Figure 1-5-80

8. Remove two screws and then remove the

hard disk mount assembly.

Screws

Hard disk
mount assembly

Figure 1-5-81

1-5-41
2KR/2KS

9. Pressing the lock lever and remove the fol-

lowing connectors. Hard disk
mount assembly Lock lever
Connector (Blue)
Connector (Black)
Two power source connectors
10. Replace the hard disk mount assembly and
refit all the removed parts.
11. Perform maintenance mode U024 (HDD ini-
tializing) (see page 1-3-19).
Reinstall applications as necessary after ini-
tializing the HDD.
12. Perform maintenance mode U917 (backup
data writing) (see page 1-3-100).
Connector (Black)

Hard disk

Hard disk
Lock lever
Connector (Blue)

Power source
connectors

Figure 1-5-82

1-5-42
 2KR/2KS

(5) Direction of installing the principal fan motors

When detaching or refitting the fan motors, be careful of the airflow direction (intake or exhaust).

Intake
Developing fan motor
(Rating label: inside)

Figure 1-5-83Machine right

Paper conveying
fan motor 3
(Rating label: outside)
Paper conveying Exhaust
fan motor 2
(Rating label: outside)
Paper conveying
fan motor 1
(Rating label: outside)

Duplex fan motor 3

(Rating label: outside)

Duplex fan motor 2

Exhaust (Rating label: outside)

Duplex fan motor 1

(Rating label: outside)

Figure 1-5-84Machine left

1-5-43
2KR/2KS

Scanner fan motor

(Rating label: inside)
Controller fan motor
(Rating label: inside)

Intake Exhaust

Fuser fan motor

(Rating label: outside)

Intake
Power source
fan motor 2
(Rating label: upside)

Power source
fan motor 1
(Rating label: inside)

Figure 1-5-85Machine rear

1-5-44
 2KR/2KS-1

1-6 Requirements on PWB Replacement

1-6-1 Upgrading the firmware

Follow the procedure below to upgrade the firmware of main PWB, engine PWB, scanner and panel.

Procedure
1. Perform maintenance item U000 (mainte-
nance report output) and check U019 ROM
version.
2. Press the power key on the operation panel
to off. Make sure that the main power indica-
tor and the memory indicator are off before DP

turning off the main power switch. And then

unplug the power cable from the wall outlet.
A2

B1

3. Insert USB memory in a notch hole of the

machine.
4. Insert the power plug and turn the main OPT
1

power switch on. Upgrading firmware starts.

Caution:
Never turn the main power switch off during
upgrading.

USB memory

Figure 1-6-1
5. [100% Completed] is displayed on the touch
panel when upgrading is complete.
6. Turn the main power switch off and unplug
the power cable from the wall outlet.
7. Remove USB memory from the machine.
8. Insert the power plug and turn the main
power switch on.
9. Perform maintenance item U000 (mainte-
nance report output) and check that U019
ROM version has been upgraded.

1-6-2 Adjustment-free variable resistors (VR)

The variable resistors listed below are set at the factory prior to shipping and cannot be adjusted in the field.
High voltage PWB: VR2, VR42, VR201, VR204

1-6-1
2KR/2KS

1-6-3 Remarks on main PWB replacement

When replacing the main PWB, remove EEPROM (YC14) from the main PWB that has been removed and then reattach it
to the new main PWB.

EEPROM
Main PWB (YC14)

Figure 1-6-2

1-6-2
 2KR/2KS

1-6-4 Remarks on engine PWB replacement

When replacing the engine PWB, remove the EEPROM (U3) from the engine PWB that has been removed and then reat-
tach it to the new engine PWB.

Engine PWB

EEPROM
(U3)

Figure 1-6-3

1-6-3
2KR/2KS

When removing YC1, YC2, YC3, YC4, YC8, YC9, YC11 from the main PWB and YC2 from the engine PWB, press the
lock lever.
When connecting the hard disk cables (YC1, YC2) to the PWB, match "BLACK" and "BLUE" marked on the PWB with the
connector colors.

Connector (YC1, YC2)

Lock lever

Connector (YC11)

Lock lever

Connector (YC3)
Connector (YC4)

Lock lever

Main PWB Connector (YC2)

Connector (YC11)

Connector (YC1)

DP

Connector (YC9)
A2

B1
Connector (YC8)

Connector (YC2)

OP
T1

Lock lever

Lock lever

Engine PWB

Connector (YC3, YC4, YC8, YC9)

Connector (YC2)

Figure 1-6-4

1-6-4
 2KR/2KS

2-1 Mechanical construction

2-1-1 Paper feed section

The paper feed section consists of the primary feed and secondary feed subsections. Primary feed conveys paper from
the cassettes 1, 2 or MP tray to the left and right registration rollers, at which point secondary feed takes place and the
paper travels to the transfer section in sync with the printing timing.

(1) Cassette paper feed section

Each cassette consists of a lift driven by the lift motor and other components. Each cassette can hold up to 500 sheets of
paper. Paper is fed from the cassette by the rotation of the forwarding pulley and paper feed pulley. The separation pulley
prevents multiple sheets from being fed at one time, via the torque limiter.

12 11

19

14 13
20
21
5

9
1

16 6 4
2
15 3
22
5
23
8
10
1
6 4

18 2
3
17

25 24

Figure 2-1-1 Cassette paper feed section

(1) Cassette base (10) Lift switch 2 (LSW2) (19) Registration switch (RSW)
(2) Cassette lift (11) Right registration roller (20) Feed switch 1 (FSW1)
(3) Cassette (12) Left registration roller (21) Actuator (Feed switch 1)
(4) Forwarding pulley (13) Feed roller 1 (22) Feed switch 2 (FSW2)
(5) Paper feed pulley (14) Feed pulley (23) Actuator (Feed switch 2)
(6) Separation pulley (15) Feed roller 2 (24) Feed switch 3 (FSW3)
(7) Paper switch 1 (PSW1) (16) Feed pulley (25) Actuator (Feed switch 3)
(8) Paper switch 2 (PSW2) (17) Feed roller 3
(9) Lift switch 1 (LSW1) (18) Feed pulley

2-1-1
2KR/2KS

EPWB

REGFECL
RCL YC10-B6

REGFEPS
RSW YC4-A2

FEED1CL
FCL1 YC23-2

UPFEPS
FSW1 YC23-4

UPLIPS
LSW1 YC8-B9

UPPAPS
PSW1 YC8-B12
PFCL1

UPFECL
YC10-B1

UPLIMOHI
FCL2 LM1 YC8-A17

UPLESW
PLSW1 YC8-B2
FSW2
UPWIDE0,1,2
PWSW1 YC9-3,4,5

LOLIPS
LSW2 YC8-B15

PFM LOPAPS
PSW2 YC8-B18
PFCL2

LOFECL
YC10-B4

LOLMOHI
LM2 YC8-B7

LOLESW
PLSW2 YC8-A19
FCL3
LOWIDE0,1,2
PWSW2 YC9-9,10,11
FSW3

FEED3CL
YC8-A5
FEED3SW
YC8-A2
FEED2CL
YC8-A12
FEED2SW
YC8-A7
SMOT_REM
YC11-10

Figure 2-1-2 Cassette paper feed section block diagram

2-1-2
 2KR/2KS

(2) MP tray paper feed section

The MP tray can be hold up to 200 sheets of paper at one time. Paper is fed from the MP tray by the rotation of the MP for-
warding pulley and MP paper feed pulley. Also during paper feed, the MP separation pulley prevents multiple sheets from
being fed at one time by the torque limiter.

9 8 5 11 4 3

2 1

10 12 10 6 14 13

Figure 2-1-3 MP tray paper feed section

(1) MP tray (9) MP feed roller 2

(2) MP lift guide (10) MP feed pulley
(3) Paper width guide (11) MP paper switch (MPPSW)
(4) MP forwarding pulley (12) MP feed switch (MPFSW)
(5) MP paper feed pulley (13) MP paper size length switch
(6) MP separation pulley (MPPLSW)
(7) Paper stopper (14) MP paper size width switch
(8) MP feed roller 1 (MPPWSW)

2-1-3
2KR/2KS

MPFCL MPPFCL
MPPWSW MPPLSW

MPFSW MPPSW

MPFSIZE0,1,2
MPFPAPCL
MPFPAPS
MPFFEPS

MPFFECL

MPFLEPS
YC5-A2

YC12-A11

YC12-A6

YC12-A9

YC12-A1,2,3

YC12-B14
EPWB

Figure 2-1-4 MP tray paper feed section block diagram

2-1-4
 2KR/2KS

2-1-2 Optical section

The optical section consists of the scanner, mirror frame and image scanner section for scanning and the laser scanner
unit for printing.

(1) Image scanner section

The original image is illuminated by the exposure lamp (EL) and scanned by the CCD in the CCD PWB (CCDPWB) via the
three mirrors and lens, the reflected light being converted to an electrical signal. The mirror 1 and 2 frame travel to scan on
the optical rails on the front and rear of the machine to scan from side to side. The speed of the mirror 2 frame is half the
speed of the mirror 1 frame.

6 13 12 3 2 7 10 14

5
6 4 8 11 9

Figure 2-1-5 Image scanner section

(1) Mirror 1 frame (8) CCD PWB (CCDPWB)

(2) Exposure lamp (EL) (9) ISC PWB (ISCPWB)
(3) Scanner reflector (10) ISU cover
(4) Mirror A (11) Scanner wire drum
(5) Mirror 2 frame (12) Contact glass
(6) Mirror B (13) Home position switch (HPSW)
(7) ISU lens (14) Original detection switch (ODSW)

2-1-5
2KR/2KS

Original

HPSW CCDPWB ISCPWB OSS ODSW

EL
SM

ORGSW
YC1 YC1
Lens

YC3
YC2 YC2
CCD
image
sensor

Image scanner unit YC4

image data
Reading
INPWB
SLAMPO

YC11

MPWB
YC5-4

HPSW Serial communication data signal

YC8-2 YC2
SMOT BN
YC7-1
ISMPWB SMOT AN
YC7-2
SMOT BP
YC7-3
SMOT AP
YC7-4
COSW1
YC4-2

Figure 2-1-6 Image scanner section block diagram

2-1-6
 2KR/2KS

(2) Laser scanner section

The image data scanned by the CCD PWB (CCDPWB) is processed on the main PWB (MPWB) and transmitted from
engine PWB (EPWB) as image printing data to the laser scanner unit (LSU). By repeatedly turning the laser on and off, the
laser scanner unit forms a latent image on the drum surface.

1
2
10
6
11
7

Figure 2-1-7 Laser scanner section

(1) APC PWB (APCPWB)

(2) Collimator lens
(3) Cylindrical lens
(4) Polygon motor (PM)
(5) Polygon mirror
(6) fθ lens
(7) Mirror
(8) Mirror
(9) PD sensor mirror
(10) Cylindrical correcting lens
(11) PD PWB (PDPWB)

2-1-7
2KR/2KS

PD
YC3-8

SAMPLE1
YC3-2
POWCONT
YC3-3
LASER
APCPWB YC3-4
VD+
PDPWB YC3-5
VD-
YC3-6

Collimator
lens
Cylindrical
lens

PM

EPWB
Polygon
mirror

f lens Mirror

PD sensor mirror

Laser scanner unit

SCAN
YC3-12
SCRDYN
YC3-13
SCLK
YC3-14

Figure 2-1-8 Laser scanner section block diagram

2-1-8
 2KR/2KS

2-1-3 Drum section

The drum section consists of the drum, main charger unit and cleaning section.
The drum is electrically charged uniformly by means of a main charger unit to form a latent image on the surface. In addi-
tion, the main charger unit is equipped with the main charger cleaning motor, and it is cleaning automatically.
The cleaning section consists of the cleaning blade that removes residual toner from the drum surface after the transfer
process, and the cleaning spiral that carries the residual toner back to the waste toner box.
The cleaning lamp (CL) consists of LEDs and removes residual charge on the drum before main charging.
.

7 8 9

5
10

3
2
4

Figure 2-1-9 Drum section

(1) Drum
(2) Main charger unit
(3) Main charger wire
(4) Main charger grid
(5) Main charger spiral
(6) Cleaning roller
(7) Cleaning spiral
(8) Cleaning blade
(9) Cleaning lamp (CL)
(10) Drum separation claws

2-1-9
2KR/2KS

EEDATA
YC5-B8
EEPROM EESCLK
YC5-B9

ERASER
YC5-B6
MCMFWD,REV MCMFWD,REV
YC5-B13,14
DRPWB
ERASER
CL
MCCM

Drum unit
EPWB
Main charger wire

Drum

MAIN HV MHVDR
YC1-4 YC13-4

HVPWB

Figure 2-1-10 Drum section block diagram

2-1-10
 2KR/2KS-2

2-1-4 Developing section

The developing section consists of the developing unit and the toner container.
The developing unit consists of the developing sleeve where a magnetic toner blade is formed, the doctor blade and the
developing spirals that agitate the toner. When the toner sensor (TNS) detects a low toner level in the developing unit, the
toner replenishment signal is output to the engine PWB (EPWB). The engine PWB (EPWB) that has received the signal
turns on the toner replenishment solenoid (TNFSOL) and replenishes toner from the toner container to the developing
unit. Also, the toner container sensor (TCS) checks whether or not toner remains in the toner container.

8
5
7

3 4

Figure 2-1-11 Developing section

(1) Developing unit

(2) Developing sleeve
(3) Left developing spiral
(4) Right developing spiral
(5) Magnetic toner blade
(6) Toner sensor (TNS)
(7) Toner container
(8) Toner container sensor (TCS)

2-1-11
2KR/2KS

TONERSOL
TNFSOL YC5-B2

TCS ETONPS
YC5-A5

TOOVSE
OFS YC12-B5
Developing
sleeve

TNEDIN EPWB
TNS
DEVPWB
TNEDIN
YC5-A9

EEDATA
YC5-A13
EEPROM EESCLK
YC5-A14

Developing unit

BVSEL1
YC1-1 YC13-1
Dev Bias
HVPWB BVSEL2
YC1-9 YC13-9

DLPCL
DEVCL YC7-1

Figure 2-1-12 Developing section block diagram

2-1-12
 2KR/2KS

(1) Single component developing system

This machine uses the single component developing system, and reversal processing is performed with a + charged drum
and a + charged magnetic toner.
With the single component developing system, toner is electrically charged by friction with the developing sleeve and +
charged when it passes through the magnetic toner blade. The toner that has passed through the magnetic toner blade
forms a uniform layer on the developing sleeve. When the toner layer comes to the location where the developing sleeve
is the nearest to the drum, toner moves between the drum and the developing sleeve by an electric field of the magnetic
pole. Then, when the developing sleeve rotates and passes through the nearest location to the drum, on the portion of the
drum that has been exposed to light, toner is attracted toward the drum by potential difference between the developing
bias and the drum surface and development is performed. On the other hand, on the portion of the drum that has not been
exposed to light, toner is attracted toward the sleeve and development is not performed. When toner comes to an area
where the gap between the drum and the developing sleeve is large, an electric field disappears and toner does not leave
the developing sleeve. Development is complete.

Magnetic toner blade

Toner

South pole

Drum North pole

Developing sleeve

Figure 2-1-13 Single component developing system

2-1-13
2KR/2KS

2-1-5 Transfer and separation sections

The transfer and separation section consists mainly of the transfer roller, separation electrode and drum separation claws.
A high voltage generated by the high-voltage PWB (HVPWB) is applied to the transfer roller for transfer charging. Paper
after transfer is separated from the drum by applying separation bias that is output from the high-voltage PWB (HVPWB)
to the separation electrode.

1 5

Figure 2-1-14 Transfer and separation sections

(1) Transfer roller

(2) Transfer guide
(3) Separation electrode
(4) Drum separation claws
(5) Drum

Separation
electrode
RHVDR AC HV
YC13-6 CN1-6
Drum
THVDR TC HV
YC13-10 CN1-10

Transfer roller
HVPWB

EPWB

Figure 2-1-15 Transfer and separation sections block diagram

2-1-14
 2KR/2KS

2-1-6 Fuser section

The fuser section consists of the parts shown in Figure. When paper reaches the fuser section after the transfer process,
it passes between the press roller and heat roller, which is heated by fuser heaters 1 or 2 (FH1 or FH2). Pressure is
applied by the fuser pressure springs so that the toner on the paper is melted, fused and fixed onto the paper. The heat
roller is heated by fuser heaters 1 or 2 (FH1 or FH2) inside it; its surface temperature is detected by the fuser thermistor 1
and 2 (FTH1/2), and is regulated by the fuser heaters turning on and off.
If the fuser section becomes abnormally hot, fuser thermostat 1 and 2 (FTS1/2) operates shutting the power to the fuser
heaters off. When the fusing process is completed, the paper is separated from the heat roller by its separation claws and
is conveyed from the machine to eject and switchback section.

10 4

7, 8
2
9 3

1 5

Figure 2-1-16 Fuser section

(1) Heat roller

(2) Fuser heater 1 (FH1)
(3) Fuser heater 2 (FH2)
(4) Heat roller separation claws
(5) Fuser thermistor 1 (FTH1)
(6) Fuser thermistor 2 (FTH2)
(7) Fuser thermostat 1 (FTS1)
(8) Fuser thermostat 2 (FTS2)
(9) Press roller
(10) Press roller separation claws

2-1-15
2KR/2KS

PSPWB
FTS1

MH
YC5-1 FH1
FTS2 FTH2
SH ILSW
YC5-2 FH2

FTH1

LIVE
YC5-3 YC2
RYPWB
FUPWB

YC1
THFUSER

THCSEN
THCSTD
FUSPO
REM
YC6-1

YC4-A4

YC4-A6

YC4-A8

YC4-A9
HITON_M
YC2-3 YC22-4
EPWB
HITON_S
YC2-2 YC22-5

Figure 2-1-17 Fuser section block diagram

2-1-16
 2KR/2KS

2-1-7 Eject and switchback sections

The eject and switchback sections eject paper on which fixing has ended with the eject roller that is rotated by forward
rotation of the eject motor.
In duplex copying, paper is turned over by reverse rotation of the eject motor. When paper is transferred to the job separa-
tor or the internal finisher, the feedshift solenoid (FSSOL) is turned on to activate the feedshift guide to switch the paper
transfer path.

4 2
10 9

6
3

5 1 8 7

Figure 2-1-18 Eject and switchback sections

(1) Feedshift guide

(2) Eject roller
(3) Eject pulley
(4) Switchback roller
(5) Switchback pulley
(6) Feedshift guide
(7) Eject switch (ESW)
(8) Actuator (Eject switch)
(9) Feedshift switch (FSSW)
(10) Actuator (Feedshift switch)

2-1-17
2-1-18
2KR/2KS

CHGSOL2
YC10-A1
CHGSOL1 FSSOL
YC10-A2

STEPBD
YC10-B11
STEPB
YC10-B12
STEPAD
EM

YC10-B13
STEPA

EPWB
YC10-B14

DUPS
YC10-A5
FSSW

FDEJPS
YC10-A11
ESW

Figure 2-1-19 Eject and switchback sections block diagram

 2KR/2KS

2-1-8 Duplex section

The duplex section consists of the components shown in figure. In duplex mode, after copying on to the reverse face of the
paper, the paper is reversed in the switchback section and conveyed to the duplex section. The paper is then conveyed to
the paper feed section by the upper and lower duplex feed rollers.

2 4

3 4

Figure 2-1-20 Duplex section

(1) Feedshift guide

(2) Upper duplex feed roller
(3) Lower duplex feed roller
(4) Duplex feed pulley
(5) Duplex paper conveying switch
(DUPPCSW)
(6) Actuator
(Duplex paper conveying switch)

2-1-19
2KR/2KS

DUPFM FAN_CONV
1,2,3 YC4-B7

EPWB

DUP DUFEPS
YC4-B4
PCSW

DUCL
DUPFCL YC4-B2

Figure 2-1-21 Duplex section block diagram

2-1-20
 2KR/2KS

2-2 Electrical Parts Layout

2-2-1 Electrical parts layout

(1) PWBs

11 12 9 10
6 5
13
15 8 14 7

16

4
21

19

1
20 18 17

Machine front

Machine inside

Machine rear

Figure 2-2-1 PWBs

1. Engine PWB (EPWB)................................... Controls the other PWBs, electrical components and optional devices.
2. Main PWB (MPWB) ..................................... Controls the image processing and operation panel.
3. Power source PWB (PSPWB) ..................... Generates +24 V DC, 5 V DC and 3.3 V DC; controls the fuser heaters.
4. High voltage PWB (HVPWB) ....................... Main charging. Generates developing bias and high voltages for transfer.
5. ISM PWB (ISMPWB) ................................... Controls the scanner section.
6. Inverter PWB (INPWB) ................................ Controls the exposure lamp.
7. ISC PWB (ISCPWB) .................................... Controls the shading correction and AGC of CCD.
8. CCD PWB (CCDPWB)................................. Reads the image of originals.
9. Main operation PWB (OPWB-M) ................. Controls touch panel and LCD indication.
10. Right operation PWB (OPWB-R) ................. Consists of the operation keys and display LEDs.
11. Left operation PWB (OPWB-L) .................... Consists of the operation keys and display LEDs.
12. Upper operation PWB (OPWB-U)................ Consists of the operation keys and display LEDs.
13. Front operation PWB (OPWB-F).................. Consists of the display LEDs.
14. LCD inverter PWB (LINPWB) ...................... Controls LCD back light.
15. LCD PWB (LCDPWB).................................. Controls LCD indication.
16. Interface PWB (INPWB)............................... Consists of wiring relay circuits.
17. APC PWB (APCPWB) ................................. Generates and controls the laser beam.
18. PD PWB (LDPWB)....................................... Detects horizontal synchronizing timing of laser beam.

2-2-1
2KR/2KS

19. Drum PWB (DRPWB) .................................. Controls the drum section.

20. Developing PWB (DEVPWB)....................... Controls the developing section.
21. Fuser PWB (FUPWB) .................................. Controls the fuser section.

List of correspondences of PWB names

No. Name used in service manual Name used in parts list
1 Engine PWB (EPWB) PARTS PWB ENGINE SP
2 Main PWB (MPWB) PARTS MAIN PWB ASSY SP
3 Power source PWB (PSPWB) LVU 100/LVU 200
4 High voltage PWB (HVPWB) HVU
5 ISM PWB (ISMPWB) PARTS PWB ISM ASSY SP
6 Inverter PWB (INPWB) PARTS UNIT LAMP INVERTER
7 ISC PWB (ISCPWB) PARTS PWB ISC SP
8 CCD PWB (CCDPWB) -
9 Main operation PWB (OPWB-M) PARTS PWB PANEL MAIN SP
10 Right operation PWB (OPWB-R) PARTS PWB PANEL RIGHT ASSY SP
11 Left operation PWB (OPWB-L) PARTS PWB PANEL LEFT ASSY SP
12 Upper operation PWB (OPWB-U) OPERATION UPPER PWB ASS'Y
13 Front operation PWB (OPWB-F) OPERATION FRONT PWB ASS'Y
14 LCD inverter PWB (LINPWB) LCD INVERTER
15 LCD PWB (LCDPWB) LCD OPERATION
16 Interface PWB (IFPWB) PARTS PWB KUIO IF ASSY SP
17 APC PWB (APCPWB) -
18 PD PWB (PDPWB) -
19 Drum PWB (DRPWB) -
20 Developing PWB (DEVPWB) -
21 Fuser PWB (FUPWB) -

2-2-2
 2KR/2KS

(2) Switches and sensors

20 21
22

3 2
25

35
24

1
33
32
27
28
37
4
26 31
30
23 34
29 13 15 14
16 19
7
5

9
17 11
36 8
6 Machine front

Machine inside
10
12
18 Machine rear

Figure 2-2-2 Switches and sensors

1. Main power switch (MSW) ........................... Turns the AC power on and off.
2. Interlock switch (ILSW) ................................ Turns the AC power for the fuser heaters on and off.
3. Safety switch 1 (SSW1) ............................... Breaks the safety circuit when the left cover 1 is opened.
4. Safety switch 2 (SSW2) ............................... Breaks the safety circuit when the front cover is opened.
5. Paper switch 1 (PSW1)................................ Detects the presence of paper in cassette 1.
6. Paper switch 2 (PSW2)................................ Detects the presence of paper in cassette 2.
7. Lift switch 1 (LSW1) ..................................... Detects lift reaching the upper limit in cassette 1.
8. Lift switch 2 (LSW2) ..................................... Detects lift reaching the upper limit in cassette 2.
9. Paper size length switch 1 (PLSW1) ........... Detects the length of paper in the cassette 1.
10. Paper size length switch 2 (PLSW2)............ Detects the length of paper in the cassette 2.
11. Paper size width switch 1 (PWSW1)............ Detects the width of paper in the cassette 1.
12. Paper size width switch 2 (PWSW2)............ Detects the width of paper in the cassette 2.
13. MP paper switch (MPPSW) ......................... Detects the presence of paper on the MP tray.
14. MP paper size length switch (MPPLSW) ..... Detects the length of paper on the MP tray.
15. MP paper size width switch (MPPWSW) ..... Detects the width of paper on the MP tray.
16. Feed switch 1 (FSW1) ................................. Detects a paper misfeed in the paper cassette paper feed section.
17. Feed switch 2 (FSW2) ................................. Detects a paper misfeed in the paper cassette paper feed section.
18. Feed switch 3 (FSW3) ................................. Detects a paper misfeed in the paper cassette paper feed section.
19. MP feed switch (MPFSW)............................ Detects a paper misfeed in the MP tray paper feed section.
20. Home position switch (HPSW)..................... Detects the optical system in the home position.

2-2-3
2KR/2KS

21. Original detection switch (ODSW) ............... Detects the opening/closing of the original platen.
22. Original size sensor (OSS) .......................... Detects the size of the original.
23. Registration switch (RSW) ........................... Controls the secondary paper feed start timing.
24. Eject switch (ESW) ...................................... Detects a paper misfeed in the fuser section.
25. Feedshift switch (FSSW) ............................. Detects a paper misfeed in the switchback section in a duplex copy.
26. Toner sensor (TNS)...................................... Detects the toner density in the developing unit.
27. Toner container detection switch
(TCDSW) ..................................................... Detects the presence of the toner container.
28. Toner container sensor (TCS) ...................... Detects the quantity of toner in a toner container.
29. Waste toner box detection switch
(WTDSW)..................................................... Detects the presence of the waste toner box.
30. Overflow sensor (OFS) ................................ Detects when the waste toner box is full.
31. Humidity sensor (HUMS) ............................. Detects absolute humidity.
32. Fuser thermistor 1 (FTH1) ........................... Detects the heat roller temperature.
33. Fuser thermistor 2 (FTH2) ........................... Detects the heat roller temperature.
34. Front cover switch (FRCSW) ....................... Detects the opening and closing of the front cover.
35. Left cover 1 switch (LC1SW) ....................... Detects the opening and closing of the left cover 1.
36. Left cover 2 switch (LC2SW) ....................... Detects the opening and closing of the left cover 2.
37. Duplex paper conveying switch
(DUPPCSW) ................................................ Detects a paper jam in the duplex section.

2-2-4
 2KR/2KS

(3) Motors

13 5

6 7

12
8

17,18,19
1
20
14,15,16 11
21

10
2
3

Machine front
9
4 Machine inside

Machine rear

Figure 2-2-3 Motors

1. Drive motor (DM) ......................................... Drives the machine.

2. Paper feed motor (PFM) .............................. Drives paper feed section.
3. Lift motor 1 (LM1)......................................... Drives cassette 1 lift.
4. Lift motor 2 (LM2)......................................... Drives cassette 2 lift.
5. Scanner motor (SM)..................................... Drives the scanner section.
6. Eject motor (EM) .......................................... Drives the eject section.
7. Fuser fan motor (FUFM) .............................. Cools the fuser section.
8. Developing fan motor (DEVFM)................... Cools the developing section.
9. Power source fan motor 1 (PSFM1) ............ Cools the power source PWB.
10. Power source fan motor 2 (PSFM2) ............ Cools the power source PWB.
11. LSU fan motor (LSUFM) .............................. Cools the LSU.
12. Controller fan motor (CONFM)..................... Cools the controller box.
13. Scanner fan motor (SFM) ............................ Cools the scanner section.
14. Duplex fan motor 1 (DUPFM1)...................... Cools the machine interior and supports paper transfer for duplex copying.
15. Duplex fan motor 2 (DUPFM2)...................... Cools the machine interior and supports paper transfer for duplex copying.
16. Duplex fan motor 4 (DUPFM3)...................... Cools the machine interior and supports paper transfer for duplex copying.
17. Paper conveying fan motor 1 (PCFM1) ....... Cools the machine interior (around the paper conveying).
18. Paper conveying fan motor 2 (PCFM2) ....... Cools the machine interior (around the paper conveying).
19. Paper conveying fan motor 3 (PCFM3) ....... Cools the machine interior (around the paper conveying).
20. Main charger cleaning motor (MCCM)......... Drives the main charger auto cleaning.
21. Polygon motor (PM) ..................................... Drives the polygon mirror.

2-2-5
2KR/2KS

(4) Others

13

19 20
11

17,18
16
15

12
14

9
8

7 6
10 3

2
Machine front

5 Machine inside
21
Machine rear

Figure 2-2-4 Others

1. Paper feed clutch 1 (PFCL1) ....................... Primary paper feed from the cassette 1.
2. Paper feed clutch 2 (PFCL2) ....................... Primary paper feed from the cassette 2.
3. Feed clutch 1 (FCL1) ................................... Controls the drive of feed roller.
4. Feed clutch 2 (FCL2) ................................... Controls the drive of feed roller.
5. Feed clutch 3 (FCL3) ................................... Controls the drive of feed roller.
6. MP paper feed clutch (MPPFCL) ................. Primary paper feed from the MP tray.
7. MP feed clutch (MPFCL).............................. Controls the drive of MP feed roller.
8. Registration clutch (RCL)............................. Secondary paper feed.
9. Duplex feed clutch (DUPFCL)...................... Controls the drive of the duplex feed roller.
10. Developing clutch (DEVCL) ......................... Controls the drive of the developing section.
11. Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL)......................... Operates the feedshift guide.
12. Toner feed solenoid (TNFSOL) .................... Replenishes toner.
13. Exposure lamp (EL) ..................................... Exposes originals.
14. Cleaning lamp (CL) ...................................... Removes residual charge from the drum surface.
15. Fuser heater 1 (FH1) ................................... Heats the heat roller.
16. Fuser heater 2 (FH2) ................................... Heats the heat roller.
17. Fuser thermostat 1 (FTS1)........................... Prevents overheating in the fuser section.
18. Fuser thermostat 2 (FTS2)........................... Prevents overheating in the fuser section.
19. Hard disk unit 1 (HDD1)............................... Storages the image data and information of job accounting mode.
20. Hard disk unit 2 (HDD2)............................... Storages the image data and information of job accounting mode.
21. Cassette heater (CH) ................................... Dehumidifies the cassette section.

2-2-6
 2KR/2KS

2-3 Operation of the PWBs

2-3-1 Power source PWB

1 6 1 2

3 1
YC2 YC4
YC5 1

YC1

7
1
YC9
7
1
TB4 YC6
14
TB3
1
TB1 YC3
6
1

YC7 YC8
1

3 TB2 YC10 10

16 1

Figure 2-3-1 Power source PWB silk-screen diagram

2-3-1
2KR/2KS

Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description

TB1 LIVE I 120 V AC AC power input
TB
220-240 V AC
Connected TB2 COM I 120 V AC AC power input
to the inlet 220-240 V AC
and main TB3 LIVE O 120 V AC AC power output to MSW
power 220-240 V AC
switch
TB4 LIVE I 120 V AC AC power input from MSW
220-240 V AC
YC1 1 +24VD O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to EPWB
Connected 2 GND - - Ground
to the 3 GND - - Ground
engine PWB
and DP 4 GND - - Ground
5 +3.3VD O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to EPWB
6 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to EPWB
7 +24VDF O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to EPWB and DPDPWB
YC2 1 GND - - Ground
Connected 2 HITON_S I 0/3.3 V DC FH2: On/Off
to the 3 HITON_M I 0/3.3 V DC FH1: On/Off
engine PWB
4 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to EPWB
5 ZCROSS O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Zero-cross signal
6 FANREM I 0/24 V DC PSFM1,2: On/Off
YC3 1 SGND - - Ground
Connected 2 SGND - - Ground
to the docu- 3 SGND - - Ground
ment fin-
isher 4 SGND - - Ground
5 SGND - - Ground
6 SGND - - Ground
YC4 1 FANREM O 0/24 V DC PSFM1,2: On/Off
Connected 2 +24VD O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
to the power
source fan
motor 1/2
1 MH O 120/0 V AC FH1: On/Off
YC5
220-240/0 V AC
Connected 2 SH O 120/0 V AC FH2: On/Off
to the relay 220-240/0 V AC
PWB and 3 LIVE O 120 V AC AC power output to RYPWB
interlock 220-240 V AC
switch

2-3-2
 2KR/2KS

Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC6 1 +24VD O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to ISM PWB
Connected 2 +24VD O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to ISM PWB
to the ISM 3 +24VD O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to ISM PWB
PWB
4 PGND - - Ground
5 PGND - - Ground
6 PGND - - Ground
7 SGND - - Ground
8 SGND - - Ground
9 SGND - - Ground
10 SGND - - Ground
11 +12VD O 12 V DC 12 V DC power output to ISM PWB
12 +5VD - - Not used
13 +3.3VD - - Not used
14 +3.3VD - - Not used
1 LIVE O 120 V AC AC power output to CH
YC7
220-240 V AC
Connected 2 NC - - Not used
to the cas- 3 NEUTRAL O 120 V AC AC power output to CH
sette heater 220-240 V AC
YC8 1 +24VDF O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to paper feeder
Connected 2 +24VDF O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to document finisher
to the paper 3 +5VDF O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to document finisher
feeder, doc-
ument fin- 4 P.GND - - Ground
isher and 5 F.GND - - Ground
hard disk
6 P.GND - - Ground
7 +12V O 12 V DC 12 V DC power output to hard disk
8 GND - - Ground
9 GND - - Ground
10 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to hard disk
YC9 1 +12VD O 12 V DC 12 V DC power output to OPWB-M
Connected 2 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to OPWB-M
to the main 3 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to OPWB-M
operation
PWB 4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
7 NC - - Not used

2-3-3
2KR/2KS

Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC10 1 SLEEP_N I 0/5 V DC SLEEP signal
Connected 2 +5VDF O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to DPDPWB
to the main 3 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to MPWB
PWB, DP
and engine 4 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to MPWB
PWB 5 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to MPWB
6 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to MPWB
7 NC - - Not used
8 NC - - Not used
9 NC - - Not used
10 NC - - Not used
11 GND - - Ground
12 NC - - Not used
13 GND - - Ground
14 GND - - Ground
15 GND - - Ground
16 GND - - Ground

2-3-4
 2KR/2KS

2-3-2 Engine PWB

YC16 YC17 YC19 YC3

YC14 YC15 U38 YC2

U8

YC20 YC18
U7 U23 U25
U22 U21
U2 U6
YC1

U4 YC13
YC22
U1
U3 U20
U37 U15
U5 YC9
U24 U14 U13
U19 U18 U12
YC21 U17
U9
U10 U11
U16 YC8
YC6
YC4
YC11 YC23

YC10 YC7 YC5 YC12

Figure 2-3-2 Engine PWB silk-screen diagram

2-3-5
2KR/2KS-1

Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC2 1 MAIN_SCL I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MPWB clock signal
Connected 2 HLD_ENG I 0/3.3 V DC MPWB hold signal
to the main 3 MAIN_SI I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MPWB serial communication data signal
PWB
4 EG_SLEEPG I 0/3.3 V DC MPWB sleep signal: On/Off
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
8 VMRE_P I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
9 GND - - Ground
10 VMRE_N I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
11 VCLK_P I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data clock signal
12 VD_D0_P I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data control signal
13 VCLK_N I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data clock signal
14 VD_D0_N I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data control signal
15 GND - - Ground
16 VD_D1_P I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data control signal
17 GND - - Ground
18 VD_D1_N I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data control signal
19 GND - - Ground
20 VD_D2_P I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data control signal
21 GND - - Ground
22 VD_D2_N I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data control signal
23 GND - - Ground
24 VD_D3_P I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data control signal
25 GND - - Ground
26 VD_D3_N I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data control signal
27 HSYNC_DP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal
28 VSYNC_DP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Vertical synchronization signal
29 HSYNC_DN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal
30 VSYNC_DN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Vertical synchronization signal
31 HSYNC_CP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal
32 VSYNC_CP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Vertical synchronization signal
33 HSYNC_CN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal
34 VSYNC_CN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Vertical synchronization signal
35 HSYNC_BP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal
36 VSYNC_BP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Vertical synchronization signal
37 HSYNC_BN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal
38 VSYNC_BN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Vertical synchronization signal
39 HSYNC_AP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal
40 VSYNC_AP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Vertical synchronization signal
41 HSYNC_AN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal
42 VSYNC_AN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Vertical synchronization signal
43 GND - - Ground
44 GND - - Ground

2-3-6
 2KR/2KS-1

Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC2 45 GND - - Ground
Connected 46 MAIN_EGIRN I 0/3.3 V DC MPWB interrupt signal
to the main 47 MAIN_SO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) MPWB serial communication data signal
PWB
48 MAIN_SDIR I 0/3.3 V DC MPWB communication direction signal
49 MAIN_SBSY I 0/3.3 V DC MPWB busy signal
50 24V_OFF I 0/3.3 V DC MPWB 24 V down signal
YC3 1 5VSAFE I 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to APCPWB
Connected 2 SAMPLE1 O 0/3.3 V DC APCPWB sample/hold signal
to the laser 3 POWCONT O APCPWB power control signal
Analog
scanner unit
4 LASER O 0/3.3 V DC Laser diode output signal
5 VD+ O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal
6 VD- O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data signal
7 GND - - Ground
8 PD I 0/3.3 V DC Laser sync signal
9 GND - - Ground
10 R24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to PM
11 GND - - Ground
12 SCAN O 0/24 V DC PM: On/Off
13 SCRDYN I 0/3.3 V DC PM ready signal
14 SCCLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PM clock signal
YC4 A1 GND - - Ground
Connected A2 RGFEPS I 0/3.3 V DC RSW: On/Off
to the regis- A3 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to RSW
tration
switch, fuser A4 FUSP0 I 0/3.3 V DC Fuser unit distinction signal
unit, duplex A5 +3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to FUPWB
feed clutch,
A6 THFUSER I Analog FTH1 detection voltage signal
duplex
paper con- A7 GND - - Ground
veying A8 THCSTD I Analog FTH2 detection voltage signal
switch,
A9 THCSEN I Analog FTH2 detection voltage signal
paper con-
veying fan A10 OPEN - - Not used
motor 1/2/3 B1 R24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to DUPFCL
and duplex
fan motor 1/ B2 DUCL O 0/24 V DC DUPFCL: On/Off
2/3 B3 GND - - Ground
B4 DUFEPS I 0/3.3 V DC DUPPCSW: On/Off
B5 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to DUPPCSW
B6 +24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to PCFM1,2,3
B7 FAN_CONV O 0/24 V DC PCFM1,2,3: On/Off
B8 DUSET I 0/3.3 V DC Duplex unit distinction signal
B9 +24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to DUPFM1,2,3
B10 FAN5 O 0/24 V DC DUPFM1,2,3: On/Off

2-3-7
2KR/2KS

Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC5 A1 GND - - Ground
Connected A2 MPFFEPS I 0/3.3 V DC MPFSW: On/Off
to the MP A3 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to MPFSW
feed switch,
toner con- A4 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to TCS
tainer sen- A5 ETONPS I 0/3.3 V DC TCS detection signal
sor,
A6 GND - - Ground
developing
PWB, toner A7 DEVEP0 I 0/3.3 V DC Developing unit distinction signal
feed sole- A8 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to DEVPWB
noid, toner
A9 TNEDIN I 0/3.3 V DC TNS detection signal
container
detection A10 GND - - Ground
switch and A11 DVUNITN I 0/3.3 V DC Developing unit detection signal
drum PWB
A12 DVHIT O 0/3.3 V DC DEVPWB FUSE CUT signal
A13 EEDATA I/O 0/5 V DC (pulse) DEVPWB EEPROM DATA signal
A14 EESCLK O 0/5 V DC (pulse) DEVPWB EEPROM clock signal
B1 R24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to TNFSOL
B2 TONERSOL O 0/24 V DC TNFSOL: On/Off
B3 TOBOSW I 0/3.3 V DC TCDSW: On/Off
B4 GND - - Ground
B5 DRUMP0 I 0/3.3 V DC Drum unit distinction signal
B6 ERASER O 0/24 V DC CL: On/Off
B7 +24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to CL
B8 EEDATA I/O 0/5 V DC (pulse) DRPWB EEPROM DATA signal
B9 EESCLK O 0/5 V DC (pulse) DRPWB EEPROM clock signal
B10 GND - - Ground
B11 DRUNIT I 0/3.3 V DC Drum unit detection signal
B12 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to DRPWB
B13 MCMFWD O 0/24 V DC MCCM: On/Off (forward)
B14 MCMREV O 0/24 V DC MCCM: On/Off (reverse)
YC7 1 DLPCL O 0/24 V DC DEVCL: On/Off
Connected 2 +24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to DEVCL
to the devel-
oping clutch
YC8 A1 GND - - Ground
Connected A2 FEED2SW I 0/3.3 V DC FSW3: On/Off
to the feed A3 +5V2 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to FSW3
switch 2/3,
feed clutch A4 R24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to FCL3
2/3, left A5 FEED3CL O 0/24 V DC FCL3: On/Off
cover 2
A6 GND - - Ground
switch, lift
motor 1/2, A7 FEED2SW I 0/3.3 V DC FSW2: On/Off
paper size A8 +5V2 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to FSW2
length
A9 GND - - Ground
switch 1/2,
lift switch 1/ A10 FECOSW I 0/3.3 V DC LC2SW: On/Off
2 and paper A11 R24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to FCL2
switch 1/2
A12 FEED2CL O 0/24 V DC FCL2: On/Off
A13 UPLIFSW2 I 0/3.3 V DC LM1 paper gauge signal

2-3-8
 2KR/2KS

Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC8 A14 GND - - Ground
Connected A15 UPLIFSW1 I 0/3.3 V DC LM1 paper gauge signal
to the feed A16 GND - - Ground
switch 2/3,
feed clutch A17 UPLIMOHI O 0/24 V DC LM1: On/Off
2/3, left A18 GND - - Ground
cover 2
A19 LOLESW I 0/3.3 V DC PLSW2: On/Off
switch, lift
motor 1/2, B1 GND - - Ground
paper size B2 UPLESW I 0/3.3 V DC PLSW1: On/Off
length
B3 LOLIFSW2 I 0/3.3 V DC LM2 paper gauge signal
switch 1/2,
lift switch 1/ B4 GND - - Ground
2 and paper B5 LOLIFSW1 I 0/3.3 V DC LM2 paper gauge signal
switche1/2
B6 GND - - Ground
B7 LOLIMOHI O 0/24 V DC LM2: On/Off
B8 GND - - Ground
B9 UPLIPS I 0/3.3 V DC LSW1: On/Off
B10 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to LSW1
B11 GND - - Ground
B12 UPPAPS I 0/3.3 V DC PSW1: On/Off
B13 +5V2 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to PSW1
B14 GND - - Ground
B15 LOLIPS I 0/3.3 V DC LSW2: On/Off
B16 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to LSW2
B17 GND - - Ground
B18 LOPAPS I 0/3.3 V DC PSW2: On/Off
B19 +5V2 O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to PSW2
YC9 1 R24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to PWSW1
Connected 2 UP24V I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input from PWSW1
to the paper 3 UPWIDE0 I 0/3.3 V DC PWSW1: On/Off
size width
switch 1/2 4 UPWIDE1 I 0/3.3 V DC PWSW1: On/Off
5 UPWIDE2 I 0/3.3 V DC PWSW1: On/Off
6 GND - - Ground
7 R24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to PWSW2
8 LO24V I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input from PWSW2
9 LOWIDE0 I 0/3.3 V DC PWSW2: On/Off
10 LOWIDE1 I 0/3.3 V DC PWSW2: On/Off
11 LOWIDE2 I 0/3.3 V DC PWSW2: On/Off
12 GND - - Ground

2-3-9
2KR/2KS

Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC10 A1 CHGSOL2 O 0/24 V DC FSSOL: On/Off (return)
Connected A2 CHGSOL1 O 0/24 V DC FSSOL: On/Off (activate)
to the feed- A3 +24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to FSSOL
shift sole-
noid, A4 GND - - Ground
feedshift A5 DUPS I 0/3.3 V DC FSSW: On/Off
switch, eject
A6 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to FSSW
switch, fuser
fan motor, A7 GND - - Ground
left cover 1 A8 FDFULPS - - Not used
switch,
A9 +5V - - Not used
paper feed
clutch 1/2, A10 GND - - Ground
humidity A11 FDEJPS I 0/3.3 V DC ESW: On/Off
sensor and
eject motor A12 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to ESW
A13 24V1 O 24 V DC 5 V DC power output to FUFM
A14 FAN1 O 0/24 V DC FUFM: On/Off
A15 GND - - Ground
A16 SIDCOSW I 0/3.3 V DC LC1SW: On/Off
B1 UPFECL O 0/24 V DC PFCL1: On/Off
B2 UP24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to PFCL1
B3 LO24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to PFCL2
B4 LOFECL O 0/24 V DC PFCL2: On/Off
B5 +24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to RCL
B6 REGFECL O 0/24 V DC RCL: On/Off
B7 +3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to HUMS
B8 SDA I Analog HUMS detection voltage signal
B9 GND - - Ground
B10 SCL I Analog Thermistor detection voltage signal
B11 STEPBD O 0/24 V DC (pulse) EM drive control signal
B12 STEPB O 0/24 V DC (pulse) EM drive control signal
B13 STEPAD O 0/24 V DC (pulse) EM drive control signal
B14 STEPA O 0/24 V DC (pulse) EM drive control signal
B15 OPEN - - Not used
B16 OPEN - - Not used
YC11 1 +24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to DM
Connected 2 PGND - - Ground
to the drive 3 MMOT_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC DM ready signal
motor and
paper feed 4 MMOT_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DM clock signal
motor 5 MMOT_REM O 0/24 V DC DM: On/Off
6 +24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to PFM
7 PGND - - Ground
8 SMOT_RDY I 0/3.3 V DC PFM ready signal
9 SMOT_CLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) PFM clock signal
10 SMOT_REM O 0/24 V DC PFM: On/Off

2-3-10
 2KR/2KS

Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC12 A1 MPFSIZE0 I 0/3.3 V DC MPPWSW: On/Off
Connected A2 MPFSIZE1 I 0/3.3 V DC MPPWSW: On/Off
to the MP A3 MPFSIZE2 I 0/3.3 V DC MPPWSW: On/Off
unit, waste
toner box A4 GND - - Ground
detection A5 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output
switch, over-
A6 MPFPAPS I 0/3.3 V DC MPPSW: On/Off
flow sensor,
front cover A7 GND - - Ground
switch, LSU A8 R24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
fan motor
A9 MPFPAPCL O 0/24 V DC MPPFCL: On/Off
and devel-
oping fan A10 R24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
motor A11 MPFFECL O 0/24 V DC MPFCL: On/Off
B1 NC - - Not used
B2 +24V1 - - Ground
B3 DEVFAN O 0/24 V DC CFM2: On/Off
B4 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output
B5 TOOVSE I 0/3.3 V DC WTDSW: On/Off
B6 GND - - Ground
B7 OVFLSW I 0/3.3 V DC OFS: On/Off
B8 GND - - Ground
B9 FRTCOSW I 0/3.3 V DC FRCSW: On/Off
B10 GND - - Ground
B11 +24V1 O 0/24 V DC CFM1: On/Off
B12 FAN4 - - Ground
B13 +5VDPI O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output
B14 MPFLEPS I 0/3.3 V DC MPPLSW: On/Off
B15 GND - - Ground
YC13 1 BVSEL1 O Analog Developing bias control voltage
Connected 2 R24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to HVPWB
to the high- 3 GND - - Ground
voltage
PWB 4 MHVDR O 0/3.3 V DC Main charging: On/Off
5 HVCLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Developing bias clock signal
6 RHVDR O 0/3.3 V DC Separation charging: On/Off
7 RICTL O Analog Separation charging control voltage
8 TICTL O Analog Transfer charging control voltage
9 BVSEL2 O Analog Developing bias control voltage
10 THVDR O 0/3.3 V DC Transfer charging: On/Off

2-3-11
2KR/2KS

Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC14 1 DET I 0/5 V DC Document finisher connection signal
Connected 2 DFSDO O 0/5 V DC (pulse) Document finisher serial communication data sig-
to the docu- nal
ment fin- 3 DFSDI I 0/5 V DC (pulse) Document finisher serial communication data sig-
isher nal
4 DFSCLK O 0/5 V DC (pulse) Document finisher clock signal
5 DFSEL O 0/5 V DC Document finisher select signal
6 SISEL - - Not used
7 DFRDY I 0/5 V DC Document finisher ready signal
8 SIRDY - - Not used
YC15 1 GND - - Ground
Connected 2 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to paper feeder
to the paper 3 PFSEL O 0/5 V DC Paper feeder select signal
feeder
4 PFSCLK O 0/5 V DC (pulse) Paper feeder clock signal
5 PFSDI I 0/5 V DC (pulse) Paper feeder serial communication data signal
6 PFSDO O 0/5 V DC (pulse) Paper feeder serial communication data signal
7 PFREADY I 0/5 V DC Paper feeder ready signal
8 PFFEED O 0/5 V DC Paper feeder feed signal
YC16 1 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to built-in finisher
Connected 2 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to built-in finisher
to the built- 3 PGND - - Ground
in finisher
4 PGND - - Ground
5 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to built-in finisher
6 SGND - - Ground
7 DFSEL O 0/5 V DC Built-in finisher select signal
8 DFRDY I 0/5 V DC Built-in finisher ready signal
9 SDI I 0/5 V DC (pulse) Built-in finisher serial communication data signal
10 SDO O 0/5 V DC (pulse) Built-in finisher serial communication data signal
11 SCLK O 0/5 V DC (pulse) Built-in finisher clock signal
12 OPEN - - Not used
YC17 1 JOB_EJT_SIG I 0/3.3 V DC JESW: On/Off
Connected 2 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to JESW
to the job 3 GND - - Ground
separator
4 GND - - Ground
5 SET SIG I 0/3.3 V DC Job separator connection signal
6 GND - - Ground
7 EPDSW I 0/3.3 V DC EPDSW: On/Off
8 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to EPDSW
9 LED REM O 0/3.3 V DC LED: On/Off
10 +5VD LED O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to LEDPWB
11 FSSOL2 O 0/24 V DC JFSSOL: On/Off (return)
12 FSSOL1 O 0/24 V DC JFSSOL: On/Off (activate)
13 +24VDR O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to JFSSOL

2-3-12
 2KR/2KS

Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC19 1 +24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to total counter
Connected 2 T_CNT_REM1 O 0/24 V DC Total counter signal
to the total 3 GND - - Ground
counter, key
card and 4 SET_MS_SIG I 0/3.3 V DC Connection signal
key counter 5 GND - - Ground
6 KEY_SET_SIG I 0/3.3 V DC Key counter connection signal
7 +24V3 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to key counter
8 KEY_CNT_REM O 0/24 V DC Key counter signal
9 SET_KT_SIG I 0/3.3 V DC Connection signal
10 GND - - Ground
YC21 1 +24VDR I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input from PSPWB
Connected 2 GND - - Ground
to the power 3 GND - - Ground
source PWB
4 GND - - Ground
5 +3.3V I 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power input from PSPWB
6 +5VD I 5 V DC 5 V DC power input from PSPWB
7 +24VDR I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input from PSPWB
YC22 1 FAN3N O 0/24 V DC PSFM1,2: On/Off
Connected 2 ZCROSS I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Zero-cross signal
to the power 3 +5VD I 5 V DC 5 V DC power input from PSPWB
source PWB
4 _HITON_M O 0/3.3 V DC FH1: On/Off
5 _HITON_S O 0/3.3 V DC FH2: On/Off
6 GND - - Ground
7 SLEEP O 0/3.3 V DC Sleep signal
YC23 1 +24V2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
Connected 2 FEED1CL O 0/24 V DC FCL1: On/Off
to the feed 3 SGND - - Ground
clutch 1 and
feed switch 4 UPFEPS - 0/3.3 V DC FSW1: On/Off
1 5 +5VD O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to FSW1

2-3-13
2KR/2KS

2-3-3 Main PWB

YC14 YC7
1 11

U12

50
49
YC18 2 12
1
12
13

1 5
YS4

30
29
YC11

YC3
YC12

YC4
31
2
1

YS3

2
1

2
1
U24
U65

U45 YC15
1 6
BAT1
U71

YC30
U9

U75 7 YC2 1

BLUE
YC13
1

79 1
6

YC29
U10
1

80 YC10 2
YC20

U58
YC1

BLACK
7 1
U15 U77
U78
4

U6

U44
5

BK 1 31 2
YC21

WH

U5
YC17
3

YC23 YC25
U2

U27
1

1
YC5

U1

8
U3

U25
U8

U26 U17
YS1
1
4

YC16

U59

YC24
U4

U7
6

YS2 CODE
FLS
SPI
1
49 1 29 1
YS5
50 YC8 2 30 YC9 2

Figure 2-3-3 Main PWB silk-screen diagram

2-3-14
 2KR/2KS-1

Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC1 1 GND - - Ground
Connected 2 TXP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data
to the hard 3 TXN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data
disk 1
4 GND - - Ground
5 RXN I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Received data
6 RXP I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Received data
7 GND - - Ground
YC2 1 GND - - Ground
Connected 2 TXP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data
to the hard 3 TXN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data
disk 2
4 GND - - Ground
5 RXN I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Received data
6 RXP I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Received data
7 GND - - Ground
YC3 1 EG_SCLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EPWB clock signal
Connected 2 HLD_ENG O 0/3.3 V DC EPWB hold signal
to the 3 EG_SI O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EPWB serial communication data signal
engine PWB
4 SLEEP O 0/3.3 V DC EPWB sleep signal: On/Off
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
7 VMREA P - - Not used
8 VMRED P O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
9 VMREA N - - Not used
10 VMRED N O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image control signal
11 VD A0 P - - Not used
12 VD D0 P O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data control signal
13 VD A0 N - - Not used
14 VD D0 N O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data control signal
15 VD A1 P - - Not used
16 VD D1 P O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data control signal
17 VD A1 N - - Not used
18 VD D1 N O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data control signal
19 VD A2 P - - Not used
20 VD D2 P O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data control signal
21 VD A2 N - - Not used
22 VD D2 N O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data control signal
23 VD A3 P - - Not used
24 VD D3 P O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data control signal
25 VD A3 N - - Not used
26 VD D3 N O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data control signal
27 VMREB P - - Not used
28 VMREC P - - Not used
29 VMREB N - - Not used
30 VMREC N - - Not used

2-3-15
2KR/2KS-1

Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC3 31 VD B0 P - - Not used
Connected 32 VD C0 P - - Not used
to the 33 VD B0 N - - Not used
engine PWB
34 VD C0 N - - Not used
35 VD B1 P - - Not used
36 VD C1 P - - Not used
37 VD B1 N - - Not used
38 VD C1 N - - Not used
39 VD B2 P - - Not used
40 VD C2 P - - Not used
41 VD B2 N - - Not used
42 VD C2 N - - Not used
43 VD B3 P - - Not used
44 VD C3 P - - Not used
45 VD B3 N - - Not used
46 VD C3 N - - Not used
47 VCLKOUT P O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data clock signal
48 GND - - Ground
49 VCLKOUT N O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data clock signal
50 GND - - Ground
YC4 1 GND - - Ground
Connected 2 GND - - Ground
to the 3 HSYNCDN P I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal
engine PWB
4 VSYNCD P I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Vertical synchronization signal
5 HSYNCDN N I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal
6 VSYNCD N I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Vertical synchronization signal
7 HSYNCCN P I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal
8 VSYNCC P I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Vertical synchronization signal
9 HSYNCCN N I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal
10 VSYNCC N I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Vertical synchronization signal
11 HSYNCBN P I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal
12 VSYNCB P I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Vertical synchronization signal
13 HSYNCBN N I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal
14 VSYNCB N I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Vertical synchronization signal
15 HSYNCAN P I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal
16 VSYNCA P I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Vertical synchronization signal
17 HSYNCAN N I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Horizontal synchronization signal
18 VSYNCA N I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Vertical synchronization signal
19 GND - - Ground
20 GND - - Ground
21 EG_IRN O 0/3.3 V DC EPWB interrupt signal
22 NC - - Not used
23 EG_SO I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EPWB serial communication data signal
24 NC - - Not used

2-3-16
 2KR/2KS-1

Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC4 25 EG_SDIR O 0/3.3 V DC EPWB communication direction signal
Connected 26 NC - - Not used
to the 27 EG_SBSY O 0/3.3 V DC EPWB busy signal
engine PWB
28 NC - - Not used
29 +24V DOWN O 0/3.3 V DC EPWB 24 V down signal
30 NC - - Not used
YC5-1 1 CT O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
Connected 2 TD+ O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data
to the ether- 3 TD- O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Transmission data
net
4 RD+ I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Received data
5 RD- I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Received data
6 CT O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
7 CAT PHY O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
8 ANO PHY O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
9 CAT MAC - - Ground
10 ANO MAC O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
YC5-2 U1 VBUS I 5 V DC 5 V DC power input
Connected U2 DATA- I/O - USB data signal
to the USB U3 DATA+ I/O - USB data signal
U4 GND - - Ground
YC8 1 GND - - Ground
Connected 2 AUDIO I Analog AUDIO signal
to the inter- 3 SEL AUDIO0 O 0/3.3 V DC SEL AUDIO0 signal
face PWB
4 SEL AUDIO1 O 0/3.3 V DC SEL AUDIO1 signal
5 _REG I 0/3.3 V DC REG signal
6 A8 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
7 A15 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
8 A7 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
9 A14 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
10 A6 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
11 A13 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
12 A5 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
13 A12 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
14 A4 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
15 A11 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
16 A3 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
17 A10 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
18 A2 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
19 A9 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
20 A1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
21 GND - - Ground
22 GND - - Ground
23 D8 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal
24 D0 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal
25 D9 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal

2-3-17
2KR/2KS

Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC8 26 D1 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal
Connected 27 D10 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal
to the inter- 28 D2 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal
face PWB
29 D11 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal
30 D3 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal
31 GND - - Ground
32 GND - - Ground
33 D12 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal
34 D4 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal
35 D13 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal
36 D5 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal
37 D14 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal
38 D6 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal
39 D15 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal
40 D7 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal
41 GND - - Ground
42 GND - - Ground
43 KUIODREQT0 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) KUIODREQT0 signal
44 KUIODREQT1 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) KUIODREQT1 signal
45 KUIODREQR0 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) KUIODREQR0 signal
46 KUIODREQR1 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) KUIODREQR1 signal
47 KUIOIORN0 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) KUIOIORN0 signal
48 KUIOIORN1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) KUIOIORN1 signal
49 KUIOIOWN0 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) KUIOIOWN0 signal
50 KUIOIOWN1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) KUIOIOWN1 signal
YC9 1 KUIOCSN0 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) KUIOCSN0 signal
Connected 2 KUIOCSN1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) KUIOCSN1 signal
to the inter- 3 KUIOACKN0 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) KUIOACKN0 signal
face PWB
4 KUIOACKN1 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) KUIOACKN1 signal
5 KUIOIRN0 I 0/3.3 V DC KUIOIRN0 signal
6 KUIOIRN1 I 0/3.3 V DC KUIOIRN1 signal
7 KUIORDY0 O 0/3.3 V DC KUIORDY0 signal
8 KUIORDY1 O 0/3.3 V DC KUIORDY1 signal
9 GND - - Ground
10 GND - - Ground
11 KUIODACKRN0 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) KUIODACKRN0 signal
12 KUIODACKRN1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) KUIODACKRN1 signal
13 KUIODACKTN0 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) KUIODACKTN0 signal
14 KUIODACKTN1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) KUIODACKTN1 signal
15 KUIORSTN0 O 0/3.3 V DC KUIORSTN0 signal
16 KUIORSTN1 O 0/3.3 V DC KUIORSTN1 signal
17 GND - - Ground
18 GND - - Ground
19 SLEEP O 0/3.3 V DC SLEEP signal
20 CFOEN0 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) CFOEN0 signal

2-3-18
 2KR/2KS

Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC9 21 EXTBOEN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EXTBOEN signal
Connected 22 CFWEN0 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) CFWEN0 signal
to the inter- 23 EXTBDIR O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) EXTBDIR signal
face PWB
24 CFRST0 O 0/3.3 V DC CFRST0 signal
25 CF0CSN0 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) CF0CSN0 signal
26 CFWAITN0 I 0/3.3 V DC CFWAITN0 signal
27 CF0CSN1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) CF0CSN1 signal
28 CF0CDET1 I 0/3.3 V DC CF0CDET1 signal
29 GND - - Ground
30 CF0CDET2 I 0/3.3 V DC CF0CDET2 signal
YC10 1 GND - - Ground
Connected 2 GND - - Ground
to the DP 3 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPRPWB
4 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPRPWB
5 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPRPWB
6 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPRPWB
7 VCLKB I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DPRPWB clock signal
8 VSYNCB I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DPRPWB VSYNCB signal
9 HSYNCB I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DPRPWB HSYNCB signal
10 MREB I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DPRPWB MREB signal
11 GND - - Ground
12 DRB0 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
13 DRB1 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
14 DRB2 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
15 DRB3 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
16 DRB4 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
17 DRB5 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
18 DRB6 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
19 DRB7 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
20 GND - - Ground
21 DGB0 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
22 DGB1 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
23 DGB2 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
24 DGB3 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
25 DGB4 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
26 DGB5 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
27 DGB6 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
28 DGB7 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
29 GND - - Ground
30 DBB0 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
31 DBB1 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
32 DBB2 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
33 DBB3 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
34 DBB4 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
35 DBB5 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal

2-3-19
2KR/2KS

Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC10 36 DBB6 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
Connected 37 DBB7 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
to the 38 TWS_SCM_HALF O 0/3.3 V DC DPRPWB control signal
optional DP
39 RES_SLEEP O 0/3.3 V DC DPRPWB control signal
40 TWS_DET1 I 0/3.3 V DC DPRPWB control signal
41 GND - - Ground
42 LA2 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
43 LA3 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
44 LA4 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
45 LA5 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
46 LA6 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
47 LA7 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
48 LA8 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
49 LA9 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
50 LA10 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
51 LA11 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
52 LA12 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
53 LA13 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
54 LA14 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
55 LA15 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
56 LA16 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
57 LA17 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Address bus signal
58 GND - - Ground
59 LD0 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal
60 LD1 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal
61 LD2 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal
62 LD3 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal
63 LD4 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal
64 LD5 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal
65 LD6 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal
66 LD7 I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Data bus signal
67 GND - - Ground
68 INT I 0/3.3 V DC DPRPWB control signal
69 RESETZ O 0/3.3 V DC DPRPWB control signal
70 GND - - Ground
71 CEZ O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DPRPWB control signal
72 WEZ O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DPRPWB control signal
73 OEZ O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DPRPWB control signal
74 SCLKIN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DPRPWB clock signal
75 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPRPWB
76 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPRPWB
77 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPRPWB
78 3.3V O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output to DPRPWB
79 GND - - Ground
80 GND - - Ground

2-3-20
 2KR/2KS

Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC11 1 GND - - Ground
Connected 2 G6_SC_SCLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) ISCPWB clock signal
to the ISC 3 GND - - Ground
PWB
4 G6_SC_SI O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) ISCPWB serial communication data signal
5 GND - - Ground
6 G6_SC_SO I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) ISCPWB serial communication data signal
7 G6_SC_SBSY I 0/3.3 V DC ISCPWB busy signal
8 G6_SC_SDIR I 0/3.3 V DC ISCPWB communication direction signal
9 G6_SC_IRN I 0/3.3 V DC ISCPWB interrupt signal
10 HLD_SCN O 0/3.3 V DC ISCPWB scanner hold signal
11 GND - - Ground
12 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
14 IS_SAD4N I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
15 IS_SAD4P I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
16 GND - - Ground
17 IS_SACKN I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) ISCPWB clock signal
18 IS_SACKP I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) ISCPWB clock signal
19 GND - - Ground
20 IS_SAD3N I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
21 IS_SAD3P I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
22 GND - - Ground
23 IS_SAD2N I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
24 IS_SAD2P I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
25 GND - - Ground
26 IS_SAD1N I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
27 IS_SAD1P I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Image data signal
28 GND - - Ground
29 GND - - Ground
30 GND - - Ground
31 GND - - Ground
YC12 1 FPSTAT I 0/3.3 V DC Operation panel status signal
Connected 2 S LED0 O 0/3.3 V DC Operation panel LED display signal
to the main 3 S LED1 O 0/3.3 V DC Operation panel LED display signal
operation
PWB 4 PANEL RESET O 0/3.3 V DC OPWB-M reset signal
5 HLD PANEL O 0/3.3 V DC Operation panel displaying enable signal
6 SW FOOTN - - Not used
7 +24V DOWN O 0/3.3 V DC 24 V DC down signal
8 SUPND ENTER O 0/3.3 V DC Energy save mode control signal
9 AUDIO O Analog Audio output signal
10 SGND - - Ground
11 PH KEY I 0/3.3 V DC Power key: On/Off
12 SGND - - Ground
13 SUPND POWER O 5 V DC 5 V DC power to OPWB-M

2-3-21
2KR/2KS

Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC17 1 VBUS I 5 V DC 5 V DC power input
Connected 2 DATA- I/O - USB data signal
to the main 3 DATA+ I/O - USB data signal
operation
PWB 4 NC - - Not used
5 GND - - Ground
YC20 U1 VBUS O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output
Connected U2 DATA- I/O - USB data signal
to the USB U3 DATA+ I/O - USB data signal
U4 GND - - Ground
YC21 1 VBUS O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output
Connected 2 DATA- I/O - USB data signal
to the USB 3 DATA+ I/O - USB data signal
4 NC - - Not used
5 GND - - Ground
YC23 1 CLT FAN O 0/5 V DC CONFM: On/Off
Connected 2 GND - - Ground
to the con- 3 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to CONFM
troller fan
motor
YC24 1 5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power input from PSPWB
Connected 2 5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power input from PSPWB
to the power 3 5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power input from PSPWB
source PWB
4 5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power input from PSPWB
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
7 GND - - Ground
8 GND - - Ground
YC25 1 5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to IFPWB
Connected 2 GND - - Ground
to the inter-
face PWB

2-3-22
 2KR/2KS

2-3-4 ISM PWB

26 2 1 14
1 3
1 4

YC4 25 YC2 1 YC6

YC8
1

4
YC7

YC1
4
1

1
2

2
YC5

YC3

YC9
1

1
5

Figure 2-3-4 ISM PWB silk-screen diagram

2-3-23
2KR/2KS

Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC1 1 24V1 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input from PSPWB
Connected 2 GND - - Ground
to the power 3 GND - - Ground
source PWB
4 12V1 I 12 V DC 12 V DC power input from PSPWB
YC2 1 DPTMG O 0/3.3 V DC DP timing signal
Connected 2 DPRDY O 0/3.3 V DC DP ready signal
to the ISC 3 HPSW O 0/3.3 V DC HPSW: On/Off
PWB
4 DPEND O 0/3.3 V DC DP end signal
5 +12V O 12 V DC 12 V DC power output to ISCPWB
6 DPSEL I 0/3.3 V DC DP select signal
7 +12V O 12 V DC 12 V DC power output to ISCPWB
8 DPSDI I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
9 +5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power input from ISCPWB
10 DPCLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DP clock signal
11 FANREM I 0/3.3 V DC SFM: On/Off
12 DPSDO O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
13 SM_FR I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) SM control signal
14 DP_CO O 0/3.3 V DC DP open signal
15 GND - - Ground
16 GND - - Ground
17 SMTVREF I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) SM control signal
18 GND - - Ground
19 SM_STP I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) SM control signal
20 INV_CLK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) INPWB clock signal
21 SM_STB I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) SM control signal
22 COSW1 O 0/3.3 V DC ODSW: On/Off
23 MON24V O 0/3.3 V DC Control signal
24 INVTH O 0/3.3 V DC EL control signal
25 SLAMP I 0/3.3 V DC EL: On/Off
26 NC - - Not used
YC3 1 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to SFM
Connected 2 FANREM O 0/24 V DC SFM: On/Off
to the scan-
ner fan
motor
YC4 1 SGND - - Ground
Connected 2 COSW1 I 0/3.3 V DC ODSW: On/Off
to the origi- 3 +5V O 5 V DC 24 V DC power output to ODSW
nal detec-
tion switch 4 NC - - Not used

YC5 1 INV_CL O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) INPWB clock signal

Connected 2 INVTH I 0/3.3 V DC EL control signal
to the 3 PGND - - Ground
inverter
PWB 4 SLAMPO O 0/3.3 V DC EL: On/Off
5 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output to INPWB

2-3-24
 2KR/2KS

Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC6 1 DPCLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) DP clock signal
Connected 2 DPSDO I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
to the DP 3 DPSDI O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
4 DPSEL O 0/3.3 V DC DP select signal
5 DPEND I 0/3.3 V DC DP end signal
6 DPRDY I 0/3.3 V DC DP ready signal
7 DPTMG I 0/3.3 V DC DP timing signal
8 DP CO I 0/3.3 V DC DP open signal
9 NC - - Not used
10 NC - - Not used
11 GND - - Ground
12 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
14 GND - - Ground
YC7 1 SMOT BN O 0/24 V DC (pulse) SM drive control signal
Connected 2 SMOT AN O 0/24 V DC (pulse) SM drive control signal
to the scan- 3 SMOT BP O 0/24 V DC (pulse) SM drive control signal
ner motor
4 SMOT AP O 0/24 V DC (pulse) SM drive control signal
YC8 1 SGND - - Ground
Connected 2 HPSW I 0/3.3 V DC HPSW: On/Off
to the home 3 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to HPSW
position
switch

2-3-25
2KR/2KS

2-3-5 Main operation PWB

5 1
2 1 4 2
5 1
6 1
YC10 YC3 8 YC9 1 40 YC2 1
2
YC5

2
YC15 YC11
1

13

YC14
1

YC4
YC7

U24

39

40
15

U11
5

U19
YC12

12
9
YC13

YC8
1

U1
1

1
U5 U7 U8 U6
1

4
YC6

YC1
5

1
BOOT
NORMAL
SW1

Figure 2-3-5 Main operation PWB silk-screen diagram

2-3-26
 2KR/2KS

Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC1 1 TOP Y+ I Analog Touch panel Y+ position signal
Connected 2 LEFT X+ I Analog Touch panel X+ position signal
to the touch 3 BOT Y- I Analog Touch panel Y- position signal
panel
4 RIGHT X- I Analog Touch panel X- position signal
YC2 1 SGND - - Ground
Connected 2 SGND - - Ground
to the LCD 3 B5(MSB) O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
4 B4 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
5 B3 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
6 SGND - - Ground
7 B2 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
8 B1 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
9 B0(LSB) O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
10 SGND - - Ground
11 G5(MSB) O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
12 G4 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
13 G3 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
14 SGND - - Ground
15 G2 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
16 G1 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
17 G0(LSB) O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
18 SGND - - Ground
19 R5(MSB) O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
20 R4 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
21 R3 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
22 SGND - - Ground
23 R2 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
24 R1 O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
25 R0(LSB) O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
26 SGND - - Ground
27 DE O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
28 SGND - - Ground
29 L_R O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
30 U_D O 0/3.3 V DC LCD control signal
31 SGND - - Ground
32 DCLK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) LCD clock signal
33 NC - - Not used
34 SGND - - Ground
35 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to LCD
36 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to LCD
37 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to LCD
38 +5V O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to LCD
39 SGND - - Ground
40 SGND - - Ground

2-3-27
2KR/2KS

Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC3 1 VBUS I 5 V DC 5 V DC power input
Connected 2 DN I/O - USB data signal
to the main 3 DP I/O - USB data signal
PWB
4 ID - - Not used
5 GND - - Ground
YC4 1 SUPND POWER I 5 V DC 5 V DC power input from MPWB
Connected 2 GND - - Ground
to the main 3 PH KEY O 0/5 V DC Power key: On/Off
PWB
4 GND - - Ground
5 AUDIO I Analog Audio output signal
6 SUPND_ENTR I 0/3.3 V DC Energy save mode control signal
7 +24V_DOWN I 0/3.3 V DC 24 V DC down signal
8 SW_FOOTN - - Not used
9 HOLDPANEL I 0/3.3 V DC Operation panel displaying enable signal
10 PANEL_RESET I 0/3.3 V DC MPWB reset signal
11 S_LED1 I 0/3.3 V DC Operation panel LED display signal
12 S_LED0 I 0/3.3 V DC Operation panel LED display signal
13 PANEL_STATU O 0/3.3 V DC Operation panel status signal
S
YC6 1 GND - - Ground
Connected 2 +12V O 12 V DC 12 V DC power output to LINPWB
to the LCD 3 LCDBKLT O 0/3.3 V DC LCD back light: On/Off
inverter
PWB 4 ADJUST O Analog LCD back light brightness adjustment signal
5 GND - - Ground
YC7 1 KEY0 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 0
Connected 2 KEY1 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 1
to the right 3 KEY2 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 2
operation
PWB 4 KEY3 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 3
5 KEY4 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 4
6 SCAN0 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 0
7 SCAN1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 1
8 SCAN2 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 2
9 SCAN3 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 3
10 SCAN6 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 6
11 LED0 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel LED display drive signal 0
12 LED1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel LED display drive signal 1
13 PH KEY I 0/5 V DC Power key: On/Off
14 SUPND POWER O 5 V DC 5 V DC power output to OPWB-R
15 GND - - Ground

2-3-28
 2KR/2KS

Connector Pin No. Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC8 1 SCAN6 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 6
Connected 2 KEY5 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 5
to the left 3 KEY6 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 6
operation
PWB 4 KEY7 I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel key scan return signal 7
5 SCAN0 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 0
6 SCAN1 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 1
7 SCAN2 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 2
8 SCAN3 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 3
9 LED2 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel LED display drive signal 2
10 LED3 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel LED display drive signal 3
11 LED4 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel LED display drive signal 4
12 GND - - Ground
YC9 1 SCAN4 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 4
Connected 2 SCAN5 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 5
to the upper 3 LED5 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel LED display drive signal 5
operation
PWB 4 LED6 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel LED display drive signal 6
5 LED7 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel LED display drive signal 7
6 S_LED0 O 0/5 V DC Operation panel LED display drive signal 0
7 S_LED1 O 0/5 V DC Operation panel LED display drive signal 1
8 GND - - Ground
YC10 1 SCAN5 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Scan signal 5
Connected 2 LED5 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel LED display drive signal 5
to the front 3 LED6 O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Operation panel LED display drive signal 6
operation
PWB 4 S_LED1 O 0/5 V DC Operation panel LED display drive signal 1
5 GND - - Ground
YC11 1 VO2 O Analog Speaker sound signal (+)
Connected 2 VO1 O Analog Speaker sound signal (-)
to the
speaker
YC15 1 GND - - Ground
Connected 2 GND - - Ground
to the power 3 GND - - Ground
source PWB
4 +5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power input from PSPWB
5 +5V I 5 V DC 5 V DC power input from PSPWB
6 +12V I 12 V DC 12 V DC power input from PSPWB

2-3-29
2KR/2KS

This page is intentionally left blank.

2-3-30
 2KR/2KS-1

2-4 Appendixes

Maintenance parts list

Maintenance part name Alternative part
Part No.
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list No.
Paper feed pulley PULLEY,PAPER FEED 2AR07220 -
Separation pulley PULLEY,SEPARATION 2AR07230 -
Forwarding pulley PULLEY FEED A 2BJ06010 -
MP paper feed pulley UPPER PULLEY,BYPASS 61706770 -
MP separation pulley PULLEY,SEPARATION 2AR07230 -
MP forwarding pulley PULLEY FEED A 2BJ06010 -
MP feed roller 1 PARTS ROLLER2 BYPASSFEED SP 302KS94160 2KS94160
MP feed roller 2 PARTS ROLLER4 BYPASSFEED SP 302KS94170 2KS94170
MP feed pulley RIGHT PULLEY,FEED 33906660 -
Left registration roller UPPER ROLLER REGIST 302KS06010 2KS06010
Right registration roller RIGHT ROLLER REGIST 302FG06211 2FG06211
Feed pulley PULLEY FEED 2BL16080 -
Feed roller 1 PULLEY MIDDLE FEED A 302GR06010 2GR06010
Feed roller 1 PULLEY MIDDLE FEED B 302GR06020 2GR06020
Feed roller 2 PARTS ROLLER B FEED SP 302KS94140 2KS94140
Feed roller 3 PARTS ROLLER C FEED SP 302KS94150 2KS94150
Registration switch SWITCH REGISTRATION 2FG27110 -
Left registration cleaner UNDER CLEANER REGIST 2BL07950 -
Registration guide GUIDE REGIST F 2BL16130 -
Right registration cleaner PARTS,REGISTRATION CLEAN 2BL93450 -
Transfer guide PARTS,GUIDE TRANSFER 302GR94480 2GR94480
Laser scanner unit PARTS LSU 302KS93040 2KS93040
Slit glass PARTS CONTACT GLASS ADF ASSY 302H793480 2H793480
Contact glass PARTS CONTACT GLASS (M) ASSY SP 302KS94250 2KS94250
PARTS CONTACT GLASS (I) ASSY SP 302KS94260 2KS94260
Mirror 1 MIRROR A 2FB12140 -
Mirror 2 and mirror 3 MIRROR B 2FB12180 -
Lens - - -
Reflector REFRECTOR SCANNER 302GR17250 2GR17250
Exposure lamp PARTS LAMP SCANNER 302H794260 2H794260
Optical rail F - - -
Optical rail R - - -
Original size sensor SENSOR ORIGINAL 2C927090 -
Transfer roller unit TR-710 302GR93281 2GR93281
Developing unit DV-715 302GR93034 2GR93034
Drum unit DK-716 302GR93042 2GR93042
Main charger unit MC-710 302GR93071 2GR93071
Drum separation claw PARTS CLAW SEPARATION ASSY 302GR93190 2GR93190
Fuser unit PARTS FUSER 120 UNIT 302KS93010 2KS93010
Fuser unit PARTS FUSER 230 UNIT 302KS93020 2KS93020
Heat roller PARTS,ROLLER HEAT SP 302GR94270 2GR94270
Heat roller separation claw CLAW HEAT ROLLER 2BL20080 -
Press roller PARTS,ROLLER PRESS SP 302GR94280 2GR94280
Press roller separation claw CLAW PRESS ROLLER 302BL20351 2BL20351

2-4-1
2KR/2KS

Maintenance part name Alternative part

Part No.
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list No.
Upper duplex feed roller ROLLER DU FEED UP 2BL07020 -
Lower duplex feed roller ROLLER DU FEED LOW 2BL07030 -
Duplex feed pulley PULLEY DU 2BL07040 -
Eject roller PARTS ROLLER EXIT SP 302KS94180 2KS94180
Switchback roller PARTS ROLLER FEED SHIFT SP 302KS94200 2KS94200
Eject pulley PULLEY EXIT C 2BL21520 -
Eject pulley PULLEY EXIT 302GR28060 2GR28060
Switchback pulley PULLEY FEED SHIFT 302GR28150 2GR28150
Dust filter 1 PARTS FILTER DUST F1 ASSY 302GR94431 2GR94431
Dust filter 2 PARTS FILTER DUST F2 ASSY 302GR94441 2GR94441

Maintenance kits
Maintenance part name Alternative part
Part No.
Name used in service manual Name used in parts list No.
Maintenance kit MK-726 (120 V specifications) 1702KR7US0 072KR7US
MK-726 (220 - 240 V specifications) 1702KR8NL0 072KR8NL
Paper feed pulley PULLEY,PAPER FEED - -
Separation pulley PULLEY,SEPARATION - -
Forwarding pulley PULLEY FEED A - -
Left registration cleaner UNDER CLEANER REGIST - -
Registration guide GUIDE REGIST F - -
Right registration cleaner PARTS,REGISTRATION CLEAN - -
Transfer roller unit TR-710 - -
Transfer guide PARTS,GUIDE TRANSFER - -
Developing unit DLP UNIT - -
Drum unit DK-716 - -
Fuser unit PARTS FUSER 120 UNIT - -
PARTS FUSER 230 UNIT - -
MP paper feed pulley UPPER PULLEY,BYPASS - -
Cassette pad PAD,CASSETTE - -

2-4-2
 2KR/2KS-1

Periodic maintenance procedures

Maintenance
Section User call 500K Points and cautions Page
part/location
Test copy and Perform at the maxi- Test Test
test print mum copy size copy copy

Maintenance
Section User call 500K Points and cautions Page
part/location
Paper feed Paper feed pulley Check Replace Clean with alcohol. P.1-5-3
section Clean Replace after feeding 500,000 sheets.
Separation pulley Check Replace Clean with alcohol. P.1-5-3
Clean Replace after feeding 500,000 sheets.
Forwarding pulley Check Replace Clean with alcohol. P.1-5-3
Clean Replace after feeding 500,000 sheets.
MP paper feed pulley Check Replace Clean with alcohol. P.1-5-5
Clean Replace after feeding 500,000 sheets.
MP separation pulley Check Replace Clean with alcohol. P.1-5-5
Clean Replace after feeding 500,000 sheets.
MP forwarding pulley Check Replace Clean with alcohol. P.1-5-5
Clean Replace after feeding 500,000 sheets.
MP feed roller 1 Check Clean Clean with alcohol.
Clean
MP feed pulley Check Clean Clean with alcohol.
Clean
MP feed roller 2 Check Clean Clean with alcohol.
Clean
Left registration roller Check Clean Clean with alcohol.
Clean
Right registration roller Check Clean Clean with alcohol.
Clean
Feed pulley Check Clean Clean with alcohol.
Clean
Feed roller 1 Check Clean Clean with alcohol.
Clean
Feed roller 2 Check Clean Clean with alcohol.
Clean
Feed roller 3 Check Clean Clean with alcohol.
Clean
Registration switch Check Clean Clean with a dry cloth.
Clean
Left registration cleaner Clean Replace Vacuum. P.1-5-10
Replace after feeding 500,000 sheets.
Registration guide - Replace Replace after feeding 500,000 sheets.
Right registration Clean Replace Vacuum. P.1-5-10
cleaner Replace after feeding 500,000 sheets.
Transfer guide Check Replace Clean with alcohol.
Clean Replace after feeding 500,000 sheets.

2-4-3
2KR/2KS-1

Maintenance
Section User call 500K Points and cautions Page
part/location
Optical Laser scanner unit Check - Clean the shield glass with a dry cloth. P.1-5-22
section Clean
Contact glass Clean Clean Clean with alcohol and then a dry cloth.
Slit glass Clean Clean Clean with a dry cloth or alcohol (do not clean
with a wet cloth).
Mirror 1 Clean - Clean with alcohol and then a dry cloth only if
vertical black lines appear on the copy image.
Mirror 2 and mirror 3 Clean - Clean with alcohol and then a dry cloth only if
vertical black lines appear on the copy image.
Lens Clean - Clean with a dry cloth only if vertical black
lines appear on the copy image.
Reflector Clean - Clean with a dry cloth only if vertical black
lines appear on the copy image.
Exposure lamp Check - Replace if an image problem occurs. P.1-5-12
Replace
Optical rail Grease - Check noise and shifting and then apply
scanner rail grease EM-50L.
Original size sensor Check - Clean the sensor emitter and sensor receiver
Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth only if there is a
problem.

Maintenance
Section User call 500K Points and cautions Page
part/location
Transfer/ Transfer roller unit Clean Replace Clean with a cleaning brush or alcohol. P.1-5-29
separation Replace Replace after feeding 500,000 sheets.
sections

Maintenance
Section User call 500K Points and cautions Page
part/location
Developing Developing unit Check Replace Replace after feeding 500,000 sheets. P.1-5-28
section Replace

Maintenance
Section User call 500K Points and cautions Page
part/location
Drum Drum unit Check Replace Replace after feeding 500,000 sheets. P.1-5-25
section Replace
Main charger unit Clean - Clean with a wet cloth and then a dry cloth. P.1-5-26
Drum separation claw Check - Replace if the leading edge of the claws are P.1-5-27
Replace damaged.

2-4-4
 2KR/2KS-1

Maintenance
Section User call 500K Points and cautions Page
part/location
Fuser Fuser unit Check Replace Replace after feeding 500,000 sheets. P.1-5-30
section Replace
Heat roller Check - Check and replace when user call occurs. P.1-5-34
Replace
Heat roller separation Check Clean Clean with alcohol. P.1-5-31
claw Replace Check and replace when user call occurs.
Press roller Check - Check and replace when user call occurs. P.1-5-32
Replace
Press roller separation Check Clean Clean with alcohol.
claw Replace Check and replace when user call occurs.

Maintenance
Section User call 500K Points and cautions Page
part/location
Duplex Upper duplex feed roller Check Clean Clean with alcohol.
section Clean
Lower duplex feed roller Check Clean Clean with alcohol.
Clean
Duplex feed pulley Check Clean Clean with alcohol.

Maintenance
Section User call 500K Points and cautions Page
part/location
Eject section Eject roller Check Clean Clean with alcohol.
Clean
Eject pulley Check Clean Clean with alcohol.
Clean
Switchback roller Check Clean Clean with alcohol.
Clean
Switchback pulley Check Clean Clean with alcohol.
Clean

Maintenance
Section User call 500K Points and cautions Page
part/location
Covers Covers Clean Clean Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Original platen Clean Clean Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.

2-4-5
2KR/2KS-1

Maintenance
Section User call 500K Points and cautions Page
part/location
Other Dust filter 1 Clean Clean Vacuum. P.1-5-38
Dust filter 2 Clean Clean Vacuum. P.1-5-38
Gears - Check Check noise and then apply grease EM-50L.
Clean
Bushes - Check Check noise and then apply grease EM-50L.
Clean
Paper conveying Clean Clean Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
section
Image quality Check Check
Adjust Adjust

2-4-6
 2KR/2KS

Chart of image adjustment procedures

Adjusting Maintenance mode

Item Image Description Original Page Remarks
order Item No. Mode
Adjusting the magnification in the Polygon motor speed adjustment U053 POLYGON MOTOR U053 test pattern P.1-3-25
main scanning direction (printing
1 adjustment)

Adjusting the magnification in the Drive motor speed adjustment U053 TMAIN MOTOR U053 test pattern P.1-3-25
auxiliary scanning direction (print-
2 ing adjustment)

Adjusting the center line of the MP Adjusting the LSU print start timing U034 LSUOUT LEFT (MPT) U034 test pattern P.1-3-23 To make an adjustment for duplex copying, select
tray (printing adjustment) LSUOUT LEFT (DUP).
3

Adjusting the center line of the cas- Adjusting the LSU print start timing U034 LSUOUT LEFT (CAS 1) U034 test pattern P.1-3-23 Cassette 1: select Center (Feed 1)
settes (printing adjustment) LSUOUT LEFT (CAS 2) Cassette 2: select Center (Feed 2)
4 LSUOUT LEFT (CAS 3) Cassette 3: select Center (Feed 3)
LSUOUT LEFT (CAS 4) Cassette 4: select Center (Feed 4)

Adjusting the leading edge registra- Registration motor turning on timing (sec- U034 LSUOUT TOP MPT U034 test pattern P.1-3-22 To make an adjustment for duplex copying, select
tion of the MP tray (printing adjust- ondary paper feed start timing) LSUOUT TOP DUP.
5 ment)

Adjusting the leading edge registra- Registration motor turning on timing (sec- U034 LSUOUT TOP CAS U034 test pattern P.1-3-22
tion of the cassette (printing adjust- ondary paper feed start timing)
6 ment)

Adjusting the leading edge margin LSU illumination start timing U402 LESD U402 test pattern P.1-3-81
(printing adjustment)
7

Adjusting the trailing edge margin LSU illumination end timing U402 TRAIL U402 test pattern P.1-3-81
(printing adjustment)
8

Adjusting the left and right margins LSU illumination start/end timing U402 A/C U402 test pattern P.1-3-81
(printing adjustment)
9

Adjusting magnification of the Data processing U065 Y SCAN ZOOM Test chart P.1-3-28 No adjustment for copying using the DP.
scanner in the main scanning direc-
10 tion (scanning adjustment)

2-4-7
 2KR/2KS

Adjusting Maintenance mode

Item Image Description Original Page Remarks
order Item No. Mode
Adjusting magnification of the Original scanning speed U065 X SCAN ZOOM Test chart P.1-3-28 U065: For copying an original placed on
scanner in the auxiliary scanning the contact glass
11 direction (scanning adjustment) U070 MOTOR ADJ (FRONT) P.1-3-32 U070: For copying originals from the DP.
MOTOR ADJ (BACK) To make an adjustment for duplex copying, select
X SCAN ZOOM (CIS) MOTOR ADJ (BACK) or X SCAN ZOOM (CIS).
Adjusting the center line (scanning Adjusting the original scan data U067 FRONT Test chart P.1-3-30 U067: For copying an original placed on
adjustment) (image adjustment) ROTATE the contact glass
To make an adjustment for rotate copying, select
12 ROTATE.
U072 FRONT P.1-3-36 U072: For copying originals from the DP.
BACK To make an adjustment for duplex copying, select
CIS BACK or CIS.
Adjusting the leading edge registra- Original scan start timing U066 FRONT Test chart P.1-3-29 U066: For copying an original placed on
tion (scanning adjustment) TAIL the contact glass
To make an adjustment for trailing edge registra-
13 tion, select TAIL.
U071 FRONT HEAD P.1-3-34 U071: For copying originals from the DP.
BACK HEAD To make an adjustment for duplex copying, select
HEAD (CIS) BACK HEAD or HEAD (CIS).
Adjusting the leading edge margin Adjusting the original scan data U403 B MARGIN Test chart P.1-3-82 U403: For copying an original placed on
(scanning adjustment) (image adjustment) the contact glass
14 U404 B MARGIN P.1-3-83 U404: For copying originals from the DP.

Adjusting the trailing edge margin Adjusting the original scan data U403 D MARGIN Test chart P.1-3-82 U403: For copying an original placed on
(scanning adjustment) (image adjustment) the contact glass
15 U404 D MARGIN P.1-3-83 U404: For copying originals from the DP.

Adjusting the left and right margins Adjusting the original scan data U403 A MARGIN Test chart P.1-3-82 U403: For copying an original placed on
(scanning adjustment) (image adjustment) C MARGIN the contact glass
16 U404 A MARGIN P.1-3-83 U404: For copying originals from the DP.
C MARGIN

Image quality
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original (P/N 302FZ56990),
the following adjustments are automatically made: Item Specifications
Adjusting the scanner magnification (U065) 100% magnification Machine: ±0.8%
Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration (U066) Using DP: ±1.5%
Adjusting the scanner center line (U067) Enlargement/reduction Machine: ±1.0%
Using DP: ±1.5%
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the DP) is run using the specified original (P/N 302AC68243), Lateral squareness Machine: ±1.5 mm/375 mm
the following adjustments are automatically made: Using DP: ±3.0 mm/375 mm
Adjusting the DP magnification (U070) Leading edge registration Cassette: ±2.5 mm
Adjusting the DP leading edge registration (U071) MP tray: ±2.5 mm
Adjusting the DP center line (U072) Duplex: ±2.5 mm
Skewed paper feed Cassette: 1.5 mm or less
(left-right difference) MP tray: 1.5 mm or less
Duplex: 2.0 mm or less
Lateral image shifting Cassette: ±2.0 mm
MP tray: ±2.0 mm
Duplex: ±3.0 mm

2-4-8
 2KR/2KS

Wiring diagram No.1

YC10
UPFECL B1 B1 2 1
YC12 YC5 UP24V B2 B2 1 2 PFCL1
A15 A15 +3.3V GND A1 A1 3 1 3
A14 A14 RFIDSCL MPFFEPS A2 A2 2 2 2 MPFSW LO24V B3 B3 2 1
PFCL2
A13 A13 RFIDSDA +5V A3 A3 1 3 1 LOFECL B4 B4 1 2
A12 A12 GND
+5V A4 A3 3 1 1 3 +24V2 B5 B5 2 1
1 2 B2 B2 +24V1 ETONPS A5 A4 2 2 2 2 TCS REGFECL B6 B6 1 2 RCL
LSUFM 2 1 B3 B3 DEVFAN GND A6 A5 1 3 3 1
+3.3V B7 B7 4 1 4 1
1 2 B11 B11 +24V1 DEVEP0 A7 A7 10 10 SDA B8 B8 3 2 3 2
DEVFM 2 1 B12 B12 FAN4 +5VD A8 A8 9 9 3 1 GND B9 B9 2 3 2 3 HUMS
TNEDIN A9 A9 8 8 2 2 TNS SCL B10 B10 1 4 1 4
2 B9 B9 FRTCOSW GND A10 A10 7 7 1 3
FRCSW

Connector holder
1 B10 B10 GND DVUNITN A11 A11 6 6

Connector holder
DVHIT A12 A12 5 5 fuse STEPBD B11 B11 6 1 B-

Connector holder
3 1 1 5 B4 B4 +5VD EEDATA A13 A13 4 4 STEPB B12 B12 5 2
OFS 2 2 2 4 B5 B5 TOOVSE EESCLK A14 A14 3 3 STEPAD B13 B13 4 3 B+
EM
1 3 3 3 B6 B6 GND 2 2 DEVPWB STEPA B14 B14 3 4 A+
4 2 B7 B7 OVFLSW 1 1 OPEN B15 B15 2 5
1 5 1 B8 B8 GND OPEN B16 B16 1 6 A-
WTDSW 2 R24V B1 B1 2 1 Developing unit Eject unit
TONERSOL B2 B2 1 2 TNFSOL
2 1 CHGSOL2 A1 A1 12 1 3
MPFCL 1 2 TOBOSW B3 B3 2 1 2 CHGSOL1 A2 A2 11 2 2 FSSOL
11 1 A11 A11 MPFFECL GND B4 B4 1 2 1 TCDSW +24V2 A3 A3 10 3 1
2 1 10 2 A10 A10 R24V GND A4 A4 9 4 3
MPPFCL 1 2 9 3 A9 A9 MPFPAPCL DRUMP0 B5 B5 10 10 DUPS A5 A5 8 5 2 FSSW
8 4 A8 A8 R24V ERASER B6 B6 9 9 2 2 +5V A6 A6 7 6 1
3 7 5 A7 A7 GND +24V2 B7 B7 8 8 1 1 CL GND A7 A7 6 7
MPPSW 2
1
6 6 A6
A5
A6
A5
MPFPAPS EEDATA B8 B8
B9
7 7 FDFULPS A8 A8 5 8
5 7 +5VD EESCLK B9 6 6 DRPWB +5V A9 A9 4 9
4 8 A4 A4 GND GND B10 B10 5 5 GND A10 A10 3 10 3
1 3 9 A3 A3 MPFSIZE2 DRUNIT B11 B11 4 4
EEPROM
FDEJPS A11 A11 2 11 2 ESW
2 2 10 A2 A2 MPFSIZE1 +5V B12 B12 3 3 +5V A12 A12 1 12 1
MPPWSW 3
4
1 11 A1 A1 MPFSIZE0 MCMFWD B13
B14
B13 2 2 2
1
2 2 1
MCCM
MCMREV B14 1 1 1 1 2
5 3 1 B15 B15 GND 24V1 A13 A13 2 1
2 2 B14 B14 MPFLEPS FAN1 A14 A14 1 2 FUFM
1 3 B13 B13 +5VDPI
3 1 B1 B1 NC GND A15 A15 2
MPPLSW 2 2 Drum unit SIDCOSW A16 A16 1 LC1SW
1 3
7 1 Cassette1
YC9 8 2
MP tray YC16 R24V 1 1 5 3
12 1 12 12 OPEN UP24V 2 2 6 4 5
11 2 11 11 SCLK UPWIDE0 3 3 3 5 4
10 3 10 10 SDO UPWIDE1 4 4 4 6 3 PWSW1
9 4 9 9 SDI UPWIDE2 5 5 1 7 2
8 5 8 8 DFRDY GND 6 6 2 8 1
Built-in finisher 7 6 7 7 DFSEL
6 7 6 6 SGND
(option) 5 8 5 5 +5VD 7 1 Cassette2
4 9 4 4 PGND 8 2
3 10 3 3 PGND R24V 7 7 5 3
2 11 2 2 +24V LO24V 8 8 6 4 5
1 12 1 1 +24V LOWIDE0 9 9 3 5 4
LOWIDE1
LOWIDE2
10
11
10
11
4
1
6
7
3
2
PWSW2
GND 12 12 2 8 1

YC17
1 1 13 1 13 13 +24V1 YC8
JFSSOL 2 2 12 2 12 12 JOBSOL1 GND A1 A1 12 1 3 1
3 3 11 3 11 11 JOBSOL2 FEED3SW A2 A2 11 2 2 2 FSW3
1 2 10 4 10 10 +5VD(LED) +5V2 A3 A3 10 3 1 3
2 1 9 5 9 9 LED_REM R24V A4 A4 9 4 2 1
LEDPWB 3 8 6 8 8 +5V2 YC11 FEED3CL A5 A5 8 5 1 2 FCL3
JESW 2 7 7 7 7 JOB_EJECT_DET +24V2 1 1 1 GND A6 A6 7 6 3 1
1 6 8 6 6 GND PGND 2 2 2
3
FEED2SW A7 A7 6 7 2 2 FSW2
5 9 5 5 SET_SIG MMOT_RDY 3 3 DM +5V2 A8 A8 5 8 1 3
4 10 4 4 GND MMOT_CLK 4 4 4 GND A9 A9 4 9
3 3 11 3 3 GND MMOT_REM 5 5 5 FECOSW A10 A10 3 10
EPDSW 1 2 12 2 2 +5V1 R24V A11 A11 2 11 2
LC2SW
2 1 13 1 1 JOB_EJECT_SIG FEED2CL A12 A12 1 12 1
UPLIFSW2 A13 A13 5
+24V2 6 6 1 GND A14 A14 4
Job separator
PGND 7 7 2 UPLIFSW1 A15 A15 3 LM1
SMOT_RDY 8 8 3 PFM GND A16 A16 2 2 1
FCL2

Connector holder
SMOT_CLK 9 9 4 UPLIMOHI A17 A17 1 1 2
(option) SMOT_REM 10 10 5 GND A18 A18 2
LOLESW A19 A19 1 PLSW2

YC23
+24V2 1 5 1 1 2 1
FEED1CL 2 4 2 2 1 2 FCL1 GND B1 B1 2
SGND 3 3 3 3 3 1 UPLESW B2 B2 1 PLSW1
UPFEPS 4 2 4 4 2 2 FSW1 LOLIFSW2 B3 B3 5
+5VD 5 1 5 5 1 3 GND B4 B4 4 Upper primary paper unit
LOLIFSW1 B5 B5 3 LM2
GND B6 B6 2 1 7 3
LOLMOHI B7 B7 1 2 8 2 LSW1
GND B8 B8 6 1 3 5 1
FG YC13 UPLIPS B9 B9 5 2 4 6 3
DEV UNIT
1 14 1 10 1 1 BVSEL1 +5V B10 B10 4 3 5 3 2 PSW1
2 13 2 9 2 2 R24V GND B11 B11 3 4 6 4 1
DB 3 12 3 8 3 3 GND UPPAPS B12 B12 2 5 7 1
4 11 4 7 4 4 MHVDR +5V2 B13 B13 1 6 8 2
SEPARATE 5 10 5 6 5 5 HVCLK GND B14 B14 6 1
6 9 6 5 6 6 RHVDR LOLIPS B15 B15 5 2 1 7 3
AC HV 7 8 7 4 7 7 RICTL +5V B16 B16 4 3 2 8 2 LSW2
TC ROLL 8 7 8 3 8 8 TICTL EPWB GND B17 B17 3 4 3 5 1
9 6 9 2 9 9 BVSEL2 LOPAPS B18 B18 2 5 4 6 3
TC HV 10 5 10 1 10 10 THVDR +5V2 B19 B19 1 6 5 3 2 PSW2
MC 11 4 11 11 +3.3V 6 4 1
12 3 12 12 GND 7 1
MAIN HV 13 2 13 13 SUB_SDA 8 2
14 1 14 14 SUB_SCL
Lower primary paper unit
HVPWB

2-4-9
 2KR/2KS

Wiring diagram No.2

CN1 YC2
SGND 40 40 1 1 SGND
SGND 39 39 2 2 SGND PSPWB
B5 38 38 3 3 B6(MSB)
B4 37 37 4 4 B5
B3 36 36 5 5 B4 YC15 YC9
SGND 35 35 6 6 SGND +12V 6 1 6 1 6 1 1 1 +12VD
B2 34 34 7 7 B2 +5V 5 2 5 2 5 2 2 2 +5V
B1 33 33 8 8 B1 +5V 4 3 4 Relay 3 4 Relay 3 3 3 +5V
B0 32 32 9 9 B0(LSB) GND 3 4 3 4 3 connector 4 4 4 GND
SGND 31 31 10 10 SGND GND 2 5 2 connector 5 2 5 5 5 GND
G5 30 30 11 11 G5(MSB) GND 1 6 1 6 1 6 6 6 GND
G4 29 29 12 12 G4 7 7 NC
G3 28 28 13 13 G3
SGND 27 27 14 14 SGND
G2 26 26 15 15 G2
G1 25 25 16 16 G1
G0 24 24 17 17 G0(LSB)
SGND 23 23 18 18 SGND OPWB-U
R5 22 22 19 19 R5(MSB)
R4 21 21 20 20 R4
YC9 YC1

LCD
R3 20 20 21 21 R3
SGND 19 19 22 22 SGND SCAN4 1 1 8 8 SCAN4
R2 18 18 23 23 R2 SCAN5 2 2 7 7 SCAN5
R1 17 17 24 24 R1 LED5 3 3 6 6 LED5
R0 16 16 25 25 R0(LSB) LED6 4 4 5 5 LED6
SGND 15 15 26 26 SGND LED7 5 5 4 4 LED7
DE 14 14 27 27 DE S_LED0 6 6 3 3 LED0
SGND 13 13 28 28 SGND S_LED1 7 7 2 2 LED1 YC5-1
LR 12 12 29 29 L_R GND 8 8 1 1 SGND CT 1
UD 11 11 30 30 U_D TD+ 2
SGND 10 10 31 31 SGND TD- 3
DCLK 9 9 32 32 DCLK RD+ 4
NC 8 8 33 33 NC RD- 5
SGND 7 7 34 34 SGND OPWB-F CT 6
+5V 6 6 35 35 +5V CAT PHY 7
+5V 5 5 36 36 +5V ANO PHY 8 Ethernet
+5V 4 4 37 37 +5V YC10 YC1 CAT MAC 9
+5V 3 3 38 38 +5V SCAN5 1 1 A9 A1 5 5 SCAN5 ANO MAC 10
SGND 2 2 39 39 SGND LED5 2 2 A8 A2 4 4 LED5 LockPin1 G1
SGND 1 1 40 40 SGND LED6 3 3 A7 A3 3 3 LED6 LockPin2 G2
S_LED1 4 4 A6 A4 2 2 S LED1 LockPin3 G3
CN2 HOT 1 1 GND 5 5 A5 A5 1 1 SGND LockPin4 G4
COLD 2 2
YC5-2

Connector holder

Connector holder
Relay connector
OPWB-M VBUS U1
DATA- U2
DATA+ U3
H 1 1 YC4 YC12 GND U4 USB (PC)
V 2 2 SUPND_POWER 1 1 A4 A6 13 13 SUPND POWER LockPin1 GU1
LINPWB

GND 2 2 A3 A7 12 12 SGND LockPin2 GU2

YC6 PH_KEY 3 3 A2 A8 11 11 PH KEY
PGND 1 1 1 1 GND GND 4 4 A1 A9 10 10 SGND
+12V 2 2 2 2 +12V AUDIO 5 5 B9 B1 9 9 AUDIO YC19
BK ON 3 3 3 3 LCDBKLT SUPND_ENTR 6 6 B8 B2 8 8 SUPND ENTR VBUS 1
ADJUST 4 4 4 4 ADJUST +24V_DOWN 7 7 B7 B3 7 7 +24V DOWN DATA- 2
SGND 5 5 5 5 GND SW_FOOTN 8 8 B6 B4 6 6 SW FOOTN DATA+ 3
HLDPANEL 9 9 B5 B5 5 5 HLD PANEL GND 4 Type A
PANEL_RESET 10 10 B4 B6 4 4 PANEL RESET LockPin1 LP1
S_LED1 11 11 B3 B7 3 3 S LED1 LockPin2 LP2
S_LED0 12 12 B2 B8 2 2 S LED0
PANEL_STATUS 13 13 B1 B9 1 1 FPSTAT
YC1 YC7 YC20
KEYSENSE0 15 15 1 1 KEY0 VBUS 1
KEYSENSE1 14 14 2 2 KEY1 DATA- 2
KEYSENSE2 13 13 3 3 KEY2 DATA+ 3
KEYSENSE3 12 12 4 4 KEY3 GND 4 Type A
OPWB-R

KEYSENSE4 11 11 5 5 KEY4 LockPin1 LP1

SCAN0 10 10 6 6 SCAN0 MPWB LockPin2 LP2
SCAN1 9 9 7 7 SCAN1
SCAN2 8 8 8 8 SCAN2
SCAN3 7 7 9 9 SCAN3
SCAN6 6 6 10 10 SCAN6 YC23
LED0 5 5 11 11 LED0 +5V 3 1 +5V
LED1 4 4 12 12 LED1 GND 2 2 GND CONFM
PH KEY 3 3 13 13 PH_KEY CLT FAN 1 3 CLT FAN
+5V MSWON 2 2 14 14 SUPND_POWER YC3 YC17
SGND 1 1 15 15 GND VBUS 1 1 1 1 VBUS
DN 2 2 2 2 DATA -
DP 3 3 3 3 DATA +
ID 4 4 4 4 NC
GND 5 5 5 5 GND
LockPin(1) LP-1 LP-1 LockPin(1)
YC1 LockPin(2) LP-2 LP-2 LockPin(2)
NC 15 15 LockPin(3) LP-3 LP-3 LockPin(3)
NC 14 14
NC 13 13 YC8
SCAN6 12 12 1 1 SCAN6
OPWB-L

KEYSENSE5 11 11 2 2 KEY5
KEYSENSE6 10 10 3 3 KEY6 YC21
KEYSENSE7 9 9 4 4 KEY7 VBUS 1 1 1 VBUS
SCAN0 8 8 5 5 SCAN0 DATA - 2 2 2 DATA-
SCAN1 7 7 6 6 SCAN1 USB DATA + 3 3 3 DATA+
SCAN2 6 6 7 7 SCAN2 4 4 NC
SCAN3 5 5 8 8 SCAN3 GND 4 5 5 GND
LED2 4 4 9 9 LED2 LP1 LockPin1
LED3 3 3 10 10 LED3 LP2 LockPin2
LED4 2 2 11 11 LED4 LP3 LockPin3
SGND 1 1 12 12 GND

YC1
TOP 1 1 1 TOP Y+
Touch LEFT 2 2 2 LEFT X+
BOTTOM 3 3 3 BOT Y-
panel RIGHT 4 4 4 RIGHT X-

YC11
+ 1 1 VO2
Speaker - 2 2 VO1

YC5
2 FAN_REMOTE
1 5V2

2-4-10
 2KR/2KS

Wiring diagram No.3

YC19
10 10 GND Fuser unit
9 9 _SET_KT_SIG
1 8 8 KEY_CNT_REM YC4
Key card or Key counter 2 7 7 +24V3 OPEN A10 A10 1 4
3 6 6 KEY_SET SIG THCSEN A9 A9 2 3
MPWB (option) 4 5 5 GND THCSTD A8 A8 3 2 FTH2
4 4 _SET_MS_SIG GND A7 A7 4 1
3 3 GND
2 1 2 2 T_CNT_REM1 1 5 1
TC 1 2 1 1 +24V2 2 4 2
THFUSER A6 A6 3 3 3 1
+3.3V A5 A5 4 2 4 2 FTH1
FUSP0 A4 A4 5 1 5 FUPWB ILSW
YC3
FH2

Connector holder
EG SCLK 1 1 +5V A3 A3 1 1 1 1 1
HLD ENG
EG SI
2
3
2
3
REGFEPS
GND
A2
A1
A2
A1
2
3
2
3
2
3
RSW FH1 2
3
2
3
SLEEP 4
5
4
5
4 4 from EPWB
GND
GND 6 6
FTS1 FTS2 2 3
VMREA P 7 7 FAN5 B10 B10 1 2 1 2 YC1 YC2
VMRED P 8 8 +24V2 B9 B9 2 1 2 1 DUPFM1 3 1 2 2
VMREA N 9 9 2 2 1 1
VMRED N 10 10 1 2 1 3
VD A0 P 11 11 2 1 DUPFM2 RYPWB
VD D0 P 12 12 Heater YC5
VD A0 N 13 13 1 2 LIVE 3 3
VD D0 N 14 14 2 1 DUPFM3 controller SH 2 2
VD A1 P 15 15 MH 1 1
VD D1 P 16 16 DUSET B8 B8 1 8 Duplex unit
VD A1 N 17 17 YC2 FAN_CONV B7 B7 2 7 1 2
VD D1 N 18 18 +24V2 B6 B6 3 6 2 1
VD A2 P 19 19 1 1 MAIN_SCL +5V B5 B5 4 5
VD D2 P 20 20 2 2 HLD_ENG DUFEPS B4 B4 5 4 1 DUP 1 2
VD A2 N 21 21 3 3 MAIN_SI GND B3 B3 6 3 2 2 1 PCFM1 PSPWB
VD D2 N 22 22 4 4 EG_SLEEP DUCL B2 B2 7 2 3 PCSW
VD A3 P 23 23 5 5 GND R24V B1 B1 8 1 1 2
VD D3 P 24 24 6 6 GND 1 2 DUP 2 1 PCFM2
VD A3 N 25 25 7 7 GND 2 1 FCL
VD D3 N 26 26 8 8 VMRE_P 1 2
VMREB P 27 27 9 9 GND 2 1 PCFM3
VMREC P 28 28 10 10 VMRE_N
VMREB N 29 29 11 11 VCLK_P
VMREC N 30 30 12 12 VD_D0_P SSW1 SSW2
VD B0 P 31 31 13 13 VCLK_N
VD C0 P 32 32 14 14 VD_D0_N
VD B0 N 33 33 15 15 GND 2 2 NO NO
VD C0 N 34 34 16 16 VD_D1_P 1 1 COM COM
VD B1 P 35 35 17 17 GND
VD C1 P 36 36 18 18 VD_D1_N YC21 YC1
VD B1 N 37 37 19 19 GND +24VDR 1 1 1 1 +24VD
VD C1 N 38 38 20 20 VD_D2_P GND 2 2 2 2 GND
VD B2 P 39 39 21 21 GND GND 3 3 3 3 GND
VD C2 P 40 40 22 22 VD_D2_N GND 4 4 4 4 GND
VD B2 N 41 41 23 23 GND +3R3VD 5 5 5 5 +3.3VD
VD C2 N 42 42 24 24 VD_D3_P +5VD 6 6 6 6 +5VD
VD B3 P 43 43 25 25 GND +24VD 7 7 2 3 7 7 +24VDF
VD C3 P 44 44 26 26 VD_D3_N 1/2
VD B3 N 45 45 27 27 HSYNC_DP
YC22 to DP 1 1 4
YC2
VD C3 N 46 46 28 28 VSYNC_DP
VCLKOUT P 47 47 29 29 HSYNC_DN FAN3N 1 1 6 6 FANREM
GND 48 48 30 30 VSYNC_DN ZCROSS 2 2 5 5 ZCROSS
VCLKOUT N 49 49 31 31 HSYNC_CP +5VD 3 3 4 4 +5VD
GND 50 50 32 32 VSYNC_CP _HITON_M 4 4 3 3 HITON_M
33 33 HSYNC_CN _HITON_S 5 5 2 2 HITON_S
34 34 VSYNC_CN GND 6 6 1 1 GND
35 35 HSYNC_BP _HITON_3 7 7
YC4 36 36 VSYNC_BP
GND 1 1 37 37 HSYNC_BN YC10 (3/3)
GND 2 2 38 38 VSYNC_BN 1 1 SLEEP_N
HSYNCDN P 3 3 39 39 HSYNC_AP
VSYNCD P 4 4 40 40 VSYNC_AP
HSYNCDN N 5 5 41 41 HSYNC_AN
VSYNCD N 6 6 42 42 VSYNC_AN YC7
HSYNCCN P 7 7 43 43 GND 3 NEUTRAL
VSYNCC P 8 8 44 44 GND 2 NC
HSYNCCN N 9 9 45 45 GND 12 12 12 12 1 1 1 LIVE
VSYNCC N 10 10 46 46 MAIN_EGIRN YC15 11 11 11 11 2 2 CH (option)
HSYNCBN P 11 11 47 47 MAIN_SO PFFEED 8 8 10 10 10 10
VSYNCB P 12 12 48 48 MAIN_SDIR PFREADY 7 7 9 9 9 9 1 1
CH (option) YC8 (1/2) FILTER
HSYNCBN N 13 13 49 49 MAIN_SBSY PFSDO 6 6 8 8 Paper 8 8 2 2
PWB
VSYNCB N 14 14 50 50 24V_OFF PFSDI 5 5 7 7 7 7 INLET
HSYNCAN P 15 15 PFSCLK 4 4 6 6 feeder 6 6 6 6 P.GND
VSYNCA P 16 16 PFSEL 3 3 5 5 5 5 5 5 F.GND TB1_#250 1 TB3 TB1
HSYNCAN N 17 17 +5V 2 2 4 4 (option) 4 4 4 4 P.GND
VSYNCA N 18 18 GND 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 +5VDF TB2_#250 1 TB4 TB2
GND 19 19 2 2 2 2 2 2 +24VDF
GND 20 20 1 1 1 1 1 1 +24VDF
EG IRN 21 21
NC 22 22 TB3_#250 1
EG SO 23 23 YC7
NC 24 24 1 2 1 1 DLPCL TB4_#250 2
EG SDIR 25 25 DEVCL 2 1 2 2 +24V2 1 1 1
NC 26 26
YC14
2 2 2 MSW
EG SBSY 27 27 1 3 3
NC 28 28 SIRDY 8 8 B1 B8 4 4 4 YC4
+24V DOWN 29 29 DFRDY 7 7 B2 B7 FANREM 1 2 1 2
NC 30 30 SISEL 6 6 B3 B6
Document 24VD 2 1 2 1 PSFM2
DFSEL 5 5 B4 B5 finisher YC3
DFSCLK 4 4 B5 B4 A1 A6 1 1 SGND
DFSDI 3 3 B6 B3 (option) A2 A5 2 2 SGND 1 2
PSFM1
DFSDO 2 2 B7 B2 A3 A4 3 3 SGND 2 1
DET 1 1 B8 B1 A4 A3 4 4 SGND
A5 A2 5 5 SGND
LSU A6 A1 6 6 SGND
YC3
+5V1 14 1 14 1 5VSAFE YC6
LD_S/H 13 2 13 2 SAMPLE1 REM 1 2 2
LD_POWCNT 12 3 12 3 POWCONT +24V1 2 1 to RYPWB
APCPWB LD_ENB 11 4 11 4 LASER 3
VD_P 10 5 10 5 VD+
VD_N 9 6 9 6 VD-
SGND 8 7 8 7 GND
PDPWB BD 7 8 7 8 PD
SGND 6 9 6 9 GND
+24V1 5 10 5 10 R24V
PGND 4 11 4 11 GND
PM POL_REM 3 12 3 12 SCAN
POL_RDY 2 13 2 13 SCRDYN
POL_CLK 1 14 1 14 SCCLK

EPWB

2-4-11
 2KR/2KS

Wiring diagram No.4

ISCPWB
MPWB
YC1 YC1 YC4 YC11
+5V 1 16 +5V1 GND 1 1 1 1 GND
+5V 2 15 +5V1 SCLK 2 2 2 2 G6_SC_SCLK_BUF YC10
+5V 3 14 +5V1 GND 3 3 3 3 GND GND 1 1 YC2
+5V 4 13 +5V1 SI 4 4 4 4 G6_SC_SI_BUF GND 2 2 GND 1 1 1 1 GND
CCDCLK21 5 12 CCDCLK21 GND 5 5 5 5 GND 3.3V 3 3 A+ 2 2 2 2 TXP
GND 6 11 GND SO 6 6 6 6 G6_SC_SO 3.3V 4 4 A- 3 3 3 3 TXN
GND 7 10 GND SBSY 7 7 7 7 G6_SC_SBSY 3.3V 5 5 GND 4 4 4 4 GND
CCDCLK11 8 9 CCDCLK11 SDIR 8 8 8 8 G6_SC_SDIR 3.3V 6 6 B- 5 5 5 5 RXN
GND 9 8 GND IRN 9 9 9 9 G6_SC_IRN VCLKB 7 7 B+ 6 6 6 6 RXP
GND 10 7 GND HLD_ScaN 10 10 10 10 HLD_SCN_BUF VSYNCB 8 8 GND 7 7 7 7 GND
CCDLP1A 11 6 CCDLP1A GND 11 11 11 11 GND HSYNCB 9 9
GND 12 5 GND GND 12 12 12 12 GND MREB 10 10
CCDRS 13 4 CCDRS GND 13 13 13 13 GND GND 11 11
GND 14 3 GND SAD4N 15 15 15 15 IS_SAD4N DRB0 12 12
CCDCP 15 2 CCDCP SDA4P 14 14 14 14 IS_SAD4P DRB1 13 13
+3.3V 16 1 +3.3V GND 16 16 16 16 GND DRB2 14 14
SACKN 18 18 18 18 IS_SACKN DRB3 15 15
YC2 YC2 SACKP 17 17 17 17 IS_SACKP DRB4 16 16
TXOUTA2N 1 25 TXOUTA2N GND 19 19 19 19 GND DRB5 17 17
CCD TXOUTA2P 2 24 TXOUTA2P SAD3N 21 21 21 21 IS_SAD3N DRB6 18 18
TXOUTB2N 3 23 TXOUTB2N SAD3P 20 20 20 20 IS_SAD3P DRB7 19 19
PWB TXOUTB2P 4 22 TXOUTB2P GND 22 22 22 22 GND GND 20 20
TXOUTC2N 5 21 TXOUTC2N SAD2N 24 24 24 24 IS_SAD2N DGB0 21 21 HDD2
TXOUTC2P 6 20 TXOUTC2P SAD2P 23 23 23 23 IS_SAD2P DGB1 22 22
TXOUTB1N 7 19 TXOUTB1N GND 25 25 25 25 GND DGB2 23 23
TXOUTB1P 8 18 TXOUTB1P SAD1N 27 27 27 27 IS_SAD1N DGB3 24 24
TXOUTC1N 9 17 TXOUTC1N SAD1P 26 26 26 26 IS_SAD1P DGB4 25 25
TXOUTC1P 10 16 TXOUTC1P GND 28 28 28 28 GND DGB5 26 26
TXCLK1N 11 15 TXCLK1N GND 29 29 29 29 GND DGB6 27 27
TXCLK1P 12 14 TXCLK1P GND 30 30 30 30 GND DGB7 28 28
AFESCLK 13 13 AFESCLK GND 31 31 31 31 GND GND 29 29
AFESDID 14 12 AFESDOD DBB0 30 30
AFESEN 15 11 AFESEN DBB1 31 31
AFESDOD 16 10 AFESDID DBB2 32 32 1 1 3.3V
RESETN 17 9 SHD_RESN DBB3 33 33 2 2 3.3V
CLPIN 18 8 FECP1 DBB4 34 34 3 3 3.3V
+3.3V 19 7 +3.3V DBB5 35 35 4 4 GND
MCLK 20 6 ADCLK DBB6 36 36 5 5 GND
GND 21 5 GND DBB7 37 37 6 6 GND
SHD 22 4 FESHD TWS_SCM_HALF 38 38 7 7 5V
GND 23 3 GND RES_SLEEPTWS1 39 39 8 8 5V

DPRPWB (option)
SHP 24 2 FESHP TWS_DET1 40 40 9 9 5V
+10V1 25 1 +10V1 GND 41 41 10 10 GND
LA2 42 42 11 11 ACT
LA3 43 43 12 12 GND
LA4 44 44 13 13 12V
GND 3 3 LA5 45 45 14 14 12V
OSS ORGSW 2 2 LA6 46 46 15 15 12V
+5V 1 1 LA7 47 47
LA8 48 48
LA9 49 49
LA10 50 50 YC1
YC7 YC2 YC3 LA11 51 51 GND 1 1 1 1 GND
1 1 SMOT BN +5V 9 9 1 1 +5V LA12 52 52 A+ 2 2 2 2 TXP
2 2 SMOT AN 2 2 +5V LA13 53 53 A- 3 3 3 3 TXN
SM 3 3 SMOT BP GND 16 16 3 3 GND LA14 54 54 GND 4 4 4 4 GND
4 4 SMOT AP 4 4 GND LA15 55 55 B- 5 5 5 5 RXN
GND 18 18 5 5 GND LA16 56 56 B+ 6 6 6 6 RXP
GND 15 15 6 6 GND LA17 57 57 GND 7 7 7 7 GND
YC5 +12V 7 7 7 7 +12V GND 58 58
1 1 5 5 +24V +12V 5 5 8 8 +12V LD0 59 59
2 2 4 4 SLAMPO INV_CLK 20 20 9 9 INV_CLK LD1 60 60
EL INPWB 3 3 3 3 PGND 10 10 ORGSW LD2 61 61
4 4 2 2 INVTH DPCLK 10 10 11 11 DPCLK LD3 62 62
5 5 1 1 INV_CL DPSDO 12 12 12 12 DPSDO LD4 63 63
DPSDI 8 8 13 13 DPSDI LD5 64 64
DPSEL 6 6 14 14 DPSEL LD6 65 65
DPEND 4 4 15 15 DPEND LD7 66 66
YC3 DPRDY 2 2 16 16 DPRDY GND 67 67
FANREM 1 Connector 2 1 2 FANREM DPTMG 1 1 17 17 DPTMG INT 68 68
SFM +24V 2 holder 1 2 1 +24V DP_CO 14 14 18 18 DP_CO RESETZ 69 69
SMTVREF 17 17 19 19 SMTVREF GND 70 70
SM_STP 19 19 20 20 SM_STP CEZ 71 71 HDD1
SM_STB 21 21 21 21 SM_STB WEZ 72 72
SM_FR 13 13 22 22 SM_FR OEZ 73 73
YC8 SLAMP 25 25 23 23 SLAMP SCLKIN 74 74
SGND 3 3 1 1 SGND FANREM 11 11 24 24 FANREM 3.3V 75 75
HPSW HPSW 2 2 2 2 HPSW COSW1 22 22 25 25 COSW1 3.3V 76 76
+5V 1 1 3 3 +5V HPSW 3 3 26 26 HPSW 3.3V 77 77
MON24V 23 23 27 27 MON24V 3.3V 78 78
INVTH 24 24 28 28 INVTH GND 79 79
NC 26 26 GND 80 80
1 1 3.3V
2 2 3.3V
YC4 3 3 3.3V
SGND 3 3 1 1 SGND 4 4 GND
ODSW COSW1 2 2 2 2 COSW1 5 5 GND
+5V 1 1 3 3 +5V 6 6 GND
4 4 NC YC6 YC8 (2/2) 7 7 5V
9 9 14 14 +3.3VD +5VD 10 10 8 8 5V
13 13 +3.3VD GND 9 9 4 4 9 9 5V
12 12 +5VD GND 8 8 3 3 10 10 GND
4 4 11 11 +12VD +12V 7 7 2 2 11 11 ACT
10 10 GND 1 1 12 12 GND
YC1 3 3 9 9 GND 13 13 12V
24V1 1 1 8 7 8 8 GND 14 14 12V
2/2

YC6
GND 2 2 2 2 5 6 7 7 GND PSPWB 15 15 12V
GND 3 3 6 6 GND
3 3 3 3 1 1 DPCLK 12V1 4 4 8 7 5 5 GND YC10 (1/3) YC24
2 2 2 2 2 2 DPSDO 5 6 4 4 GND 5V 3 3 1 1 5V
1 1 1 1 3 3 DPSDI 3 3 +24VD 5V 4 4 2 2 5V
4 4 4 4 4 4 DPSEL 4 3 2 2 +24VD 5V 5 5 3 3 5V
6 6 6 6 5 5 DPEND 1 2 1 1 +24VD 5V 6 6 4 4 5V
5 5 5 5 6 6 DPRDY 6 6 GND 13 13 5 5 GND
11 11 11 11 7 7 DPTMG YC10 (2/3) GND 14 14 6 6 GND
12 12 12 12 8 8 DP CO 5 5 1 PSPWB:YC1(7) 2 2 +5VDF GND 15 15 7 7 GND
9 9 NC ISM 7 7 11 11 GND GND 16 16 8 8 GND
10 10 NC 8 8
DPDPWB 10 10 10 10 11 11 GND PWB
9 9 9 9 12 12 GND 9 9 NC
(option) 8 8 8 8 13 13 GND
7 7 7 7 14 14 GND

YC1
+24V1 4 4 1 1
GND 3 3 2 2
+5V1 2 2 3 3
FG 1 1 4 4

2-4-12
 2KR/2KS

Wiring diagram No.5

MPWB CFPWB FCPWB FCPWB

YC8 YC1 YC5 YC1 YC3 YC4

GND 1 1 1 1 GND GND 40 40 40 40 GND NC A1 A1 NC NC A1 A1 NC
AUDIO 2 2 2 2 AUDIO VCC 39 39 39 39 VCC NC A2 A2 NC NC A2 A2 NC
SEL AUDIO0 3 3 3 3 SEL AUDIO0 GND 38 38 38 38 GND AUDIO A3 A3 AUDIO AUDIO A3 A3 AUDIO
SEL AUDIO1 4 4 4 4 SEL AUDIO1 VCC 37 37 37 37 VCC +3.3V A4 A4 +3.3V +3.3V A4 A4 +3.3V
_REG 5 5 5 5 _REG GND 36 36 36 36 GND GND A5 A5 GND GND A5 A5 GND
A8 6 6 6 6 A8 CD2N 35 35 35 35 CD2N A13 A6 A6 A13 A13 A6 A6 A13
A15 7 7 7 7 A15 D10 34 34 34 34 D10 A11 A7 A7 A11 A11 A7 A7 A11
A7 8 8 8 8 A7 D9 33 33 33 33 D9 A9 A8 A8 A9 A9 A8 A8 A9
A14 9 9 9 9 A14 D2 32 32 32 32 D2 GND A9 A9 GND GND A9 A9 GND
A6 10 10 10 10 A6 D8 31 31 31 31 D8 A6 A10 A10 A6 A6 A10 A10 A6
A13 11 11 11 11 A13 D1 30 30 30 30 D1 A4 A11 A11 A4 A4 A11 A11 A4
A5 12 12 12 12 A5 D0 29 29 29 29 D0 A2 A12 A12 A2 A2 A12 A12 A2
A12 13 13 13 13 A12 A1 28 28 28 28 A1 GND A13 A13 GND GND A13 A13 GND
A4 14 14 14 14 A4 REGN 27 27 27 27 REGN OP2IF A14 A14 OP2IF OP2IF A14 A14 OP2IF
A11 15 15 15 15 A11 A2 26 26 26 26 A2 OP2IR A15 A15 OP2IR OP2IR A15 A15 OP2IR
A3 16 16 16 16 A3 WAITN 25 25 25 25 WAITN RDY A16 A16 RDY RDY A16 A16 RDY
A10 17 17 17 17 A10 A3 24 24 24 24 A3 GND A17 A17 GND GND A17 A17 GND
A2 18 18 18 18 A2 RESET 23 23 23 23 RESET IOR A18 A18 IOR IOR A18 A18 IOR
A9 19 19 19 19 A9 A4 22 22 22 22 A4 RESET A19 A19 RESET RESET A19 A19 RESET
A1 20 20 20 20 A1 A5 21 21 21 21 A5 D15 A20 A20 D15 D15 A20 A20 D15
GND 21 21 21 21 GND A6 20 20 20 20 A6 GND A21 A21 GND GND A21 A21 GND
GND 22 22 22 22 GND A7 19 19 19 19 A7 D12 A22 A22 D12 D12 A22 A22 D12
D8 23 23 23 23 D8 A8 18 18 18 18 A8 D10 A23 A23 D10 D10 A23 A23 D10
D0 24 24 24 24 D0 WEN 17 17 17 17 WEN D8 A24 A24 D8 D8 A24 A24 D8
D9 25 25 25 25 D9 A9 16 16 16 16 A9 GND A25 A25 GND GND A25 A25 GND
D1 26 26 26 26 D1 OEN 15 15 15 15 OEN D5 A26 A26 D5 D5 A26 A26 D5
D10 27 27 27 27 D10 A10 14 14 14 14 A10 D3 A27 A27 D3 D3 A27 A27 D3
D2 28 28 28 28 D2 CE2N 13 13 13 13 CE2N D1 A28 A28 D1 D1 A28 A28 D1
D11 29 29 29 29 D11 CE1N 12 12 12 12 CE1N GND A29 A29 GND GND A29 A29 GND
D3 30 30 30 30 D3 D15 11 11 11 11 D15 NC A30 A30 NC NC A30 A30 NC
GND 31 31 31 31 GND D7 10 10 10 10 D7
GND 32 32 32 32 GND D14 9 9 9 9 D14 NC B1 B1 NC NC B1 B1 NC
D12 33 33 33 33 D12 D6 8 8 8 8 D6 TXDREQ B2 B2 TXDREQ TXDREQ B2 B2 TXDREQ
D4 34 34 34 34 D4 D13 7 7 7 7 D13 +3.3V B3 B3 +3.3V +3.3V B3 B3 +3.3V
D13 35 35 35 35 D13 D5 6 6 6 6 D5 A15 B4 B4 A15 A15 B4 B4 A15
D5 36 36 36 36 D5 D12 5 5 5 5 D12 A14 B5 B5 A14 A14 B5 B5 A14
D14 37 37 37 37 D14 D4 4 4 4 4 D4 A12 B6 B6 A12 A12 B6 B6 A12
D6 38 38 38 38 D6 D11 3 3 3 3 D11 A10 B7 B7 A10 A10 B7 B7 A10
D15 39 39 39 39 D15 D3 2 2 2 2 D3 A8 B8 B8 A8 A8 B8 B8 A8
D7 40 40 40 40 D7 CD1N 1 1 1 1 CD1N A7 B9 B9 A7 A7 B9 B9 A7
GND 41 41 41 41 GND A5 B10 B10 A5 A5 B10 B10 A5
GND 42 42 42 42 GND A3 B11 B11 A3 A3 B11 B11 A3
KUIODREQT0 43 43 43 43 KUIODREQT0 A1 B12 B12 A1 A1 B12 B12 A1
KUIODREQT1 44 44 44 44 KUIODREQT1 +3.3V B13 B13 +3.3V +3.3V B13 B13 +3.3V
KUIODREQR0 45 45 45 45 KUIODREQR0 OP2ACK B14 B14 OP2ACK OP2ACK B14 B14 OP2ACK
KUIODREQR1 46 46 46 46 KUIODREQR1 +5V B15 B15 +5V +5V B15 B15 +5V
KUIOIORN0 47 47 47 47 KUIOIORN0 RXDREQ B16 B16 RXDREQ RXDREQ B16 B16 RXDREQ
KUIOIORN1 48 48 48 48 KUIOIORN1 RXDMACK B17 B17 RXDMACK RXDMACK B17 B17 RXDMACK
KUIOIOWN0 49 49 49 49 KUIOIOWN0 IOW B18 B18 IOW IOW B18 B18 IOW
KUIOIOWN1 50 50 50 50 KUIOIOWN1 TXDMACK B19 B19 TXDMACK TXDMACK B19 B19 TXDMACK
D14 B20 B20 D14 D14 B20 B20 D14
D13 B21 B21 D13 D13 B21 B21 D13
YC9 YC2 D11 B22 B22 D11 D11 B22 B22 D11
KUIOCSN0 1 1 1 1 KUIOCSN0 D9 B23 B23 D9 D9 B23 B23 D9
KUIOCSN1 2 2 2 2 KUIOCSN1 D7 B24 B24 D7 D7 B24 B24 D7
KUIOACKN0 3 3 3 3 KUIOACKN0 D6 B25 B25 D6 D6 B25 B25 D6
KUIOACKN1 4 4 4 4 KUIOACKN1 D4 B26 B26 D4 D4 B26 B26 D4
KUIOIRN0 5 5 5 5 KUIOIRN0 D2 B27 B27 D2 D2 B27 B27 D2
KUIOIRN1 6 6 6 6 KUIOIRN1 D0 B28 B28 D0 D0 B28 B28 D0
KUIORDY0 7 7 7 7 KUIORDY0 NC B29 B29 NC NC B29 B29 NC
KUIORDY1 8 8 8 8 KUIORDY1 NC B30 B30 NC NC B30 B30 NC
GND 9 9 9 9 GND
GND 10 10 10 10 GND
KUIODACKRN0 11 11 11 11 KUIODACKRN0
KUIODACKRN1 12 12 12 12 KUIODACKRN1
KUIODACKTN0 13 13 13 13 KUIODACKTN0
KUIODACKTN1 14 14 14 14 KUIODACKTN1
KUIORSTN0 15 15 15 15 KUIORSTN0
KUIORSTN1 16 16 16 16 KUIORSTN1
GND 17 17 17 17 GND
GND 18 18 18 18 GND
SLEEP 19 19 19 19 3.3V_CON
CFOEN0 20 20 20 20 CFOEN0
EXTBOEN 21 21 21 21 EXTBOEN
CFWEN0 22 22 22 22 CFWEN0
EXTBDIR 23 23 23 23 EXTBDIR
CFRST0 24 24 24 24 CFRST0
CF0CSN0 25 25 25 25 CF0CSN0
CFWAITN0 26 26 26 26 CFWAITN0
CF0CSN1 27 27 27 27 CF0CSN1
CF0CDET1 28 28 28 28 CF0CDET1
GND 29 29 29 29 GND
CF0CDET2 30 30 30 30 CF0CDET2
IFPWB
YC25 YC6
5V 1 1 1 1 5V
GND 2 2 2 2 GND

2-4-13